©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP”
(U.S. residents only).
www.jeep.com⁄en ⁄owners (U.S.) provides special oers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation ⁄ Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle
by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the
“Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow
the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
media and warranty booklet by visiting:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
Jeep.com (U.S.)
Jeep.ca (Canada)
18JL-926-AA
WRANGLER
Third Edition Rev 1
User Guide
2018 JEEP
WRANGLER USER GUIDE
ALL NEW
3712766_18c_Jeep_Wrangler_JL_UG_Rev1_091118.indd 1 9/11/18 9:43 AM
Important
Get warranty and other information online – you can
review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of
the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada)
homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention o the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous
and should never be done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your
vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular
telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
Driving and Alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and
your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Jeep
brand
vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
source for common questions. However, it is not
a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance
procedures and important safety messages, please
consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the back cover
and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply
to your vehicle. For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local Jeep
brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-road
highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
3712766_18c_Jeep_Wrangler_JL_UG_Rev1_091118.indd 2 9/11/18 9:43 AM
Congratulations on selecting your new FCA
US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents
precision workmanship, distinctive styling,
and high quality.
ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the
road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the steering wheel. You have full responsibil-
ity and assume all risks related to the use of
the features and applications in this vehicle.
Only use the features and applications when
it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result
in an accident involving serious injury or death.
This guide illustrates and describes the op-
eration of features and equipment that are
either standard or optional on this vehicle.
This guide may also include a description of
features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle.
Please disregard any features and equipment
described in this guide that are not available
on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the
right to make changes in design and specifi-
cations and/or make additions to or improve-
ments to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on prod-
ucts previously manufactured.
This User Guide has been prepared to help
you quickly become acquainted with the im-
portant features of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information.
When it comes to service, remember that your
authorized dealer knows your Jeep
®
vehicle
best, has factory-trained technicians and
genuine MOPAR
®
parts, and cares about your
satisfaction.
HOW TO FIND YOUR
OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE
This publication has been prepared as a ref-
erence item to help you quickly become ac-
quainted with the most important features
and processes of your vehicle. It contains
most things you will need to operate and
maintain the vehicle, including emergency
information and procedures.
This User Guide is not a replacement for the full
Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every
operation and procedure possible with your
vehicle.
For more detailed descriptions of the topics
discussed in this User Guide, as well as
information covering features and processes
not covered in this User Guide, the full ve-
hicle Owner’s Manual can be accessed for
free online in a printer-friendly PDF format.
To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable
supplement for your vehicle, follow the appro-
priate web address below:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html
(U.S. Residents)
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)
FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our
environment and natural resources. By con-
verting from paper to electronic delivery for
the majority of the user information for your
vehicle, together we greatly reduce the de-
mand for tree-based products and lessen the
stress on our environment.
1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Essential Information
Each time direction instructions (left/right or
forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are
given, these must be intended as regarding
an occupant in the driver's seat. Special
cases not complying with this rule will be
properly specified in the text.
The figures in this User Guide are provided by
way of example only: this might imply that
some details of the image do not correspond
to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.
In addition, the User Guide has been con-
ceived considering vehicles with the steering
wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible
that in vehicles with the steering wheel on the
right side, the position or construction of
some controls is not exactly mirror-like with
respect to the figure.
To identify the chapter with the information
needed you can consult the index at the end
of this User Guide.
Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi-
cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd
page. A few pages further there is a key for
getting to know the chapter order and the
relevant symbols in the tabs. There is always
a textual indication of the current chapter at
the side of each even page.
Symbols
Some vehicle components have colored la-
bels whose symbols indicate precautions to
be observed when using this component.
Refer to “Warning Lights and Messages” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” for
further information on the symbols used in
your vehicle.
ROLLOVER WARNING
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This
vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a
higher center of gravity than many passenger
vehicles. It is capable of performing better in
a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven
in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out
of control. Because of the higher center of
gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may
roll over while some other vehicles may not.
Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneu-
vers, or other unsafe driving actions that can
cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to oper-
ate this vehicle safely may result in a colli-
sion, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or
fatal injury. Drive carefully.
Rollover Warning Label
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
2
Failure to use the driver and passenger seat
belts provided is a major cause of severe or
fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government
notes that the universal use of existing seat
belts could cut the highway death toll by
10,000 or more each year and could reduce
disabling injuries by two million annually. In
a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi-
cantly more likely to die than a person wear-
ing a seat belt. Always buckle up.
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
While reading this User Guide you will find a
series of WARNINGS to be followed to pre-
vent incorrect use of components which
could cause accidents or injuries.
There are also CAUTIONS that must be fol-
lowed to prevent against procedures that
could result in damage to your vehicle.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
3
4
6
INSTRUMENT PANEL
Instrument Panel
1 — Air Outlets 4 — Speed Control Buttons 7 — Climate Controls
2 — Instrument Cluster Display Controls 5 — Ignition Button 8 — Power Window Switches
3 — Instrument Cluster 6 — Uconnect Radio 9 — Offroad Switch Panel
GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
8
INTERIOR
Interior Features
1 — Steering Wheel 3 — Gear Selector
2 — Seats 4 — Glove Compartment
9
10
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
VEHICLE USER GUIDE —
IFEQUIPPED................13
KEYS .....................14
KeyFob.....................14
IGNITIONSWITCH............16
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition .......16
REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM —
IFEQUIPPED................17
How To Use Remote Start ..........18
To Enter Remote Start Mode ........18
General Information .............19
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM —
IFEQUIPPED................19
To Arm The System .............19
To Disarm The System ............19
DOORS ...................20
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
(If Equipped)..................20
Front Door Removal .............23
Rear Door Removal
(Four-Door Models) ..............26
SEATS ....................27
Heated Seats — If Equipped ........28
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat —
Two Door Models ...............29
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat —
Four Door Models ...............29
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat —
Two Door Models ...............30
HEADRESTRAINTS...........32
Front Head Restraints ............32
Rear Head Restraints —
Two Door Models ...............33
Rear Head Restraints —
Four Door Models ...............34
STEERING WHEEL............35
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column......35
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . .35
MIRRORS ..................36
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .......36
EXTERIORLIGHTS ...........37
Headlight Switch ...............37
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped .37
High/Low Beam Switch ...........37
Flash-To-Pass .................38
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . .38
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ......38
Turn Signals ..................38
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped ....38
Lights-On Reminder .............38
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
ANDWASHERS .............39
Windshield Wiper Operation.........39
CLIMATECONTROLS .........40
Automatic Climate Controls Overview . . .40
Climate Control Functions ..........46
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped ..................46
Operating Tips ................47
POWER WINDOWS —
IF EQUIPPED ...............48
Auto-Down Feature ..............49
Wind Buffeting ................49
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
11
REMOVABLE TOP
INFORMATION ..............49
Soft Top — Two And Four Door Models . .50
Freedom Top And Hard Top .........54
Dual Top — If Equipped ...........56
Wind Buffeting ................57
POWER SLIDING TOP —
IFEQUIPPED................57
Opening The Power Top ...........58
Closing The Power Top ............58
Pinch Protect Feature ............58
HOOD ....................59
Opening The Hood ..............59
Closing The Hood ...............59
REARSWINGGATE ..........59
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER(HOMELINK).........60
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink ...................61
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels....61
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device .....61
Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener ..................62
Programming HomeLink To A
Miscellaneous Device ............63
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button......................63
General Information .............63
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT........64
Electrical Power Outlets ...........64
Power Inverter — If Equipped .......66
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped .....67
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
12
VEHICLE USER GUIDE —
IF EQUIPPED
Access your Owner’s Information right
through your Uconnect 4C or 4C NAV touch-
screen system — If Equipped.
To access the Vehicle User Guide on your
Uconnect Touchscreen: Press the Uconnect
Apps button. From there, press the Vehicle
User Guide icon on your touchscreen. No
Uconnect registration is required.
NOTE:
Vehicle User Guide features are not available
while the vehicle is moving. If you try to
access while the vehicle is in motion, the
system will display: Feature not available
while the vehicle is in motion.
Pre-Installed Features
• Your User Guide
— Updated in
real-time
• Available when
and where you
need it
• Touchscreen
convenience
• Customizable
interface
• Maintenance
schedules and
information
•
Multilingual
• Comprehensive
icon &
symbol glossary
Once you launch your Vehicle User Guide,
you will be able to explore your warranty
information and radio manual when and
where you need them. Your Uconnect system
displays the Vehicle User Guide on your
touchscreen radio to assist in better under-
standing your vehicle.
There’s no app to download, no phone to
connect and no external device needed for
playback. Plus, it’s updated throughout the
year, in real-time, so it never goes out of date.
Features/Benefits
• Pre-installed on your Uconnect
touchscreen radio
• Enhanced search and browsing capability
• Robust NAV application — If Equipped
• Add selected topics to a fast-access
Favorites category
• Icon and symbol glossary
• Warranty information
• Crucial driver information and assistance:
• Operating
Instructions
• Maintenance
Schedules
• Warranty
Information
• Emergency
Procedures
• Fluid Level
Standards
• 911 Contact
and More
Tip: When viewing a topic, tap the star icon to
add it to your Favorites, for easy access in the
future.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display
Vehicle User Guide Touchscreen Icon
13
KEYS
Key Fob
WARNING!
Push the Mechanical Key Release Button
only with the key fob facing away from your
body, especially your eyes and objects that
may be damaged, such as clothing.
Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.
The ignition system consists of a key fob with
Keyless Go and a START/STOP push button
ignition system. The Remote Keyless Entry
system consists of a key fob with a mechani-
cal key and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if
equipped.
NOTE:
The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle if it is located next to a mobile phone,
laptop or other electronic device; these de-
vices may block the key fob’s wireless signal.
CAUTION!
The electrical components inside of the
key fob may be damaged if the key fob is
subjected to strong electrical shocks. In
order to ensure complete efficiency of the
CAUTION!
electronic devices inside of the key fob,
avoid exposing the key fob to direct sun-
light.
The key fob allows you to lock or unlock the
doors and swing gate from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) by pressing the
appropriate button on the fob. The key fob
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to
activate the system.
NOTE:
With the ignition in ON/RUN position and
with the vehicle doors open, the lock button
will be disabled, and only the unlock button
will be enabled. All RKE commands will be
disabled once the vehicle begins moving at
5 mph (8 km/h) or above.
Backup Mode Starting
In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or fully depleted battery. A low key
fob battery can be verified by referring to the
instrument cluster, which will display direc-
tions to follow.
Key Fob
1 — Key Release Button
2 — Unlock Button
3 — Lock Button
4 — Remote Start
5 — Panic Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
14
NOTE:
A low key fob battery condition may be indi-
cated by a message in the instrument cluster
display, or by the LED light on the key fob. If
the LED key fob light no longer illuminates
from key fob button pushes, then the key fob
battery requires replacement.
In this situation, a back up method can be
used to operate the ignition switch. Put the
nose side of the key fob against the ENGINE
START/STOP button, and push to operate the
ignition switch.
To Unlock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the key fob unlock button
once to unlock the driver's door only, or twice
to unlock all the doors and swing gate. When
the key fob unlock button is pushed, the
Illuminated Entry will initiate, and the turn
signal lights will flash twice.
To Lock The Doors And Swing Gate
Push and release the lock button on the key
fob to lock all doors. The turn signals will
flash, and the horn will chirp once to ac-
knowledge the lock signal.
Request For Additional Key Fobs
NOTE:
Only key fobs that are programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start and
operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is pro-
grammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-
grammed to any other vehicle.
WARNING!
• Always remove the key fobs from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving
the vehicle unattended.
• Always remember to place the ignition in
the OFF mode.
Duplication of key fobs may be performed at
an authorized dealer. This procedure consists
of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key fob is one that has
never been programmed.
NOTE:
• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with
you to an authorized dealer.
• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut
to match the vehicle locks.
Backup Starting Method
15
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
IGNITION SWITCH
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition
This feature allows the driver to operate the
ignition switch with the push of a button as
long as the key fob is in the passenger com-
partment.
The Keyless Push Button Ignition has several
operating modes that are labeled and will
illuminate when in position. These modes are
OFF, ACC, RUN, and START.
NOTE:
In case the ignition switch does not change
with the push of a button, the key fob may
have a low or dead battery. In this situation, a
back up method can be used to operate the
ignition switch. Put the nose side of the key
fob (side opposite of the Emergency Key)
against the ENGINE START/STOP button and
push to operate the ignition switch.
The push button ignition can be placed in the
following modes:
OFF
• The engine is stopped.
• Some electrical devices (e.g. Central lock-
ing, alarm, etc.) are available.
START/STOP Ignition Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
16
ACC
• Engine is not started.
• Some electrical devices are available.
RUN
• Driving position.
• All electrical devices are available.
START
• The engine will start.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the vehicle and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
WARNING!
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to
children, and do not leave the ignition of
a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-
N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other con-
trols, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for
thieves. Always remove key fob from the
vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the
vehicle unattended.
NOTE:
Refer to "Starting The Engine," in "Starting
And Operating" in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
REMOTE STARTING
SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
This system uses the key fob to start
the engine conveniently from out-
side the vehicle while still main-
taining security. The system has a
range of 328 ft (100 m).
The Remote Starting System also activates
the Climate Control, vented seats (if
equipped) in temperatures above 80° F
(26.7° C), and the heated seats (if equipped),
and heated steering wheel (if equipped) in
temperatures below 40° F (4.4° C). Refer to
“Heated Seats” in “Getting To Know Your
Vehicle” in the Owner’s Manual for further
information.
NOTE:
• The vehicle must be equipped with an au-
tomatic transmission to be equipped with
Remote Start.
• Obstructions between the vehicle and key
fob may reduce this range.
17
How To Use Remote Start
• Push Remote Start button on the key fob
twice within five seconds. Pushing the Re-
mote Start button a third time shuts the
engine off.
• To drive the vehicle, push unlock button,
and place the ignition in the ON/RUN po-
sition.
• With remote start, the engine will only run
for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the igni-
tion key is placed in the ON/RUN position.
• The vehicle must be started with the key
after two consecutive timeouts.
All of the following conditions must be met
before the engine will remote start:
• Gear Selector in PARK
• Doors closed
• Hood closed
• Swing Gate closed
• Hazard switch off
• Brake switch inactive
(brake pedal not pushed)
• Battery at an acceptable charge level
• PANIC button not pushed
• System not disabled from previous remote
start event
• Vehicle alarm system indicator flashing
• Ignition in STOP/OFF position
• Fuel level meets minimum requirement
• All removable doors must not be removed
• Malfunction indicator light not illuminated
WARNING!
• Do not start or run an engine in a closed
garage or confined area. Exhaust gas
contains Carbon Monoxide (CO) which
is odorless and colorless. Carbon Mon-
oxide is poisonous and can cause seri-
ous injury or death when inhaled.
• Keep key fobs away from children. Op-
eration of the Remote Start System,
windows, door locks or other controls
could cause serious injury or death.
To Enter Remote Start Mode
Push and release the Remote Start button on
the key fob twice within five seconds. The
vehicle doors will lock, the turn signals will
flash twice, and the horn will chirp twice.
Then the engine will start, and the vehicle
will remain in the Remote Start mode for a
15-minute cycle.
NOTE:
• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is
low, the vehicle will start and then shut
down in 10 seconds.
• The park lamps will turn on and remain on
during Remote Start mode.
• For security, power window operation is
disabled when the vehicle is in the Remote
Start mode.
• The engine can be started two consecutive
times (two 15-minute cycles) with the key
fob. However, the ignition must be placed
in the ON/RUN position before you can
repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
18
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM
— IF EQUIPPED
The vehicle security alarm monitors the ve-
hicle doors for unauthorized entry and the
ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
When the alarm is activated, the interior
switches for door locks are disabled. The
vehicle security alarm provides both audible
and visible signals. If something triggers the
alarm, the vehicle security alarm will provide
the following audible and visible signals: the
horn will pulse, the park lamps and/or turn
signals will flash, and the vehicle security
light in the instrument cluster will flash.
To Arm The System
Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security
alarm:
1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is cycled
to the “OFF” position (refer to "Starting
The Engine" in "Starting And Operating"
for further information).
2. Perform one of the following methods to
lock the vehicle:
• Push lock on the interior power door
lock switch with the driver and/or pas-
senger door open.
• Push the lock button on the exterior
Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid
key fob available in the same exterior
zone (refer to "Keyless Enter-N-Go —
Passive Entry" in "Getting To Know Your
Vehicle" for further information).
• Push the lock button on the key fob.
3. If any doors are open, close them.
To Disarm The System
The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed
using any of the following methods:
• Push the unlock button on the key fob.
• Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door
Handle (if equipped, refer to "Keyless
Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry" in "Getting To
Know Your Vehicle" for further information).
19
• Cycle the vehicle ignition system out of the
OFF position.
NOTE:
• The driver's door key cylinder cannot arm or
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
• When the vehicle security alarm is armed,
the interior power door lock switches will
not unlock the doors.
The vehicle security alarm is designed to
protect your vehicle. However, you can create
conditions where the system will give you a
false alarm. If one of the previously described
arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle
security alarm will arm regardless of whether
you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in
the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will
sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle
security alarm.
If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the
battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle
security alarm will remain armed when the
battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will
flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,
disarm the vehicle security alarm.
DOORS
CAUTION!
Careless handling and storage of the re-
movable door panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the vehi-
cle’s interior.
Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry
(If Equipped)
The Passive Entry system is a feature that
allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s
door(s) and swing gate without having to push
the key fob lock or unlock buttons.
NOTE:
• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/
OFF; refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
• The key fob may not be detected by the
vehicle passive entry system if it is located
next to a mobile phone, laptop, or other
electronic device; these devices may inter-
fere with the key fob’s wireless signal and
prevent the passive entry system from
locking/unlocking the vehicle.
• Passive Entry Unlock initiates illuminated
approach (Low Beams, License Plate
Lamp, Position Lamps) for whichever time
duration is set between 0, 30 (default),
60 or 90 seconds. Passive Entry Unlock
also initiates two flashes of the turn signal
lamps.
• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has
been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry
door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be
affected, resulting in a slower response
time.
• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry
and no door is opened within 60 seconds,
the vehicle will re-lock and if equipped will
arm the security alarm.
To Unlock From The Driver Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the
front driver door handle to unlock the driver's
door automatically.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
20
NOTE:
If “1st Press Of Key Fob Unlock” is pro-
grammed all doors will unlock when you grab
hold of the front driver’s door handle. To
select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st
Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”
refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
To Unlock From The Passenger Side
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab
the front passenger door handle to unlock all
doors and the swing gate automatically.
NOTE:
All doors will unlock when the front passen-
ger door handle is grabbed regardless of the
driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Un-
lock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All
Doors 1st Press”).
Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry
Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)
To minimize the possibility of unintentionally
locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your
vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped
with an automatic door unlock feature which
will function only if the ignition switch is in
the OFF position.
FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with
passive entry. There are three situations that
trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any passive
entry vehicle:
• A lock request is made by a valid Passive
Entry key fob while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the Passive Entry
door handle while a door is open.
• A lock request is made by the door panel
switch while the door is open.
When any of these situations occur, after all
open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search
will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry
key fob inside the car, the car will unlock and
alert the customer. If Passive Entry is dis-
abled using Uconnect System, the key pro-
tection described in "Preventing Inadvertent
Locking of Passive Entry Key Fob in Vehicle"
remains active/functional.
NOTE:
The vehicle will only unlock the doors during
a FOBIK-Safe operation when a valid Passive
Entry key fob is detected inside the vehicle.
The vehicle will not unlock the doors when
any of the following conditions are true:
• A second valid passive entry key fob is
detected outside of the vehicle (within 5ft
of a passive entry door handle).
• The doors are manually locked using the
door lock knobs.
Grab The Door Handle To Unlock
21
• Three attempts are made to lock the doors
using the door panel switch and then close
the doors.
To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Swing Gate
With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key
fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or
passenger front door handles, pushing the
passive entry lock button will lock the vehicle
doors and the swing gate.
NOTE:
DO NOT grab the door handle, when pushing
the door handle lock button. This could un-
lock the door(s).
The vehicle doors can also be locked by using
the lock button located on the vehicle’s inte-
rior door panel.
To Unlock/Enter The Swing Gate
The Swing Gate passive entry unlock feature
is built into handle of the Swing Gate. With a
valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft (1.5 m)
of the Swing Gate, grab the Swing Gate
handle to unlock the Swing Gate automati-
cally, and pull the Swing Gate to open.
NOTE:
If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-
grammed all doors & the swing gate will
unlock when you grab hold of the swing gate
handle. To select between “Unlock Driver
Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st
Press,” refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Mul-
timedia” in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
Push The Door Handle Button To Lock
DO NOT Grab The Door Handle
When Locking
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
22
To Lock The Swing Gate
With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft
(1.5 m) of the swing gate, pushing the pas-
sive entry lock button will lock the vehicle
doors and the swing gate.
NOTE:
• After pushing the door handle button, you
must wait two seconds before you can lock
or unlock the doors, using any Passive Entry
door handle. This is done to allow you to
check if the vehicle is locked by pulling the
door handle without the vehicle reacting
and unlocking.
• If Passive Entry is disabled using Uconnect
System, the key protection described in
"Preventing Inadvertent Locking of Passive
Entry Key Fob in Vehicle" remains active/
functional.
• The Passive Entry system will not operate if
the key fob battery is dead.
Front Door Removal
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the doors removed as you will lose the
protection they can provide. This proce-
dure is furnished for use during off-road
operation only.
WARNING!
• All occupants must wear seat belts dur-
ing off-road operation with doors re-
moved. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips”
in “Starting And Operating” in the Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
• Do not store detached doors inside of the
vehicle, as they may cause personal in-
jury in the event of an accident.
Swing Gate Passive Entry Location
Door Removal Warning Label
23
NOTE:
• Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
•
Hinge pin can break if overtightened during
door reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m).
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the
upper and lower outside hinges (using a
#T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be
stowed in the rear cargo tray located un-
der the rear loadfloor.
3. Remove the plastic wiring access door
under the instrument panel by sliding the
plastic panel along the door frame toward
the seats until the tabs are detached.
NOTE:
Do not pry back to open, as this will break
the plastic cover.
Hinge Pin Screw
Wiring Access Door
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
24
4. Pull up on the red locking tab to unlock
the wiring harness.
5. Push and hold down the black security tab
under the wiring harness, and lift the
harness into the open position.
6. With the wiring harness open, pull down-
ward on the wiring connector to unplug.
Store wiring connector in the lower door
basket.
7. Remove the check screw from the center
door check (using a #T40 Torx head
driver).
8. With the door open, lift the door with the
help of another person, to clear the hinge
pins from their hinges and remove the
door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
steps in the opposite order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can
be used to assist in guiding the door into
place when reinstalling.
Closed Wiring Harness
1 – Locking Tab
2 – Wiring Harness
Door Check
25
Rear Door Removal (Four-Door Models)
WARNING!
Do not drive your vehicle on public roads
with the doors removed as you will lose the
protection they can provide. This proce-
dure is furnished for use during off-road
operation only.
WARNING!
• All occupants must wear seat belts dur-
ing off-road operation with doors re-
moved. Refer to “Off-Road Driving Tips”
in “Starting And Operating” in the Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
• Do not store detached doors inside of
the vehicle, as they may cause personal
injury in the event of an accident.
NOTE:
• Doors are heavy; use caution when removing
them.
• Hinge pin can break if overtightened during
door reinstall (Max Torque: 7.5 ft· lb / 10 N·m).
1. Roll down the glass window to prevent any
damage.
2. Remove the hinge pin screws from the
upper and lower outside hinges (using a
#T50 Torx head driver).
NOTE:
The hinge pin screws and nuts can be
stowed in the rear cargo tray located un-
der the rear load floor.
3. Slide the front seat(s) fully forward.
4. Pry open and remove the plastic wiring
access door from the bottom of the
B-pillar.
Door Removal Warning Label
Hinge Pin Screw
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
26
5. Unplug the wiring connector.
NOTE:
Squeeze the tab on the base of the wiring
harness. This will unlock the connector
tab, allowing the wiring connector to be
unplugged.
6. Remove the check screw from the center
door check (using a #T40 Torx head driver).
7. With the door open, lift the door with the
help of another person, to clear the hinge
pins from their hinges and remove the
door.
To reinstall the door(s), perform the previous
steps in the reverse order.
NOTE:
The upper hinge has a longer pin, which can
be used to assist in guiding the door into
place when reinstalling.
SEATS
Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint
System of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Wiring Connector
Door Check
27
Heated Seats — If Equipped
The heated seats control buttons are located
on the center instrument panel below the
touchscreen, and are also located within the
climate or controls screen of the touch-
screen.
• Push the heated seat button
once to
turn the HI setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
a second
time to turn the MED setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
a third
time to turn the LO setting on.
• Push the heated seat button
a fourth
time to turn the heating elements off.
NOTE:
• The engine must be running for the heated
seats to operate.
• The level of heat selected will stay on until
the operator changes it.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the driver’s seat can be programmed to
come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-
jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion or other physical condition must
exercise care when using the seat
heater. It may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat or
seatback that insulates against heat,
such as a blanket or cushion. This may
cause the seat heater to overheat. Sit-
ting in a seat that has been overheated
could cause serious burns due to the
increased surface temperature of the
seat.
Heated Seat Buttons
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
28
Front Passenger Easy Entry Seat —
Two Door Models
Pull upward on the easy entry lever located on
the outboard side of the seat back, and slide
the entire seat forward.
To return the seat to a sitting position, fold
the seatback upright until it locks and push
the seat rearward until the track locks.
NOTE:
• The front passenger seats have a track
memory, which returns the seat to its origi-
nal position.
• The recline strap and easy entry lever
should not be used during the automatic
returning of the seat to its sitting position.
60/40 Split Folding Rear Seat —
Four Door Models
To provide additional storage area, each rear
seat can be folded flat to allow for extended
cargo space.
NOTE:
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seat to fold down easily.
• The center head restraints must be in the
lowest position to avoid contact with the
center console when folding the seat.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
To Fold Down The Rear Seat
There are two release levers located on each
upper outboard side of the rear seat. The
larger of the two release levers folds down the
seat and the head restraint simultaneously.
The smaller lever folds down the head re-
straint independently for improved visibility.
Easy Entry Lever
29
To fold the seat, lift upward on the large
release lever and slowly fold down the seat-
back. The head restraint will fold automati-
cally with the seat when this lever is pulled.
NOTE:
You may experience deformation in the seat
cushion from the seat belt buckles if the
seats are left folded for an extended period of
time. This is normal. By simply opening the
seats to the open position, the seat cushion
will return to its normal shape over time.
To Raise The Rear Seat
Raise the seatback and lock it into place.
Then, raise the head restraint until it locks
into place. If interference from the cargo area
prevents the seatback from fully locking, you
will have difficulty returning the seat to its
proper position.
WARNING!
Be certain that the seatback is securely
locked into position. If the seatback is not
securely locked into position the seat will
not provide the proper stability for child
seats and/or passengers. An improperly
latched seat could cause serious injury.
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat —
Two Door Models
NOTE:
• Prior to folding the rear seat, it may be
necessary to reposition the front seats.
• Be sure that the front seats are fully upright
and positioned forward. This will allow the
rear seat to fold down easily.
Seatback Release Lever
1 — Seatback Release Lever
2 — Head Restraint Release Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
30
Folding The Rear Seat
1. Lift the seatback release lever and fold the
seatback forward.
2. Slowly flip the entire seat forward.
Using The Retention Straps
1. There are two retention straps located on
the back of the rear seat and two corre-
sponding wire loops located on the back of
each b-pillar. Open the hook-and-loop fas-
tener on the strap and thread through the
wire loop. Fold the hook-and-loop fastener
over to keep the seat in the folded posi-
tion. This should be done on both sides.
2. To return the seat to its normal upright
position, reverse these steps.
Removing The Rear Seat
1. Push down on the release bar on each
side, and pull the seat out and away from
the lower bracket.
2. Remove the seat from the vehicle.
3. To reinstall the rear seat, just reverse
these steps.
NOTE:
Do not drive the vehicle without reattaching
the rear seat latches.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Rear Seatback Release Lever
Rear Seat Tumble Position
Retention Strap
31
WARNING!
• In a collision, you or others in your ve-
hicle could be injured if seats are not
properly latched to their floor attach-
ments. Always be sure that the seats are
fully latched.
HEAD RESTRAINTS
Head restraints are designed to reduce the
risk of injury by restricting head movement in
the event of a rear impact. Head restraints
should be adjusted so that the top of the head
restraint is located above the top of your ear.
WARNING!
• All occupants, including the driver,
should not operate a vehicle or sit in a
vehicle’s seat until the head restraints
are placed in their proper positions in
order to minimize the risk of neck injury
in the event of a crash.
WARNING!
• Head restraints should never be ad-
justed while the vehicle is in motion.
Driving a vehicle with the head restraints
improperly adjusted or removed could
cause serious injury or death in the
event of a collision.
Front Head Restraints
To raise the head restraint, pull upward on
the head restraint. To lower the head re-
straint, push the adjustment button located
on the base of the head restraint, and push
downward on the head restraint. The release
button does not need to be pushed to adjust
the head restraint.
To remove the head restraint, raise it as far as
it can go then push the adjustment button
and the release button at the base of each
post while pulling the head restraint up.
To reinstall the head restraint, put the head
restraint posts into the holes and push down-
ward. Then adjust it to the appropriate
height.
Front Head Restraint
1 — Release Button
2 — Adjustment Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
32
WARNING!
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could cause se-
rious injury or death to occupants of the
vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the re-installation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
NOTE:
Do not reposition the head restraint 180 de-
grees to the incorrect position in an attempt
to gain additional clearance to the back of the
head.
Rear Head Restraints — Two Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with non-
adjustable, but foldable head restraints.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on
the release strap located on the upper out-
board side of each rear seat.
To return the head restraint to its upward
position, lift up on the head restraint until it
locks into place.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for information on child seat tether
routing.
Rear Head Restraint
Folding Strap Location
Rear Head Restraints Folded
33
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle without the rear
seat head restraints installed while pas-
sengers are occupying the rear seat. In a
collision, people riding in this area with-
out the head restraints installed are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could cause
serious injury or death to occupants of
the vehicle. Always securely stow re-
moved head restraints in a location out-
side the occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the reinstallation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
Rear Head Restraints — Four Door Models
The rear seat is equipped with nonadjustable,
but foldable, outboard head restraints, as
well as an adjustable, removable center head
restraint.
To fold the outboard head restraint, pull on
the inner release lever, located on the upper
part of the rear seat.
To return the head restraint to its upward
position, lift up on the head restraint until it
locks into place.
To raise the center head restraint, lift up on
the head restraint. To lower the center head
restraint, push the adjustment button, lo-
cated at the base of the head restraint, and
push down on the head restraint.
To remove the center head restraint, push the
release button, located on the base of the
head restraint, and pull upward on the head
restraint.
To install the head restraint, hold the release
button while pushing downward on the head
restraint. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” in “Safety” for information on child
seat tether routing.
NOTE:
Lower the center head restraint to avoid con-
tact with the center console when folding the
seat down.
Rear Head Restraint Lever Location
1 — Seatback Release Lever
2 — Head Restraint Release Lever
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
34
WARNING!
• Do not drive the vehicle without the rear
seat head restraints installed while pas-
sengers are occupying the rear seat. In a
collision, people riding in this area with-
out the head restraints installed are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• A loose head restraint thrown forward in
a collision or hard stop could cause se-
rious injury or death to occupants of the
vehicle. Always securely stow removed
head restraints in a location outside the
occupant compartment.
• ALL the head restraints MUST be rein-
stalled in the vehicle to properly protect
the occupants. Follow the reinstallation
instructions above prior to operating the
vehicle or occupying a seat.
STEERING WHEEL
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column
This feature allows you to tilt the steering
column upward or downward. It also allows
you to lengthen or shorten the steering col-
umn. The tilt/telescoping lever is located on
the steering column, below the turn signal
lever.
To unlock the steering column, push the
control handle downward (toward the floor).
To tilt the steering column, move the steering
wheel upward or downward as desired. To
lengthen or shorten the steering column, pull
the steering wheel outward or push it inward
as desired. To lock the steering column in
position, push the control handle upward
until fully engaged.
WARNING!
Do not adjust the steering column while
driving. Adjusting the steering column
while driving or driving with the steering
column unlocked, could cause the driver
to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to
follow this warning may result in serious
injury or death.
Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped
The steering wheel contains a heating ele-
ment that helps warm your hands in cold
weather. The heated steering wheel has only
one temperature setting. Once the heated
Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column Lever
35
steering wheel has been turned on, it will stay
on until the operator turns it off. The heated
steering wheel may not turn on when it is
already warm.
The heated steering wheel control button is
located on the center of the instrument panel
below the touchscreen and within the climate
or controls screen of the touchscreen.
• Push the heated steering wheel button
once to turn the heating element on.
• Push the heated steering wheel button
a second time to turn the heating element
off.
NOTE:
The engine must be running for the heated
steering wheel to operate.
Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start
On models that are equipped with remote
start, the heated steering wheel can be pro-
grammed to come on during a remote start.
This feature can be programmed through the
Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set-
tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to
the skin because of advanced age,
chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-
jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-
tion, or other physical conditions must
exercise care when using the steering
wheel heater. It may cause burns even at
low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods.
WARNING!
• Do not place anything on the steering
wheel that insulates against heat, such
as a blanket or steering wheel covers of
any type and material. This may cause
the steering wheel heater to overheat.
MIRRORS
Heated Mirrors — If Equipped
These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice.
This feature will be activated whenever you
turn on the rear window defroster (if
equipped). Refer to “Climate Controls” in
“Getting To Know Your Vehicle” for further
information.
Heated Steering Wheel Button
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
36
EXTERIOR LIGHTS
Headlight Switch
The headlight switch is located on the left
side of the instrument panel. This switch
controls the operation of the headlights,
parking lights, automatic headlights — if
equipped, instrument panel lights, instru-
ment panel light dimming, interior lights, and
fog lights — if equipped.
Rotate the headlight switch clockwise to the
first detent for parking light and instrument
panel light operation. Rotate the headlight
switch to the second detent for headlight,
parking light, and instrument panel light op-
eration.
Daytime Running Lights — If Equipped
The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) are in a
dedicated position below the headlight as-
sembly. DRLs are active when the Low Beams
are not and when the vehicle is shifted into
any position other than PARK (auto transmis-
sion), or when the vehicle begins to move
(manual transmission).
NOTE:
The Daytime Running Lights, on the same
side of the vehicle as the active turn signal,
will turn off automatically when a turn signal
is in operation and turn on again when the
turn signal is not operating.
High/Low Beam Switch
Push the multifunction lever toward the in-
strument panel to switch the headlights to
high beams. The lever will return to the cen-
tered position. To return the headlights to low
beam, pull the lever toward the steering
wheel, or push the lever toward the instru-
ment panel.
Headlight Switch
Multifunction Lever
37
Flash-To-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your
headlights by lightly pulling the multifunc-
tion lever toward you. This will cause the high
beam headlights to turn on, and remain on,
until the lever is released.
Automatic Headlights — If Equipped
This system automatically turns the head-
lights on or off according to ambient light
levels. To turn the system on, rotate the
headlight switch clockwise to the last detent
for automatic headlight operation. When the
system is on, the headlight time delay feature
is also on. This means the headlights will stay
on for up to 90 seconds after you place the
ignition into the OFF position. To turn the
automatic system off, move the headlight
switch out of the AUTO position.
NOTE:
The engine must be running before the head-
lights will come on in the automatic mode.
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or low beam headlights and
push in the center of the headlight switch
control knob. Pushing the headlight switch
control knob a second time will turn the front
fog lights off.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument
cluster flash to show proper operation of the
front and rear turn signal lights.
NOTE:
If either light remains on and does not flash,
or there is a very fast flash rate, check for a
defective outside light bulb. If an indicator
fails to light when the lever is moved, it would
suggest that the indicator bulb is defective.
Lane Change Assist — If Equipped
Tap the multifunction lever up or down once,
without moving beyond the detent, and the
turn signal (right or left) will flash three times
then automatically turn off.
Lights-On Reminder
If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo
lights are left on after the ignition is turned
OFF, a chime will sound when the driver’s
door is opened.
Front Fog Light Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
38
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND
WASHERS
The windshield wiper/washer control lever is
located on the right side of the steering col-
umn. The front wipers are operated by rotat-
ing a switch, located at the end of the lever.
Refer to “Rear Window Wiper/Washer” in this
section for further information on using the
rear window wiper/washer.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Rotate the end of the lever upward to the
second detent past the intermittent settings
for low-speed wiper operation. Rotate the end
of the lever upward to the third detent past
the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper
operation.
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper
switch and allow the wipers to return to the
park position before turning off the engine.
If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers
freeze to the windshield, damage to the
wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather con-
ditions make a single wiping cycle, with a
variable pause between cycles, desirable. Ro-
tate the end of the lever to the first detent
position for one of four intermittent settings.
The delay cycle can be set anywhere between
1 to 18 seconds.
NOTE:
The wiper delay times depend on vehicle speed.
If the vehicle is moving less than 10 mph
(16 km/h), delay times will be doubled.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the lever toward you
and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is
pulled while in the delay range, the wiper will
start and continue to operate for two or three
wipe cycles after the lever is released. Then,
the intermittent interval previously selected
will resume.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position,
the wipers will operate for two or three wipe
cycles. Then, the wipers will turn off.
WARNING!
Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-
shield could lead to a collision. You might
not see other vehicles or other obstacles.
To avoid sudden icing of the windshield
during freezing weather, warm the wind-
shield with the defroster before and during
windshield washer use.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Lever
39
Mist Feature
Push upward on the wiper lever to activate a
single wipe to clear off road mist or spray
from a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is
held up, the wipers will continue to operate.
NOTE:
The mist feature does not activate the washer
pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be
sprayed on the windshield. The wash func-
tion must be used in order to spray the
windshield with washer fluid.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer — If Equipped
A rotary switch on the center portion of the
windshield wiper/washer lever controls the
operation of the rear wiper/washer function.
Rotate the switch upward to the first detent
position for intermittent operation and to the
second detent for continuous rear wiper op-
eration.
Push the wiper lever toward the instrument
panel to activate the rear washer. The washer
pump and wiper will continue to operate as
long as the lever is held.
If the rear wiper is operating when the igni-
tion is placed in the OFF position, the wiper
will automatically return to the “park” posi-
tion. When the vehicle is restarted, the wiper
will resume function at whichever position
the switch is set at.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Automatic Climate Controls Overview
The Climate Control System allows you to
regulate the temperature, air flow, and direc-
tion of air circulating throughout the vehicle.
The controls are located on the instrument
panel below the radio.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
40
Automatic Climate Controls
41
Automatic Control Descriptions
Icon Description
MAX
A/C
MAX A/C Button
Press to change to the coldest setting, the indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is on. Pressing the button again causes
the MAX A/C operation to switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator turns off.
NOTE:
The MAX A/C button is only available on the touchscreen.
A/C
A/C Button
Press and release to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when A/C is on.
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display
Automatic Climate Controls
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display Automatic Climate Controls
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
42
Icon Description
Recirculation Button
Press and release this button on the touchscreen, or push the button on the faceplate, to change the system between
recirculation mode and outside air mode.
Recirculation can be used when outside conditions such as smoke, odors, dust, or high humidity are present. Recircula-
tion can be used in all modes. Recirculation may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen greyed out) if conditions
exist that could create fogging on the inside of the windshield. The A/C can be deselected manually without disturbing
the mode control selection. Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make the inside air stuffy and window
fogging may occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
AUTO Button
Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Toggling this button
causes the system to switch between manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this
section for more information.
FRONT
Front Defrost Button
Press and release the touchscreen button, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to change the current airflow
setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side
window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected, the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with
maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front
defrost mode button, the climate system returns to the previous setting.
REAR
Rear Defrost Button
Push and release the button on the touchscreen, or push and release the button on the faceplate, to turn on the rear
window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indicator illuminates when the rear window defroster
is on. The rear window defroster automatically turns off after ten minutes.
43
Icon Description
Driver And Passenger Temperature Up And Down Buttons
Provides the driver and passenger with independent temperature control. Push the red button on the faceplate or touch-
screen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow button on the touchscreen for warmer temperature
settings. Push the blue button on the faceplate or touchscreen or press and slide the temperature bar towards the blue
arrow button on the touchscreen for cooler temperature settings.
SYNC Button
Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when
this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature
setting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.
NOTE:
The SYNC button is only available on the touchscreen.
Faceplate Knob
Touchscreen Buttons
Blower Control
Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds
available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the
touchscreen.
• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.
The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.
•
Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the
blower setting. The blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.
Modes Control
Press the button to adjust airflow distribution. The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air comes from the
instrument panel outlets, floor outlets, defrost outlets and demist outlets.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
44
Icon Description
Panel Mode
Panel Mode
Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow
of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate
airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from
these outlets.
Bi-Level Mode
Bi-Level Mode
Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and
side window demister outlets.
NOTE:
Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from
the floor outlets.
Floor Mode
Floor Mode
Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister
outlets.
Mix Mode
Mix Mode
Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy
conditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing
moisture on the windshield.
Climate Control OFF Button
This button turns the Climate Control System off.
45
Climate Control Functions
Air Conditioning (A/C)
The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the
operator to turn the air conditioning system
on and off. When the system is turned on,
cool dehumidified air flows through the vents
into the cabin.
For improved fuel economy, press the A/C
button to turn off the air conditioning off and
adjust the blower and airflow mode settings.
Make sure to only select Panel, Bi-Level, or
Floor modes.
NOTE:
• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or
windows, select Defrost mode and increase
the blower speed.
• If the air conditioning performance is lower
than expected, there may a blockage. Gen-
tly clean the area around the radiator with
water.
MAX A/C
The MAX A/C setting provides the maximum
cooling performance.
Press the button to toggle between MAX A/C
and your prior setting. The button illuminates
when MAX A/C is on.
In the MAX A/C setting, you can adjust the
blower level and mode position. Pressing
other settings causes the MAX A/C operation
to switch to your desired setting.
Recirculation
In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode
may lead to excessive window fogging. The
Recirculation feature may be unavailable
(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if
conditions exist that could create fogging on
the inside of the windshield.
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —
If Equipped
Automatic Operation
1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate,
or the AUTO button on the touchscreen on
the Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)
Panel.
2. Next, adjust the temperature you would
like the system to maintain by adjusting
the driver and passenger temperature
control buttons. Once the desired tem-
perature is displayed, the system will
achieve and automatically maintain that
comfort level.
3. When the system is set up for your comfort
level, it is not necessary to change the
settings. You will experience the greatest
efficiency by simply allowing the system
to function automatically.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
46
NOTE:
• It is not necessary to move the temperature
settings for cold or hot vehicles. The system
automatically adjusts the temperature,
mode, and blower speed to provide comfort
as quickly as possible.
• The temperature can be displayed in U.S.
or Metric units by selecting the US/Metric
customer-programmable feature. Refer to
the “Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia”
in your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
To provide you with maximum comfort in the
Automatic mode during cold start-ups, the
blower fan will remain on low until the engine
warms up. The blower will increase in speed
and transition into Auto mode.
Manual Operation Override
This system offers a full complement of
manual override features. The AUTO symbol
in the front ATC display will be turned off
when the system is being used in the manual
mode.
Operating Tips
Summer Operation
The engine cooling system must be protected
with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to pro-
vide proper corrosion protection and to pro-
tect against engine overheating. OAT coolant
(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.
Winter Operation
To ensure the best possible heater and defroster
performance, make sure the engine cooling
system is functioning properly and the proper
amount, type, and concentration of coolant is
used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during
Winter months is not recommended, because it
may cause window fogging.
Vacation/Storage
Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of
service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,
run the air conditioning system at idle for
about five minutes, in fresh air with the
blower setting on high. This will ensure ad-
equate system lubrication to minimize the
possibility of compressor damage when the
system is started again.
Window Fogging
Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in
mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear
the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and
increase the front blower speed. Do not use
the Recirculation mode without A/C for long
periods, as fogging may occur.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions can cause
damage to the heating elements:
• Use care when washing the inside of
the rear window. Do not use abrasive
window cleaners on the interior surface
of the window. Use a soft cloth and a
mild washing solution, wiping parallel
to the heating elements. Labels can be
peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
• Do not use scrapers, sharp instru-
ments, or abrasive window cleaners on
the interior surface of the window.
• Keep all objects a safe distance from
the window.
47
Outside Air Intake
Make sure the air intake, located directly in
front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-
tions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the
air intake may reduce airflow, and if they
enter the plenum, they could plug the water
drains. In Winter months, make sure the air
intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.
Cabin Air Filter
The climate control system filters out dust
and pollen from the air. Contact an autho-
rized dealer to service your cabin air filter,
and to have it replaced when needed.
POWER WINDOWS —
IF EQUIPPED
The power window switches are located on
the instrument panel below the climate con-
trols. Push the switch downward to open the
window and upward to close the window.
The top left switch controls the left front
window and the top right switch controls the
right front window.
WARNING!
Never leave children unattended in a ve-
hicle, and do not let children play with
power windows. Do not leave the key fob in
or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-
sible to children. Occupants, particularly
unattended children, can become en-
trapped by the windows while operating
the power window switches. Such entrap-
ment may result in serious injury or death.
Power Window Switches
1 — Driver Side Front Window Switch
2 — Passenger Side Front Window
Switch
3 — Passenger Side Rear Window
Switch
4 — Driver Side Rear Window Switch
5 — Window Lockout Switch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
48
NOTE:
• The power window switches will remain
active for up to 10 minutes after ignition is
switched to the OFF position. Opening ei-
ther front door will cancel this feature.
Four-Door Models
The lower left switch controls the left rear
passenger window, and the lower right switch
controls the right rear passenger window.
NOTE:
There are window switches located on the
rear of the center console for the rear passen-
ger windows in the four-door model.
Auto-Down Feature
The driver door power window switch and the
passenger door power window switches have
an Auto-Down feature. Push the window
switch down, for a short period of time, and
release and the window will go down auto-
matically.
To open the window part way, push the win-
dow switch down briefly and release it when
you want the window to stop.
To stop the window from going all the way
down during the Auto-Down operation, pull
up on the switch briefly.
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
window is almost closed. Be sure to clear
all objects from the window before closing.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the per-
ception of pressure on the ears or a
helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve-
hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down in certain open or partially
open positions. This is a normal occurrence
and can be minimized by adjusting the win-
dow opening.
REMOVABLE TOP
INFORMATION
For your convenience, a tool kit is provided
with your vehicle located in the center con-
sole. This kit includes the necessary tools
required for the operations described in the
following sections.
49
All pieces fit into the ratchet for easy use.
For complete owner information, refer to your
Owner's Manual for further details.
Soft Top — Two And Four Door Models
To Lower The Soft Top
Follow these simple steps to lower the soft
top:
1. With the swing gate open, remove the
swing gate bar from the bottom of the rear
window from right to left. Store in a safe
location. Remove the rear window by slid-
ing it to the left keeping the window level.
2. Push outward on the bottom of the rear
window pillars to release them from their
retaining tabs.
3. Undo the hook-and-loop-fastener located
at the upper front corner of each quarter
window.
Provided Tools
1 — #50 Torx Head Driver
2 — #40 Torx Head Driver
3 — 15mm Socket
4 — Ratchet
Hook-And-Loop Fastener Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
50
4. Remove both quarter windows while keep-
ing the plastic retainers along the top
level. Store in soft top window bag or safe
location.
5. From inside the vehicle, fold the sun vi-
sors against the windshield and release
header latches from above the sun visors,
making sure the hook is completely disen-
gaged from its receiver.
6. From outside the vehicle, lift up on the
front of the soft top, and fold back into the
Sunrider position.
NOTE:
If leaving the soft top in the Sunrider
position, secure the top by using the two
hook-and-loop fasteners provided in the
center console.
Quarter Window Top Retainers
Header Latch Disengaged
Sunrider Straps In Position
51
7. Pull the Sunrider latch, located beneath
the last bow of the soft top.
8. Allow the soft top to slide rearward freely
in the guide tracks to the stowed position.
9. While pushing downward slightly on the
folded soft top, slide the lock lever on the
driver and passenger side lift assist
mechanisms to the “lock” position.
10. Once the lock is in the “lock” position,
push downward on each side of the
folded soft top to ensure it is secure. An
audible “click” may be heard.
Sunrider Latch Position
Lock Position Push Downward To Lock In Place
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
52
To Raise The Soft Top
Follow these simple steps to raise the soft
top:
1. While pushing down on the folded soft
top, slide the lock lever on the driver and
passenger side Lift Assist Mechanisms to
the “unlock” position.
2. Push up and forward from underneath the
folded soft top along the guide track until
it locks into the Sunrider position with an
audible “click”.
3. Using the side link, lift and push the soft
top toward the front of the vehicle guiding
the top into the closed position.
4. From inside the vehicle, pull the handle
on the header latch downward to engage
the hook into its receiver. Then, pull the
handle back upward while squeezing the
latch plate, locking the latch into place.
Repeat on the other side.
5. Reinstall the quarter windows while keep-
ing the top plastic retainers level.
6. Place the top of the quarter window pillars
(rear corner) into the top cover, and insert
the bottom retaining tab into the clips.
7. Engage the retainers up the front of the
windows, ensuring they are fully engaged.
8. Engage the plastic retainers along the
bottom of the quarter windows.
Squeeze Latch Plate And
Pull Handle Upward
Quarter Window Top Retainers
53
9. Secure the hook-and-loop-fastener at the
upper front corner of each quarter window
by pressing firmly.
10. Reinstall the rear window along the top,
followed by the swing gate bar into the
bottom of the rear window.
NOTE:
When reinstalling the rear window, be
sure to engage the retainers on the right
side of the rear window, followed by the
left side.
Freedom Top And Hard Top
To Remove Freedom Top Panels
NOTE:
The driver’s side panel must be removed
before removing the passenger’s side panel.
1. Fold down the sun visor against the
windshield.
2. Turn the three L-shaped locks on the driv-
er’s side panel (one at the front, the rear,
and outside), unlocking them from the
roof.
3. Unlatch the driver’s side header panel
latch located at the top of the windshield.
4. Remove the driver’s side panel.
5. Repeat the steps above to remove the
passenger’s side panel.
NOTE:
Vehicles equipped with a Freedom Top, come
with a Freedom Top storage bag that allows
you to store your Freedom Top panels.
Firmly Secure Hook-And-Loop Fastener
Driver’s Side Panel Latches
1 — L-Shape Locks
2 — Header Latch
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
54
To Reinstall Freedom Top Panels
Follow the removal instructions in reverse
order, replacing the passenger’s side panel
before the driver’s side panel.
NOTE:
To prevent water leaks, the seals and Free-
dom Top Panels should be clear of any dust
and debris prior to reinstallation.
Hard Top Removal
1. Remove both front panels as described
above.
2. Open both doors.
3. Using the provided #50 Torx head driver
and ratchet, remove the Torx head screw
that secures the hard top at the B-pillar
(near the top of the front door) on each
side.
4. Remove the six Torx head screws that
secure the hard top to the vehicle (along
the interior bodyside — three screws on
each side) using the #50 Torx head driver.
5. Open the swing gate all the way to ensure
clearance of the rear window glass. Lift
the rear window glass.
6. Locate the wire harness and washer hose
on the left rear inside corner of the
vehicle.
Torx Head Screw Location —
Driver’s Side Shown
Torx Head Screw Locations —
Passenger Side Shown
55
7. Disconnect the wire harness by its release
tab, followed by the washer hose by push-
ing the release button on the hose.
8. Lower the rear window glass and close the
swing gate.
9. Remove the hard top from the vehicle.
Place the hard top on a soft surface to
prevent damage.
NOTE:
To reinstall the hard top, follow the removal
instructions in reverse order.
For complete owner information, refer to your
Owner's Manual for further details.
CAUTION!
• The front panel(s) must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper in-
stallation can cause water to leak into
the vehicle's interior.
• The hard top assembly must be posi-
tioned properly to ensure sealing. Im-
proper installation can cause water to
leak into the vehicle's interior.
CAUTION!
• The hard top is not designed to carry any
additional loads such as roof racks,
spare tires, building, hunting, or camp-
ing supplies, and/or luggage, etc. Also, it
was not designed as a structural mem-
ber of the vehicle, and thus cannot prop-
erly carry any additional loads other than
environmental (rain, snow, etc.).
• Do not move your vehicle until the top
has been either fully attached to the
windshield frame and bodyside, or fully
removed.
• The removal of the hard top requires four
adults located on each corner. Failure to
follow this caution could damage the
hard top.
Dual Top — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with a Dual Top,
the soft top system will be provided in a
separate box located in the rear of the vehicle
for shipping purposes only.
Wire Harness And Washer Hose Location
1 — Wire Harness
2 — Washer Hose
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
56
If the soft top is removed, ensure the lift
assist mechanisms on both sides of the folded
soft top are in the “lock” position before
removal, and that an audible “click” is heard
when pushing down on the #1 bow from each
of the lift assist mechanisms.
NOTE:
• The soft top and the hard top are to be used
independently.
• Your vehicle warranty will not cover damage
resulting from both tops being installed at
the same time.
• For complete owner information, refer to your
Owner's Manual for further details.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as a
helicopter-type percussion sound. If buffet-
ing occurs with the rear windows open, adjust
the front and rear windows together.
POWER SLIDING TOP —
IF EQUIPPED
If your vehicle is equipped with a Power
Sliding Top, the control switch can be found
on the front trim panel, to the right of the
driver’s side sun visor.
NOTE:
• The Power Top is non-removable. If desired,
the rear quarter windows can be removed
and stored in provided storage bags. Refer
to “Quarter Window Removal” in your Own-
er’s Manual for further information.
•
The Power Top will not open in temperatures
below –4°F (-20°C). However, if it is opened
at a higher temperature, it can be closed at
temperatures above –40°F (-40°C).
Lift Assist Mechanism
1 — Lock Position
2 — #40 Torx Head Screws
Power Sliding Top Control Switch
1 — Open Switch
2 — Close Switch
57
• The Power Top will not operate at vehicle
speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h).
WARNING!
• Never leave children unattended in a
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or
near the vehicle, or in a location acces-
sible to children. Do not leave the igni-
tion of a vehicle equipped with Keyless
Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN
mode. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped
by the power top while operating the
power top switch. Such entrapment may
result in serious injury or death.
• In a collision, there is a greater risk of
being thrown from a vehicle with an
open power top. You could also be seri-
ously injured or killed. Always fasten
your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are also properly secured.
WARNING!
• Do not allow small children to operate
the power top. Never allow your fingers,
other body parts, or any object, to proj-
ect through the power top opening. In-
jury may result.
Opening The Power Top
Express Mode
Push the open switch and release it within
one-half second. The power top will open
automatically to the open position. This is
called “Express Open”. During Express Open
operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the power top.
Manual Mode
To open the power top manually, push and
hold the open switch. The power top will stop
automatically at the open position. Any re-
lease of the switch will stop the movement.
The power top will remain in a partially
opened position until the switch is pushed
and held again.
Closing The Power Top
Express Mode
Push the close switch and release it within
one-half second. The power top will close
fully and stop automatically. This is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close opera-
tion, any movement of the switch will stop
the power top.
Manual Mode
To close the power top manually, push and
hold the close switch. The power top will
move forward and automatically stop at the
fully closed position. Any release of the
switch will stop the movement. The power top
will remain in a partially closed position until
the switch is pushed and held again.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the
opening of the power top during Express
Close operation. If an obstruction in the path
of the power top is detected, the power top
will automatically retract. Remove the ob-
struction if this occurs. Next, push the close
switch and release to Express Close.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
58
WARNING!
There is no anti-pinch protection when the
power top is almost closed. To avoid per-
sonal injury be sure to clear your arms,
hands, fingers and all objects from the
top’s path before closing.
NOTE:
If three consecutive power top close attempts
result in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Pro-
tect will disable and the power top must be
closed in Manual Mode.
HOOD
Opening The Hood
Release both the hood latches.
Raise the hood and locate the safety latch,
located in the middle of the hood opening.
Push the safety latch to the left side of the
vehicle, to open the hood. You may have to
push down slightly on the hood before push-
ing the safety latch. Insert the support rod
into the slot on the hood.
Closing The Hood
To close the hood, remove the support rod
from the hood panel and place it in the
retaining clip. Lower the hood slowly. Secure
both of the hood latches.
WARNING!
Be sure the hood is fully latched before
driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully
latched, it could open when the vehicle is
in motion and block your vision. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious
injury or death.
REAR SWING GATE
The rear swing gate can be unlocked by using
the key, Remote Keyless Entry key fob, by
activating the power door lock switches lo-
cated on the front doors, or grabbing the
handle if equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go.
Hood Latch Locations
59
To open the swing gate, pull on the gate handle.
NOTE:
Close the rear flip-up window before attempt-
ing to close the swing gate (hard top models
only).
WARNING!
Driving with the flip-up window open can
allow poisonous exhaust gases into your
vehicle. You and your passengers could be
injured by these fumes. Keep the flip-up
window closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
Do not push on rear wiper blade when
closing the rear flip-up window, as damage
to the blade will result.
UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR
OPENER (HOMELINK)
• HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held
transmitters that operate devices such as
garage door openers, motorized gates,
lighting or home security systems. The
HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles
12 Volt battery.
• The HomeLink buttons that are located in
the overhead console or sunvisor designate
the three different HomeLink channels.
Swing Gate Handle
HomeLink Buttons And Indicator Light
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
60
• To operate HomeLink, push and release any
of the programmed HomeLink buttons.
These buttons will activate the devices they
are programmed to with each press of the
corresponding HomeLink button.
• The HomeLink indicator light is located
above the center button.
Before You Begin Programming
HomeLink
For efficient programming and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal, it
is recommended that a new battery be placed
in the hand-held transmitter of the device
that is being programmed to the HomeLink
system. Make sure your hand-held transmit-
ter is programmed to activate the device you
are trying to program your HomeLink button
to.
Ensure that your vehicle is parked outside of
the garage before you begin programming.
It is recommended that you erase all the
channels of your HomeLink before you use it
for the first time.
If you have any problems, or require assis-
tance, please call toll-free 1-800-355-3515
or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for in-
formation or assistance.
Erasing All The HomeLink Channels
To erase the channels, follow this procedure:
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Push and hold the two outside HomeLink
buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds, or
until the HomeLink indicator light
flashes.
NOTE:
Erasing all channels should only be per-
formed when programming HomeLink for the
first time. Do not erase channels when pro-
gramming additional buttons.
Identifying Whether You Have A Rolling
Code Or Non-Rolling Code Device
Before programming a device to one of your
HomeLink buttons, you must determine
whether the device has a rolling code or
non-rolling code.
Rolling Code Devices
To determine if your device has a rolling code,
a good indicator is its manufacturing date.
Typically, devices manufactured after
1995 have rolling codes. A device with a
rolling code will also have a “LEARN” or
“TRAIN” button located where the antenna is
attached to the device. The button may not
be immediately visible when looking at the
device. The name and color of the button may
vary slightly by manufacturer.
NOTE:
The “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button is not the
button you normally use to operate the device.
Non-rolling Code Devices
Most devices manufactured before 1995 will
not have a rolling code. These devices will
also not have a “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button.
61
Programming HomeLink To A Garage
Door Opener
To program any of the HomeLink buttons to
activate your garage door opener motor, fol-
low the steps below:
NOTE:
All HomeLink buttons are programmed using
this procedure. You do not need to erase all
channels when programming additional but-
tons.
1. Place the ignition switch into the ON/RUN
position.
2. Place the garage door opener transmitter
1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
HomeLink button you wish to program,
while keeping the HomeLink indicator
light in view.
3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you
want to program while you push and hold
the garage door opener transmitter button
you are trying to replicate.
4. Continue to hold both buttons and ob-
serve the HomeLink indicator light. The
HomeLink indicator light will flash slowly
and then rapidly. Once this happens, re-
lease both buttons.
NOTE:
Make sure the garage door opener motor is
plugged in before moving on to the rolling
code/non-rolling code final steps.
Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final Steps
NOTE:
You have 30 seconds in which to initiate
rolling code final step 2, after completing
rolling code final step 1.
1. At the garage door opener motor (in the
garage), locate the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button. This can usually be found where
the hanging antenna wire is attached to
the garage door opener motor. Firmly push
and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN”
button.
2. Return to the vehicle and push the pro-
grammed HomeLink button three times
(holding the button for two seconds each
time). If the garage door opener motor
operates, programming is complete.
3. Push the programmed HomeLink button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the final
steps for the rolling code procedure.
Non-Rolling Code Garage Door Opener Final
Steps
1. Push and hold the programmed
HomeLink button and observe the
HomeLink indicator light. If the
HomeLink indicator light stays on con-
stantly, programming is complete.
2. Push the programmed HomeLink button
to confirm that the garage door opener
motor operates. If the garage door opener
motor does not operate, repeat the steps
from the beginning.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
62
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open
and close while you are programming the
universal transceiver. Do not program
the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate.
• Do not run your vehicle in a closed ga-
rage or confined area while program-
ming the transceiver. Exhaust gas from
your vehicle contains Carbon Monoxide
(CO) which is odorless and colorless.
Carbon Monoxide is poisonous when in-
haled and can cause you and others to
be severely injured or killed.
Programming HomeLink To A
Miscellaneous Device
Refer to “Programming HomeLink To A Ga-
rage Door Opener” for the procedure on how
to program HomeLink to a miscellaneous
device, as it follows the same procedure. Be
sure to determine if the device has a rolling
code, or non-rolling code before beginning
the programming process.
NOTE:
Canadian radio frequency laws require trans-
mitter signals to time-out (or quit) after sev-
eral seconds of transmission, which may not
be long enough for HomeLink to pick up the
signal during programming. Similar to this
Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to time-out in the same manner.
The procedure may need to be preformed
multiple times to successfully pair the device
to your HomeLink buttons.
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink
Button
To reprogram a single HomeLink button that
has been previously trained, without erasing
all the channels, follow the procedure below.
Be sure to determine whether the new device
you want to program the HomeLink button to
has a Rolling Code, or Non-rolling Code.
1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN posi-
tion, without starting the engine.
2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink but-
ton until the HomeLink Indicator light
begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with
Step 2 in “Programming HomeLink To A
Garage Door Opener” and follow all re-
maining steps.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Innovation, Science and Eco-
nomic Development Canada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
63
INTERNAL EQUIPMENT
Electrical Power Outlets
There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) auxiliary
power outlets that can provide power for
accessories designed for use with the stan-
dard power outlet adapters.
The front power outlet is located in the center
of the instrument panel below the climate
controls, and is powered from the ignition
switch. Power is available when the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position.
On vehicles equipped with a rear subwoofer,
there is a second power outlet located in the
rear cargo area and is powered directly from
the vehicle battery.
Front Power Outlet
Rear Cargo Power Outlet
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
64
Power Outlets Fuse Locations
1 — F81 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (battery powered at all times)
2 — F91 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Power Outlet (powered when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC position)
65
CAUTION!
• Do not exceed the maximum power of
160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the
160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex-
ceeded the fuse protecting the system
will need to be replaced.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not insert any other object
in the power outlets as this will damage
the outlet and blow the fuse. Improper
use of the power outlet can cause dam-
age not covered by your New Vehicle
Limited Warranty.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the
receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may
cause an electric shock and failure.
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in
draw power from the vehicle's battery,
even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones,
etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long
enough, the vehicle's battery will dis-
charge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e.,
coolers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.),
will degrade the battery even more
quickly. Only use these intermittently
and with greater caution.
•
After the use of high power draw accesso-
ries, or long periods of the vehicle not
being started (with accessories still
plugged in), the vehicle must be driven a
sufficient length of time to allow the alter-
nator to recharge the vehicle's battery.
• Power outlets are designed for accessory
plugs only. Do not hang any type of
accessory or accessory bracket from the
plug. Improper use of the power outlet
can cause damage.
Power Inverter — If Equipped
There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt inverter outlet
located on the back of the center console to
convert DC current to AC current.
This outlet can power cellular phones, elec-
tronics and other low power devices requiring
power up to 150 Watts. Certain high-end
video game consoles exceed this power limit,
as will most power tools.
The power inverter is designed with built-in
overload protection. If the power rating of
150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter
automatically shuts down. Once the electri-
cal device has been removed from the outlet,
Power Inverter
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
66
the inverter should automatically reset. If the
power rating exceeds approximately
170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be
reset manually.
WARNING!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not insert any objects into the
receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may
cause an electric shock and failure.
Auxiliary Switches — If Equipped
Four auxiliary switches located in the lower
switch bank of the instrument panel can be
used to power various electrical devices. You
have the ability to configure the functionality
of the auxiliary switches via the Uconnect
settings. All switches can be configured for
setting the switch type operation to latching
or momentary, power source of either battery
or ignition, and ability to hold last state
across key cycles.
NOTE:
Holding last state conditions are met when
switch type is set to latching and power
source is set to ignition.
For more information, refer to “Uconnect
Settings” in “Multimedia” in your owner’s
manual.
The auxiliary switches manage the relays that
power four blunt cut wires. These wires are
located under the instrument panel in the
passenger compartment and under the hood
to the right, near the battery.
In addition to the four auxiliary switch wires,
a fused battery wire and ignition wire are also
located in the interior, in the passenger side
under the instrument panel.
Auxiliary Switches
Auxiliary Switch Connections –
Under Hood
Auxiliary Switch Connections –
Under Instrument Panel
67
A kit of splices and heat shrink tubing are
provided with the auxiliary switches to aid in
the connection/installation of your electrical
devices.
Wire Color Chart
Circuit Function Fuse Wire Color Locations
Aux Switch 1 F93 – 40 Amp Beige/Pink
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Aux Switch 2 F92 – 40 Amp Green/Pink
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Aux Switch 3 F103 – 15 Amp Orange/Pink
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Aux Switch 4 F108 – 15 Amp Dark Blue/Pink
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel) & Underhood
(right side near battery)
Battery F72 – 10 Amp Red/White
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel)
Ignition F50 – 10 Amp Pink/Orange
Interior (passenger side under
instrument panel)
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
68
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY...................70
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls .................70
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped......71
Instrument Cluster Display
Selectable Items ...............72
WARNING LIGHTS
ANDMESSAGES.............72
Red Warning Lights ..............73
Yellow Warning Lights ............76
Yellow Indicator Lights ............79
Green Indicator Lights ............80
White Indicator Lights ............81
Blue Indicator Lights .............81
Gray Indicator Lights .............82
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM—OBDII ............82
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity .................82
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND
MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ....83
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
69
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISPLAY
Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru-
ment cluster display, which offers useful in-
formation to the driver. With the ignition in
the STOP/OFF mode, opening/closing of a
door will activate the display for viewing, and
display the total miles, or kilometers, in the
odometer. Your instrument cluster display is
designed to display important information
about your vehicle’s systems and features.
Using a driver interactive display located on
the instrument panel, your instrument clus-
ter display can show you how systems are
working and give you warnings when they
aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls
allow you to scroll through and enter the main
menus and submenus. You can access the
specific information you want and make se-
lections and adjustments.
Instrument Cluster Display Location
And Controls
The instrument cluster display is located in
the center of the instrument cluster.
• The top line where Reconfigurable Tell-
tales, Compass Direction, Outside Tem-
perature, Time, Range, MPG or Trip are
displayed. This also displays the speedom-
eter when other menu pages are displayed.
• The main display area where the menus
and pop up messages are displayed.
3.5 Inch Instrument Cluster
Display Location
7.0 Inch Instrument Cluster
Display Location
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
70
• The lower line where reconfigurable tell-
tales, menu name and menu page are
displayed.
• Push the up arrow button to scroll upward
through the main menus (Speedometer,
MPH/km/h, Vehicle Info, Terrain, Driver As-
sist, Fuel Economy, Trip A, Trip B, Stop/
Start, Audio, Navigation, Stored Messages,
Screen Setup and Speed Warning).
• Push the down arrow button to scroll down-
ward through the main menu and sub-
menus (Speedometer, MPH/km/h, Vehicle
Info, Terrain, Driver Assist, Fuel Economy,
Trip A, Trip B, Stop/Start, Audio, Naviga-
tion, Stored Messages, Screen Setup and
Speed Warning).
• Push the right arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
• Push the left arrow button to access the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item.
• Push the OK button to access/select the
information screens or submenu screens of
a main menu item. Push and hold the OK
button for two seconds to reset displayed/
selected features that can be reset.
Oil Change Reset — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine
oil change indicator system. The “Oil Change
Required” message will display in the instru-
ment cluster display for five seconds after a
single chime has sounded to indicate the
next scheduled oil change interval. The en-
gine oil change indicator system is duty cycle
based, which means the engine oil change
interval may fluctuate, dependent upon your
personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to
display each time you place the ignition in
the ON/RUN position. To turn off the mes-
sage temporarily, push and release the OK
button. To reset the oil change indicator sys-
tem (after performing the scheduled mainte-
nance), refer to the following procedure.
Oil Life Reset
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place
the ignition in the ON/RUN mode (do not
start the engine).
2. Navigate to "Oil Life" submenu in "Vehicle
Info" in the instrument cluster display.
Instrument Cluster Display Control Buttons
1 — OK Button
2 — Up Arrow Button
3 — Right Arrow Button
4 — Down Arrow Button
5 — Left Arrow Button
71
3. Push and hold the OK button until the
gauge resets to 100%.
Secondary Method For Oil Change
Reset Procedure
1. Without pushing the brake pedal, place
the ignition in the ON/RUN position (do
not start the engine).
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal, slowly,
three times within ten seconds.
3. Without pushing the brake pedal, place
the ignition in the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE:
If the indicator message illuminates when
you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator
system did not reset. If necessary, repeat this
procedure.
Instrument Cluster Display Selectable
Items
The instrument cluster display can be used to
view the following main menu items:
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
• Speedometer • Stop/Start
• Vehicle Info • Audio
• Off Road • Messages
• Fuel Economy • Screen Setup
• Trip Info
NOTE:
Refer to your Owner’s Manual for further
information.
WARNING LIGHTS AND
MESSAGES
The warning/indicator lights will illuminate in
the instrument panel together with a dedi-
cated message and/or acoustic signal when
applicable. These indications are indicative
and precautionary and as such must not be
considered as exhaustive and/or alternative
to the information contained in the Owner’s
Manual, which you are advised to read care-
fully in all cases. Always refer to the informa-
tion in this chapter in the event of a failure
indication. All active telltales will display first
if applicable. The system check menu may
appear different based upon equipment op-
tions and current vehicle status. Some tell-
tales are optional and may not appear.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
72
Red Warning Lights
— Air Bag Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate a
fault with the air bag, and will turn on for four
to eight seconds as a bulb check when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position. This light will illuminate with a
single chime when a fault with the air bag has
been detected, it will stay on until the fault is
cleared. If the light is either not on during
startup, stays on, or turns on while driving,
have the system inspected at an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
— Brake Warning Light
This warning light monitors various brake
functions, including brake fluid level and
parking brake application. If the brake light
turns on it may indicate that the parking
brake is applied, that the brake fluid level is
low, or that there is a problem with the
anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking
brake has been disengaged, and the fluid
level is at the full mark on the master cylinder
reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hy-
draulic system malfunction or that a problem
with the Brake Booster has been detected by
the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Elec-
tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this
case, the light will remain on until the condi-
tion has been corrected. If the problem is
related to the brake booster, the ABS pump
will run when applying the brake, and a brake
pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve
braking capacity in the event of a failure to a
portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in
either half of the dual brake system is indi-
cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will
turn on when the brake fluid level in the
master cylinder has dropped below a speci-
fied level.
The light will remain on until the cause is
corrected.
NOTE:
The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid
level conditions. The vehicle should have
service performed, and the brake fluid level
checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair
is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light
on is dangerous. Part of the brake system
may have failed. It will take longer to stop
the vehicle. You could have a collision.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) are also equipped with Elec-
tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the
event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning
Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.
Immediate repair to the ABS system is re-
quired.
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be
checked by turning the ignition switch from
the OFF position to the ON/RUN position.
The light should illuminate for approximately
two seconds. The light should then turn off
unless the parking brake is applied or a brake
fault is detected. If the light does not illumi-
nate, have the light inspected by an autho-
rized dealer.
73
The light also will turn on when the parking
brake is applied with the ignition switch in
the ON/RUN position.
NOTE:
This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake
application.
— Battery Charge Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
battery is not charging properly. If it stays on
while the engine is running, there may be a
malfunction with the charging system. Con-
tact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
This indicates a possible problem with the
electrical system or a related component.
— Door Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when a door is
ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Electric Power Steering Fault
Warning Light
This warning light will turn on when there's a
fault with the EPS (Electric Power Steering)
system. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Start-
ing And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for
further information.
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced assist
could pose a safety risk to yourself and
others. Service should be obtained as soon
as possible.
— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)
Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
a problem with the Electronic Throttle Con-
trol (ETC) system. If a problem is detected
while the vehicle is running, the light will
either stay on or flash depending on the
nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition
when the vehicle is safely and completely
stopped and the transmission is placed in the
PARK position. The light should turn off. If
the light remains on with the vehicle running,
your vehicle will usually be drivable; however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon
as possible.
NOTE:
This light may turn on if the accelerator and
brake pedals are pressed at the same time.
If the light continues to flash when the ve-
hicle is running, immediate service is re-
quired and you may experience reduced per-
formance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine
stall and your vehicle may require towing.
The light will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If
the light does not come on during starting,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
— Engine Coolant Temperature
Warning Light
This warning light warns of an overheated
engine condition. If the engine coolant tem-
perature is too high, this indicator will illumi-
nate and a single chime will sound. If the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
74
temperature reaches the upper limit, a con-
tinuous chime will sound for four minutes or
until the engine is able to cool: whichever
comes first.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull
over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is
on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission
into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the
temperature reading does not return to nor-
mal, turn the engine off immediately and call
for service.
Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
— Hood Open Warning Light
This indicator will illuminate when the hood
is ajar/open and not fully closed.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Oil Pressure Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on
while driving, stop the vehicle, shut off the
engine as soon as possible, and contact an
authorized dealer. A chime will sound when
this light turns on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is
corrected. This light does not indicate how
much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level
must be checked under the hood.
— Oil Temperature Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the engine oil temperature is high. If the light
turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and
shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait
for oil temperature to return to normal levels.
— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light
This warning light indicates when the driver
or passenger seat belt is unbuckled. When
the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the
light will turn on. When driving, if the driver
or front passenger seat belt remains unbuck-
led, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or
remain on continuously and a chime will
sound.
Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in
“Safety” for further information.
— Swing Gate Open Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate when the
swing gate is open.
NOTE:
If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a
single chime.
— Transmission Temperature
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to warn of a
high transmission fluid temperature. This
may occur with strenuous usage such as
trailer towing. If this light turns on, stop the
vehicle and run the engine at idle or slightly
faster, with the transmission in PARK or
NEUTRAL, until the light turns off. Once the
light turns off, you may continue to drive
normally.
75
WARNING!
If you continue operating the vehicle when
the Transmission Temperature Warning
Light is illuminated you could cause the
fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot
engine or exhaust components and cause
a fire.
CAUTION!
Continuous driving with the Transmission
Temperature Warning Light illuminated
will eventually cause severe transmission
damage or transmission failure.
— Vehicle Security Warning Light —
If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-
mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
Yellow Warning Lights
— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS)
Warning Light
This warning light monitors the Anti-Lock
Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on
when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or
ACC/ON/RUN position and may stay on for as
long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while
driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the
brake system is not functioning and service is
required as soon as possible. However, the
conventional brake system will continue to
operate normally, assuming the Brake Warn-
ing Light is not also on.
If the ABS light does not turn on when the
ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/
RUN position, have the brake system in-
spected by an authorized dealer.
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Active Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will indicate when the
Electronic Stability Control system is Active.
The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the ignition is
placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-
tion, and when ESC is activated. It should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESC
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this warning
light remains on after several ignition cycles,
and the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the
“ESC Indicator Light” come on momen-
tarily each time the ignition is placed in the
ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-
ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive.
• This light will come on when the vehicle is
in an ESC event.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
76
— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
Off Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light indicates the Electronic
Stability Control (ESC) is off.
Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN
or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,
even if it was turned off previously.
— Loose Fuel Filler Cap Warning Light
— If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler
cap to disengage the light. If the light does
not turn off, please see an authorized dealer.
— Low Fuel Warning Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately
2.0 gal (7.5 L), this light will turn on and a
chime will sound. The light will remain on
until fuel is added.
— Low Washer Fluid Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
windshield washer fluid is low.
— Engine Check/Malfunction
Indicator Warning Light (MIL)
The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic
System called OBD II that monitors engine
and automatic transmission control systems.
This warning light will illuminate when the
ignition is in the ON/RUN position before
engine start. If the bulb does not come on
when turning the ignition switch from OFF to
ON/RUN, have the condition checked
promptly.
Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing
gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illumi-
nate the light after engine start. The vehicle
should be serviced if the light stays on
through several typical driving styles. In most
situations, the vehicle will drive normally and
will not require towing.
When the engine is running, the MIL may
flash to alert serious conditions that could
lead to immediate loss of power or severe
catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced by an authorized dealer as
soon as possible if this occurs.
WARNING!
A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as
referenced above, can reach higher tem-
peratures than in normal operating condi-
tions. This can cause a fire if you drive
slowly or park over flammable substances
such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.
This could result in death or serious injury
to the driver, occupants or others.
CAUTION!
Prolonged driving with the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause dam-
age to the vehicle control system. It also
could affect fuel economy and driveability.
If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic
converter damage and power loss will soon
occur. Immediate service is required.
SER
V
4WD
— Service 4WD Warning Light —
If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal a
fault with the 4WD system. If the light stays
on or comes on during driving, it means that
77
the 4WD system is not functioning properly
and that service is required. We recommend
you drive to the nearest service center and
have the vehicle serviced immediately.
— Service Stop/Start System
Warning Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start system is not functioning properly
and service is required. Contact an autho-
rized dealer for service.
— Speed Control Fault Warning Light
This warning light will illuminate to indicate
the Speed Control System is not functioning
properly and service is required. Contact an
authorized dealer.
— Sway Bar Fault Warning Light
This light will illuminate when there is a fault
in the sway bar disconnect system.
— Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) Warning Light
The warning light switches on and a message
is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure
is lower than the recommended value and/or
that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these
cases, optimal tire duration and fuel con-
sumption may not be guaranteed.
Should one or more tires be in the condition
mentioned above, the display will show the
indications corresponding to each tire.
CAUTION!
Do not continue driving with one or more
flat tires as handling may be compro-
mised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp
braking and steering. If a tire puncture
occurs, repair immediately using the dedi-
cated tire repair kit and contact your au-
thorized dealer as soon as possible.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-
bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor-
ing System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
pressure telltale when one or more of your
tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-
ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-
minates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat
and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation
also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread
life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling
and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined
with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
78
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This se-
quence will continue upon subsequent ve-
hicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of replace-
ment or alternate tires or wheels on the ve-
hicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning
properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc-
tion telltale after replacing one or more tires
or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels
allow the TPMS to continue to function
properly.
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
CAUTION!
of the same size, type, and/or style. After-
market wheels can cause sensor damage.
Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause
the Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af-
ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is
recommended that you take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer to have your sensor
function checked.
Yellow Indicator Lights
/ — 4WD Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed.
4L
/
4WD
LOW
— 4WD Low Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front
and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked
together forcing the front and rear wheels to
rotate at the same speed. Low range provides
a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-
creased torque at the wheels.
4H
PART
TIME
/
4WD
PART
TIME
— 4WD Part Time Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive part time mode, and
the front and rear driveshafts are mechani-
cally locked together forcing the front and
rear wheels to rotate at the same speed.
— Active Speed Limiter Fault
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This warning light will illuminate to signal
when there is a fault detected with the Active
Speed Limiter.
— Axle Locker Fault Indicator Light
This light indicates when the front and/or rear
axle locker fault has been detected.
79
— Front And Rear Axle Lock Indicator
Light
This light indicates when the front, rear, or
both axles have been locked. The telltale will
display the lock icon on the front and rear
axles to indicate the current lock status.
N
/
NEUTRAL
— Neutral Indicator Light
— If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the neutral mode.
— Rear Axle Lock Indicator Light
This light indicates when the rear axle lock
has been activated.
— Sway Bar Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front sway bar is disconnected.
Green Indicator Lights
4H
AUTO
— 4WD Auto Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the four-wheel drive auto mode. The sys-
tem will provide power to all four wheels and
shift the power between the front and rear
axles as needed. This will provide maximum
traction in dry and slippery conditions.
— Active Speed Limiter SET
Indicator Light — If Equipped With A
Premium Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Active Speed Limiter is on and set to a
specific speed.
— Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
— If Equipped With A Premium Instrument
Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
speed control is set to the desired speed.
Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
— Front Fog Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
front fog lights are on.
— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate when the
park lights or headlights are turned on.
— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —
If Equipped
This indicator light will illuminate when the
Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.
— Turn Signal Indicator Lights
When the left or right turn signal is activated,
the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-
dently and the corresponding exterior turn
signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be
activated when the multifunction lever is
moved down (left) or up (right).
NOTE:
• A continuous chime will sound if the ve-
hicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)
with either turn signal on.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
80
• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb
if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.
White Indicator Lights
2H
— Two Wheel Drive High Indicator
Light — If Equipped With a Premium Cluster
This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is
in the two wheel drive high mode.
— Active Speed Limiter Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped With A
Premium Instrument Cluster
This light will illuminate when the Active
Speed Limiter has been turned on, but not
set.
— Active Speed Limiter SET Indicator
Light — If Equipped With A Base Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the Active Speed
Limiter is on and set to a specific speed.
— Hill Descent Control (HDC)
Indicator Light — If Equipped
This indicator shows when the Hill Descent
Control (HDC) feature is turned on. The lamp
will be on solid when HDC is armed. HDC can
only be armed when the transfer case is in the
“4WD LOW” position and the vehicle speed
is less then 30 mph (48 km/h). If these
conditions are not met while attempting to
use the HDC feature, the HDC indicator light
will flash on/off.
— Speed Warning Indicator Light —
If Equipped
When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the
speed warning telltale will illuminate in the
instrument cluster with a number matching
the set speed. When the set speed is ex-
ceeded, the indication will light up yellow
and flash along with a continuous chime (up
to ten seconds or until the speed is no longer
exceeded). Speed Warning can be turned on
and off in the instrument cluster display, for
further information refer to “Instrument Clus-
ter Display Menu Items” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel.”
The number “55” is only an example of a
speed that can be set.
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
Light — If Equipped With A Premium
Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed control
has been turned on, but not set. Refer to
“Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
— Cruise Control SET Indicator Light
— If Equipped With Base Instrument Cluster
This indicator light will illuminate when the
speed control is set.
Refer to “Speed Control — If Equipped” in
“Starting And Operating” for further informa-
tion.
Blue Indicator Lights
— High Beam Indicator Light
This indicator light will illuminate to indicate
that the high beam headlights are on. With
the low beams activated, push the multifunc-
tion lever forward (toward the front of the
vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the
81
multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear
of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If
the high beams are off, pull the lever toward
you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to
pass" scenario.
Gray Indicator Lights
— Cruise Control Ready Indicator
Light — If Equipped With Base Instrument
Cluster
This light will turn on when the speed control
has been turned on, but not set. Refer to
“Speed Control — If Equipped” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
— Active Speed Limiter Ready
Indicator Light — If Equipped With A Base
Instrument Cluster
This light will turn on when the Active Speed
Limiter is on, but not set.
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC
SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated
Onboard Diagnostic system called OBD II.
This system monitors the performance of the
emissions, engine, and transmission control
systems. When these systems are operating
properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as
engine emissions well within current govern-
ment regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the
OBD II system will turn on the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL). It will also store diag-
nostic codes and other information to assist
your service technician in making repairs.
Although your vehicle will usually be drivable
and not need towing, see an authorized
dealer for service as soon as possible.
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could
cause further damage to the emission
control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle
must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the vehicle is
running, severe catalytic converter dam-
age and power loss will soon occur. Im-
mediate service is required.
Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)
Cybersecurity
Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard
Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection
port to allow access to information related to
the performance of your emissions controls.
Authorized service technicians may need to
access this information to assist with the
diagnosis and service of your vehicle and
emissions system.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
82
WARNING!
• ONLY an authorized service technician
should connect equipment to the OBD II
connection port in order to read the VIN,
diagnose, or service your vehicle.
• If unauthorized equipment is connected
to the OBD II connection port, such as a
driver-behavior tracking device, it may:
• Be possible that vehicle systems,
including safety related systems,
could be impaired or a loss of ve-
hicle control could occur that may
result in an accident involving seri-
ous injury or death.
• Access, or allow others to access,
information stored in your vehicle
systems, including personal infor-
mation.
For further information, refer to “Cybersecu-
rity” in “Multimedia”.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION
AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal require-
ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle's
emissions control system. Failure to pass
could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspec-
tion and Maintenance (I/M), this
check verifies the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is
not on when the engine is running, and that
the OBD II system is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.
The OBD II system may not be ready if your
vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a
dead battery or a battery replacement. If the
OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail
the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated
test, which you can use prior to going to the
test station.
To check if your vehicle's OBD II system is
ready, you must do the following:
1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi-
tion, but do not crank or start the engine.
NOTE:
If you crank or start the engine, you will
have to start this test over.
2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to
the ON position, you will see the “Mal-
function Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol
come on as part of a normal bulb check.
3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of
two things will happen:
• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds
and then return to being fully illuminated
until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD
II system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/M station.
• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain
fully illuminated until you place the igni-
tion in the off position or start the engine.
This means that your vehicle's OBD II sys-
tem is ready and you can proceed to the I/M
station.
83
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should
see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If
your vehicle was recently serviced or had a
battery failure or replacement, you may need
to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as
you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above
test routine may then indicate that the sys-
tem is now ready.
Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II
system is ready or not, if the MIL is illumi-
nated during normal vehicle operation you
should have your vehicle serviced before go-
ing to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the
engine running.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
84
SAFETY
SAFETY FEATURES ...........86
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ......86
Electronic Brake Control System .....87
AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS . .95
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped ..................95
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .98
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS .................104
Occupant Restraint Systems Features .104
Important Safety Precautions ......104
Seat Belt Systems .............105
Supplemental Restraint Systems
(SRS) .....................112
Child Restraints ...............128
Transporting Pets ..............144
SAFETY TIPS ..............144
Transporting Passengers ..........144
Exhaust Gas .................144
Safety Checks You Should Make
Inside The Vehicle .............145
Periodic Safety Checks You Should
Make Outside The Vehicle .........146
SAFETY
85
SAFETY FEATURES
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides
increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-
mance under most braking conditions. The
system automatically prevents wheel lock,
and enhances vehicle control during braking.
The ABS performs a self-check cycle to en-
sure that the ABS is working properly each
time the vehicle is started and driven. During
this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking
sound as well as some related motor noises.
ABS is activated during braking when the
system detects one or more wheels begin to
lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,
gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,
or panic stops may increase the likelihood of
ABS activation(s).
You also may experience the following when
ABS activates:
• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to
run for a short time after the stop).
• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.
• Brake pedal pulsations.
• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop.
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
• The ABS contains sophisticated elec-
tronic equipment that may be suscep-
tible to interference caused by improp-
erly installed or high output radio
transmitting equipment. This interfer-
ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock
braking capability. Installation of such
equipment should be performed by
qualified professionals.
WARNING!
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will
diminish their effectiveness and may
lead to a collision. Pumping makes the
stopping distance longer. Just press
firmly on your brake pedal when you
need to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws
of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase braking or steering
efficiency beyond that afforded by the
condition of the vehicle brakes and tires
or the traction afforded.
• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, in-
cluding those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, following another vehicle
too closely, or hydroplaning.
• The capabilities of an ABS equipped
vehicle must never be exploited in a
reckless or dangerous manner that could
jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety
of others.
ABS is designed to function with the OEM
tires. Modification may result in degraded
ABS performance.
SAFETY
86
Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light
The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”
will turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” re-
mains on or comes on while driving, it indi-
cates that the anti-lock portion of the brake
system is not functioning and that service is
required. However, the conventional brake
system will continue to operate normally if
the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on.
If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on,
the brake system should be serviced as soon
as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock
brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning
Light” does not come on when the ignition is
turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light
repaired as soon as possible.
Electronic Brake Control System
Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced
Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This
system includes Electronic Brake Force Dis-
tribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start
Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),
Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Elec-
tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems
work together to enhance both vehicle stabil-
ity and control in various driving conditions.
Your vehicle may also be equipped with
Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Ready Alert Brak-
ing (RAB), Rain Brake Support (RBS), Dy-
namic Steering Torque (DST), and Hill De-
scent Control (HDC).
Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)
This function manages the distribution of the
braking torque between the front and rear
axles by limiting braking pressure to the rear
axle. This is done to prevent overslip of the
rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability, and to
prevent the rear axle from entering ABS be-
fore the front axle.
Brake System Warning Light
The red “Brake System Warning Light” will
turn on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as
four seconds.
If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains
on or comes on while driving, it indicates that
the brake system is not functioning properly
and that immediate service is required. If the
“Brake System Warning Light” does not
come on when the ignition is turned to the
ON/RUN mode, have the light repaired as
soon as possible.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s
braking capability during emergency braking
maneuvers. The system detects an emer-
gency braking situation by sensing the rate
and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This
can help reduce braking distances. The BAS
complements the anti-lock brake system
(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly re-
sults in the best BAS assistance. To receive
the benefit of the system, you must apply
continuous braking pressure during the stop-
ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).
Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless
braking is no longer desired. Once the brake
pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.
87
WARNING!
The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,
including those resulting from excessive
speed in turns, driving on very slippery
surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities
of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner, which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
Hill Start Assist (HSA)
The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll
back from a complete stop while on an in-
cline. If the driver releases the brake while
stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to
hold the brake pressure for a short period. If
the driver does not apply the throttle before
this time expires, the system will release
brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down
the hill as normal.
The following conditions must be met in
order for HSA to activate:
• The feature must be enabled.
• The vehicle must be stopped.
• Park brake must be off.
• Driver door must be closed. (If the doors are
attached, then the door must be closed. If
the doors are detached then the driver's
seatbelt must be buckled.)
• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.
• The gear selection must match vehicle up-
hill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in
forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in
REVERSE gear).
• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all
forward gears. The system will not activate
if the transmission is in PARK or NEU-
TRAL. For vehicles equipped with a manual
transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA
will remain active.
WARNING!
There may be situations where the Hill
Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and
slight rolling may occur, such as on minor
hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while
pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for
active driving involvement. It is always the
driver’s responsibility to be attentive to
distance to other vehicles, people, and
objects, and most importantly brake op-
eration to ensure safe operation of the
vehicle under all road conditions. Your
complete attention is always required
while driving to maintain safe control of
your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-
ings can result in a collision or serious
personal injury.
Disabling And Enabling HSA
This feature can be turned on or turned off.
To change the current setting, refer to “In-
strument Cluster Display” in “Getting To
Know Your Instrument Panel” for further in-
formation.
SAFETY
88
Towing With HSA
HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate
roll back while towing a trailer.
WARNING!
• If you use a trailer brake controller with
your trailer, the trailer brakes may be
activated and deactivated with the brake
switch. If so, there may not be enough
brake pressure to hold both the vehicle
and the trailer on a hill when the brake
pedal is released. In order to avoid roll-
ing down an incline while resuming ac-
celeration, manually activate the trailer
brake or apply more vehicle brake pres-
sure prior to releasing the brake pedal.
• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply
the parking brake fully when exiting your
vehicle. Also, be certain to place the
transmission in PARK.
• Failure to follow these warnings can re-
sult in a collision or serious personal
injury.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel
spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel
spin is detected, the TCS may apply brake
pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or re-
duce engine power to provide enhanced ac-
celeration and stability. A feature of the TCS,
Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions
similar to a limited slip differential and con-
trols the wheel spin across a driven axle. If
one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster
than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow
more engine torque to be applied to the wheel
that is not spinning. BLD may remain en-
abled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced
mode.
Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
This system enhances directional control and
stability of the vehicle under various driving
conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or
understeering of the vehicle by applying the
brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in
counteracting the oversteer or understeer
condition. Engine power may also be reduced
to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.
ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine
the vehicle path intended by the driver and
compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the
intended path, ESC applies the brake of the
appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting
the oversteer or understeer condition.
• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning
more than appropriate for the steering
wheel position.
• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning
less than appropriate for the steering wheel
position.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” located in the instrument cluster will
start to flash as soon as the ESC system
becomes active. The “ESC Activation/
Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes
when the TCS is active. If the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” be-
gins to flash during acceleration, ease up on
the accelerator and apply as little throttle as
possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and
driving to the prevailing road conditions.
89
WARNING!
•
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot
prevent the natural laws of physics from
acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
the traction afforded by prevailing road
conditions. ESC cannot prevent acci-
dents, including those resulting from ex-
cessive speed in turns, driving on very
slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC
also cannot prevent accidents resulting
from loss of vehicle control due to inap-
propriate driver input for the conditions.
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents. The capabilities of
an ESC equipped vehicle must never be
exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-
ner which could jeopardize the user’s
safety or the safety of others.
• Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop-
erly maintain your vehicle, may change
the handling characteristics of your ve-
hicle, and may negatively affect the per-
formance of the ESC system. Changes to
the steering system, suspension, brak-
ing system, tire type and size or wheel
WARNING!
size may adversely affect ESC perfor-
mance. Improperly inflated and un-
evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC
performance. Any vehicle modification
or poor vehicle maintenance that re-
duces the effectiveness of the ESC sys-
tem can increase the risk of loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, per-
sonal injury and death.
ESC Operating Modes
NOTE:
Depending upon model and mode of opera-
tion, the ESC system may have multiple op-
erating modes.
ESC On
This is the normal operating mode for the
ESC. Whenever the vehicle is started, the
ESC system will be in this mode. This mode
should be used for most driving conditions.
Alternate ESC modes should only be used for
specific reasons as noted in the following
paragraphs.
Partial Off
The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times
when a more spirited driving experience is
desired. This mode may modify TCS and ESC
thresholds for activation, which allows for
more wheel spin than normally allowed. This
mode may be useful if the vehicle becomes
stuck.
To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily
push the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate. To turn the
ESC on again, momentarily push the “ESC
Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”
will turn off.
NOTE:
For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes
a momentary button push will toggle the ESC
mode. Multiple momentary button pushed
may be required to return to ESC On.
WARNING!
• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS
functionality of ESC, (except for the lim-
ited slip feature described in the TCS
SAFETY
90
WARNING!
section), has been disabled and the
“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi-
nated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the
engine power reduction feature of TCS is
disabled, and the enhanced vehicle sta-
bility offered by the ESC system is re-
duced.
• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled
when the ESC system is in the “Partial
Off” mode.
Full Off — If Equipped
This mode is intended for off-highway or
off-road use only and should not be used on
any public roadways. In this mode, TCS and
ESC features are turned OFF. To enter the
“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC
Off” switch for five seconds while the vehicle
is stopped with the engine running. After five
seconds, a chime will sound, the “ESC Off
Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the
“ESC OFF” message will display in the in-
strument cluster. To turn ESC ON again,
momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.
NOTE:
System may switch from ESC “Full Off” to
“Partial Off” mode when vehicle exceeds a
predetermined speed. When the vehicle
speed slows below the predetermined speed
the system will return to ESC “Full Off”.
ESC modes may also be affected by drive
modes if so equipped.
WARNING!
• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine
torque reduction and stability features
are disabled. Therefore, enhanced ve-
hicle stability offered by the ESC system
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not en-
gage to assist in maintaining stability.
ESC “Full Off” mode is intended for
off-highway or off-road use only.
• With the ESC switched off, the en-
hanced vehicle stability offered by ESC
is unavailable. In an emergency evasive
maneuver, the ESC system will not en-
gage to assist in maintaining stability.
WARNING!
ESC “Full Off” mode is only intended for
off-highway or off-road use.
• The Electronic Stability Control (ESC)
cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-
ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it
increase the traction afforded by prevail-
ing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent
all accidents, including those resulting
from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.
ESC also cannot prevent collisions.
ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light
And ESC OFF Indicator Light
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” in the instrument
cluster will come on when the
ignition is turned to the ON mode.
It should go out with the engine
running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction
Indicator Light” comes on continuously with
the engine running, a malfunction has been
detected in the ESC system. If this light
91
remains on after several ignition cycles, and
the vehicle has been driven several miles
(kilometers) at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon
as possible to have the problem diagnosed
and corrected.
The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” (located in the instrument cluster)
starts to flash as soon as the tires lose trac-
tion and the ESC system becomes active. The
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” also flashes when TCS is active. If the
“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration,
ease up on the accelerator and apply as little
throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road con-
ditions.
NOTE:
• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator
Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”
come on momentarily each time the igni-
tion is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the
ESC system will be on even if it was turned
off previously.
• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-
ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;
the sounds will stop when ESC becomes
inactive following the maneuver that
caused the ESC activation.
The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indi-
cates the customer has elected to
have the Electronic Stability Control
(ESC) in a reduced mode.
Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)
This system anticipates the potential for
wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering
wheel input and the speed of the vehicle.
When ERM determines that the rate of
change of the steering wheel angle and vehi-
cle’s speed are sufficient to potentially cause
wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate
brake and may also reduce engine power to
lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.
ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift
occurring during severe or evasive driving
maneuvers; it cannot prevent wheel lift due
to other factors, such as road conditions,
leaving the roadway, or striking objects or
other vehicles.
NOTE:
ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full
Off” mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic
Stability Control (ESC)” in this section for a
complete explanation of the available ESC
modes.
WARNING!
Many factors, such as vehicle loading,
road conditions and driving conditions,
influence the chance that wheel lift or
rollover may occur. ERM cannot prevent
all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those
that involve leaving the roadway or striking
objects or other vehicles. The capabilities
of an ERM-equipped vehicle must never
be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user's
safety or the safety of others.
SAFETY
92
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)
TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize
an excessively swaying trailer and will take
the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the
sway. TSC will become active automatically
once an excessively swaying trailer is recog-
nized.
NOTE:
TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.
Always use caution when towing a trailer and
follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-
tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
When TSC is functioning, the “ESC
Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will
flash, the engine power may be reduced and
you may feel the brakes being applied to
individual wheels to attempt to stop the
trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when
the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” or “Full
Off” modes.
WARNING!
If TSC activates while driving, slow the
vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe
location, and adjust the trailer load to
eliminate trailer sway.
Ready Alert Braking (RAB)
Ready Alert Braking may reduce the time
required to reach full braking during emer-
gency braking situations. It anticipates when
an emergency braking situation may occur by
monitoring how fast the throttle is released by
the driver. The EBC will prepare the brake
system for a panic stop.
Rain Brake Support (RBS)
Rain Brake Support may improve braking
performance in wet conditions. It will periodi-
cally apply a small amount of brake pressure
to remove any water buildup on the front
brake rotors. It functions when the wind-
shield wipers are in LO or HI speed. When
Rain Brake Support is active, there is no
notification to the driver and no driver inter-
action is required.
Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped
HDC is intended for low speed off road driving
while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains
vehicle speed while descending hills during
various driving situations. HDC controls ve-
hicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.
HDC has three states:
1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not
activate).
2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but
activation conditions are not met, or driver
is actively overriding with brake or throttle
application).
3. Active (feature is enabled and actively
controlling vehicle speed).
Enabling HDC
HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch,
but the following conditions must also be met
to enable HDC:
• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range
• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).
• Parking brake is released.
93
• Driver door is closed. (If doors are attached,
then door must be closed. if doors are
detached, then driver seatbelt must be
buckled.)
Activating HDC
Once HDC is enabled it will activate auto-
matically if driven down a grade of sufficient
magnitude. The set speed for HDC is select-
able by the driver, and can be adjusted by
using the gear shift +/-. The following sum-
marizes the HDC set speeds:
HDC Target Set Speeds
•P=Nosetspeed. HDC may be enabled
but will not activate
• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)
• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)
• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)
• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)
• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)
• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)
• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)
• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)
• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped
NOTE:
During HDC the +/- shifter input is used for
HDC target speed selection, but will not af-
fect the gear chosen by the transmission.
When actively controlling HDC the transmis-
sion will shift appropriately for the driver-
selected set speed and corresponding driving
conditions.
Driver Override
The driver may override HDC activation with
throttle or brake application at anytime.
Deactivating HDC
HDC will be deactivated but remain available
if any of the following conditions occur:
• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle
or brake application.
• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h)
but remains below 40 mph (64 km/h).
• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi-
cient magnitude, is on level ground, or is on
an uphill grade.
• Vehicle is shifted to park.
Disabling HDC
HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any
of the following conditions occur:
• The driver pushes the HDC switch.
• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low
Range.
• The parking brake is applied.
• Driver door opens (Driver door opens if
doors are attached or driver seatbelt is
unbuckled if doors are detached).
• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph
(32 km/h) for greater than 70 seconds.
• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph
(64 km/h) (HDC exits immediately).
• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.
SAFETY
94
Feedback To The Driver
The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and
the HDC switch has an indicator light, which
offers feedback to the driver about the state
HDC is in.
• The cluster icon and switch indicator light
will illuminate and remain on solid when
HDC is enabled or activated. This is the
normal operating condition for HDC.
• The cluster icon and switch indicator light
will flash for several seconds then extin-
guish when the driver pushes the HDC
switch but enable conditions are not met.
• The cluster icon and switch indicator light
will flash for several seconds then extin-
guish when HDC disables due to excess
speed.
• The cluster icon and switch indicator light
will flash when HDC deactivates due to
overheated brakes. The flashing will stop
and HDC will activate again once the brakes
have cooled sufficiently.
WARNING!
HDC is only intended to assist the driver in
controlling vehicle speed when descend-
ing hills. The driver must remain attentive
to the driving conditions and is responsible
for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.
AUXILIARY DRIVING
SYSTEMS
Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) —
If Equipped
The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
uses two radar-based sensors, located inside
the taillights, to detect highway licensable
vehicles (automobiles, trucks, motorcycles,
etc.) that enter the blind spot zones from the
rear/front/side of the vehicle.
When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning
light will momentarily illuminate in both out-
side rear view mirrors to let the driver know
that the system is operational. The BSM
system sensors operate when the vehicle is in
any forward gear or REVERSE and enters
stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.
The BSM detection zone covers approxi-
mately one lane width on both sides of the
vehicle 12 ft (3.8 m). The zone length starts
at the outside rear view mirror and extends
approximately 10 ft (3 m) beyond the rear
bumper of the vehicle. The BSM system
monitors the detection zones on both sides of
Rear Detection Zones
95
the vehicle when the vehicle speed reaches
approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and
will alert the driver of vehicles in these areas.
NOTE:
• The BSM system DOES NOT alert the driver
about rapidly approaching vehicles that are
outside the detection zones.
• The BSM system detection zone DOES NOT
change if your vehicle is towing a trailer.
Therefore, visually verify the adjacent lane
is clear for both your vehicle and trailer
before making a lane change. If the trailer
or other object (i.e., bicycle, sports equip-
ment) extends beyond the side of your ve-
hicle, this may result in the BSM warning
light remaining illuminated the entire time
the vehicle is in a forward gear.
• The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system
may experience drop outs (blinking on and
off) of the side mirror Warning Indicator
lamps when a motorcycle or any small ob-
ject remains at the side of the vehicle for
extended periods of time (more than a
couple of seconds).
The area on taillights, where the radar sen-
sors are located, must remain free of snow,
ice, and dirt/road contamination so that the
BSM system can function properly. Do not
block the taillights where the radar sensors
are located with foreign objects (bumper
stickers, bicycle racks, etc.).
The BSM system notifies the driver of objects
in the detection zones by illuminating the
BSM warning light located in the outside
mirrors in addition to sounding an audible
(chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.
Refer to “Modes Of Operation” for further
information.
The BSM system monitors the detection zone
from three different entry points (side, rear,
front) while driving to see if an alert is nec-
essary. The BSM system will issue an alert
during these types of zone entries.
Entering From The Side
Vehicles that move into your adjacent lanes
from either side of the vehicle.
Entering From The Rear
Vehicles that come up from behind your ve-
hicle on either side and enter the rear detec-
tion zone with a relative speed of less than
30 mph (48 km/h).
Overtaking Traffic
If you pass another vehicle slowly with a
relative speed less than 15 mph (24 km/h)
and the vehicle remains in the blind spot for
approximately 1.5 seconds, the warning light
will be illuminated. If the difference in speed
between the two vehicles is greater than
15 mph (24 km/h), the warning light will not
illuminate.
The BSM system is designed not to issue an
alert on stationary objects such as guardrails,
posts, walls, foliage, berms, etc. However,
occasionally the system may alert on such
objects. This is normal operation and your
vehicle does not require service.
The BSM system will not alert you of objects
that are traveling in the opposite direction of
the vehicle in adjacent lanes.
SAFETY
96
WARNING!
The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only
an aid to help detect objects in the blind
spot zones. The BSM system is not de-
signed to detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or
animals. Even if your vehicle is equipped
with the BSM system, always check your
vehicle’s mirrors, glance over your shoul-
der, and use your turn signal before chang-
ing lanes. Failure to do so can result in
serious injury or death.
Rear Cross Path (RCP)
The Rear Cross Path (RCP) feature is in-
tended to aid the driver when backing out of
parking spaces where their vision of oncom-
ing vehicles may be blocked. Proceed slowly
and cautiously out of the parking space until
the rear end of the vehicle is exposed. The
RCP system will then have a clear view of the
cross traffic and if an oncoming vehicle is
detected, alert the driver.
RCP monitors the rear detection zones on
both sides of the vehicle, for objects that are
moving toward the side of the vehicle with a
minimum speed of approximately 3 mph
(5 km/h), to objects moving a maximum of
approximately 20 mph (32 km/h), such as in
parking lot situations.
NOTE:
In a parking lot situation, oncoming vehicles
can be obscured by vehicles parked on either
side. If the sensors are blocked by other
structures or vehicles, the system will not be
able to alert the driver.
When RCP is on and the vehicle is in RE-
VERSE, the driver is alerted using both the
visual and audible alarms, including reduc-
ing the radio volume.
WARNING!
Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a
back up aid system. It is intended to be
used to help a driver detect an oncoming
vehicle in a parking lot situation. Drivers
must be careful when backing up, even
when using RCP. Always check carefully
WARNING!
behind your vehicle, look behind you, and
be sure to check for pedestrians, animals,
other vehicles, obstructions, and blind
spots before backing up. Failure to do so
can result in serious injury or death.
Modes Of Operation
Three selectable modes of operation are
available in the Uconnect System. Refer to
“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
Blind Spot Alert Lights Only
When operating in Blind Spot Alert mode, the
BSM system will provide a visual alert in the
appropriate side view mirror based on a de-
tected object. However, when the system is
operating in Rear Cross Path (RCP) mode, the
system will respond with both visual and
audible alerts when a detected object is pres-
ent. Whenever an audible alert is requested,
the radio is muted.
97
Blind Spot Alert Lights/Chime
When operating in Blind Spot Alert Lights/
Chime mode, the BSM system will provide a
visual alert in the appropriate side view mirror
based on a detected object. If the turn signal
is then activated, and it corresponds to an
alert present on that side of the vehicle, an
audible chime will also be sounded. When-
ever a turn signal and detected object are
present on the same side at the same time,
both the visual and audible alerts will be
issued. In addition to the audible alert the
radio (if on) will also be muted.
NOTE:
Whenever an audible alert is requested by the
BSM system, the radio is also muted.
When the system is in RCP, the system shall
respond with both visual and audible alerts
when a detected object is present. Whenever
an audible alert is requested, the radio is also
muted. Turn/hazard signal status is ignored;
the RCP state always requests the chime.
Blind Spot Alert Off
When the BSM system is turned off there will
be no visual or audible alerts from either the
BSM or RCP systems.
NOTE:
The BSM system will store the current oper-
ating mode when the vehicle is shut off. Each
time the vehicle is started the previously
stored mode will be recalled and used.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference.
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
will warn the driver of a low tire pressure
based on the vehicle recommended cold
placard pressure.
NOTE:
The alert warning on the cluster will stay on
until the tire is inflated to the placard pres-
sure.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature
by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F
(6.5°C). This means that when the outside
temperature decreases, the tire pressure will
decrease. Tire pressure should always be set
based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is
defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle
has not been driven for at least three hours, or
driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
SAFETY
98
sure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to
“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for
information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also
increase as the vehicle is driven. This is
normal and there should be no adjustment for
this increased pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire
pressure if the tire pressure falls below the
low-pressure warning limit for any reason,
including low temperature effects and natu-
ral pressure loss through the tire.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of
low tire pressure as long as the condition
exists, and will not turn off until the tire
pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pres-
sure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem Warning Light) illuminates, you must
increase the tire pressure to the recom-
mended cold placard pressure in order for the
TPMS Light to turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warn-
ing Light off.
The system will automatically update and the
TPMS Warning Light will turn off once the
system receives the updated tire pressures.
The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order
for the TPMS to receive this information.
For example, your vehicle may have a recom-
mended cold (parked for more than three
hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa).
If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)
and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi
(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)
will decrease the tire pressure to approxi-
mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is
low enough to turn on the TPMS Warning
Light. Driving the vehicle may cause the tire
pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi
(193 kPa), but the TPMS Warning Light will
still be on. In this situation, the TPMS Warn-
ing Light will turn off only after the tires are
inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warn-
ing Light off.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the
original equipment tires and wheels.
TPMS pressures and warning have been
established for the tire size equipped on
your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-
tion or sensor damage may result when
using replacement equipment that is not
of the same size, type, and/or style. The
TPM sensor is not designed for use on
aftermarket wheels, and may contribute
to a poor overall system performance.
Customers are encouraged to use OEM
wheels to assure TPMS feature opera-
tion.
99
CAUTION!
• Using aftermarket tire sealants may
cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-
tem (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-
able. After using an aftermarket tire
sealant it is recommended that you take
your vehicle to an authorized dealer to
have your sensor function checked.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire
pressure always reinstall the valve stem
cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt
from entering the valve stem, which
could damage the TPMS sensor.
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace nor-
mal tire care and maintenance, or to pro-
vide warning of a tire failure or condition.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire
pressure gauge while adjusting your tire
pressure.
• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces
fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may
affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping
ability.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
maintenance, and it is the driver’s respon-
sibility to maintain correct tire pressure
using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even
if underinflation has not reached the level
to trigger illumination of the TPMS Warning
Light.
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect
tire pressure, and the TPMS will monitor
the actual tire pressure in the tire.
System Operation
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)
uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire
pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each
wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire
pressure readings to the receiver module.
NOTE:
It is particularly important for you to check
the tire pressure in all of the tires on your
vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper
pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following compo-
nents:
• Receiver module
• Four tire pressure monitoring sensors
Tire Pressure Monitoring Display
SAFETY
100
• Various tire pressure monitoring system
messages, which display in the instrument
cluster
• Tire pressure monitoring telltale light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure
Warnings
The TPMS Warning Light will illumi-
nate in the instrument cluster and a
chime will sound when tire pressure
is low in one or more of the four active road
tires. In addition, the instrument cluster will
display a "Tire Low" message for a minimum
of five seconds, an "Inflate to XX" message
and a graphic showing the pressure values of
each tire with the low tire pressure values in a
different color.
Should this occur, you should stop as soon as
possible and inflate the tires with low pres-
sure (those in a different color in the instru-
ment cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom-
mended cold placard pressure value as
shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once
the system receives the updated tire pres-
sures, the system will automatically update,
the pressure values in the graphic display in
the instrument cluster will return to their
original color, and the TPMS Warning Light
will turn off.
NOTE:
When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may
need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi
(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-
ard pressure in order to turn the TPMS Warn-
ing Light off. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive
this information.
Service TPMS Warning
When a system fault is detected, the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for 75 sec-
onds and then remain on solid. The system
fault will also sound a chime. In addition, the
instrument cluster will display a "SERVICE
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM" message for a
minimum of five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value to
indicate which sensor is not being received.
Tire Pressure Monitoring
Low Pressure Warning
101
If the ignition is cycled, this sequence will
repeat, providing the system fault still exists.
If the system fault no longer exists, the TPMS
Warning Light will no longer flash, and the
“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” mes-
sage will no longer display, and a pressure
value will display in place of the dashes. A
system fault can occur due to any of the
following:
• Jamming due to electronic devices or driv-
ing next to facilities emitting the same
radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.
• Installing some form of aftermarket window
tinting that affects radio wave signals.
• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or
wheel housings.
• Using tire chains on the vehicle.
• Using wheels/tires not equipped with
TPMS sensors.
Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching
Full Size Spare
1. The compact spare tire or non-matching
full size does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS
will not monitor the pressure in the com-
pact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact or non-
matching full size spare tire in place of a
road tire that has a pressure below the
low-pressure warning limit, upon the next
ignition cycle, the TPMS Warning Light
will remain on and a chime will sound. In
addition, the graphic in the instrument
cluster will still display a different color
pressure value and an "Inflate to XX"
message.
3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-
utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the TPMS
Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then remain on solid. In
addition, the instrument cluster will dis-
play a “Service Tire Pressure System”
message for five seconds and then display
dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.
4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a
chime will sound, the TPMS Warning
Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid, and the instru-
ment cluster will display a “SERVICE
TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” message for
five seconds and then display dashes (- -)
in place of the pressure value.
5. Once you repair or replace the original
road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in
place of the compact spare or non-
matching full size, the TPMS will update
automatically. In addition, the TPMS
Warning Light will turn off and the graphic
in the instrument cluster will display a
new pressure value instead of dashes (- -),
as long as no tire pressure is below the
low-pressure warning limit in any of the
four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the
TPMS to receive this information.
SAFETY
102
Vehicles With a Full Size Matching Spare
1. If your vehicle is equipped with a match-
ing full-size spare wheel and tire assem-
bly, it has a tire pressure monitoring sen-
sor, and can be monitored by the Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) when
swapped with a low pressure road tire.
2. In the event that the matching full-size
spare tire is swapped with a low pressure
road tire, the next ignition switch cycle
will still show the TPMS Warning Light to
be on, a chime to sound, an Inflate to XX
message to appear in the instrument clus-
ter, and the graphic display will still show
the low tire pressure value in a different
color.
3. Driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes
above 15 mph (24 km/h) will turn off the
TPMS Warning Light as long as none of
road tires are below the low pressure warn-
ing threshold.
TPMS Deactivation — If Equipped
The TPMS can be deactivated if replacing all
four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires)
with wheel and tire assemblies that do not
have TPMS sensors, such as when installing
winter wheel and tire assemblies on your
vehicle.
To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires not equipped with Tire Pressure Moni-
toring (TPM) Sensors. Then, drive the vehicle
for 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The
TPMS will chime, the TPMS Warning Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then
remain on. The instrument cluster will dis-
play the “SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYS-
TEM” message and then display dashes (--)
in place of the pressure values.
Beginning with the next ignition cycle, the
TPMS will no longer chime or display the
“SERVICE TIRE PRESSURE SYSTEM” mes-
sage in the instrument cluster but dashes (--)
will remain in place of the pressure values.
To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four
wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) with
tires equipped with TPMS sensors. Then,
drive the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above
15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will chime, the
TPMS Warning Light will flash on and off for
75 seconds and then turn off. The instrument
cluster will display the “SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM” message and then dis-
play pressure values in place of the dashes.
On the next ignition cycle the "SERVICE TIRE
PRESSURE SYSTEM" message will no longer
be displayed as long as no system fault exists.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
103
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT
SYSTEMS
Some of the most important safety features in
your vehicle are the restraint systems:
Occupant Restraint Systems Features
• Seat Belt Systems
• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air
Bags
• Child Restraints
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
Important Safety Precautions
Please pay close attention to the information
in this section. It tells you how to use your
restraint system properly, to keep you and
your passengers as safe as possible.
Here are some simple steps you can take to
minimize the risk of harm from a deploying
air bag:
1. Children 12 years old and under should
always ride buckled up in the rear seat of
a vehicle with a rear seat.
2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a
rear-facing child restraint) must ride in
the front passenger seat, move the seat as
far back as possible and use the proper
child restraint (refer to “Child Restraints”
in this section for further information).
3. Children that are not big enough to wear
the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to
“Child Restraints” in this section for fur-
ther information) should be secured in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in
child restraints or belt-positioning booster
seats. Older children who do not use child
restraints or belt-positioning booster seats
should ride properly buckled up in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder
belt behind them or under their arm.
5. You should read the instructions provided
with your child restraint to make sure that
you are using it properly.
6. All occupants should always wear their lap
and shoulder belts properly.
7. The driver and front passenger seats
should be moved back as far as practical
to allow the front air bags room to inflate.
8. Do not lean against the door or window. If
your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-
ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate
forcefully into the space between occu-
pants and the door and occupants could
be injured.
9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs
to be modified to accommodate a dis-
abled person, refer to the “Customer As-
sistance” section for customer service
contact information.
SAFETY
104
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Seat Belt Systems
Buckle up even though you are an excellent
driver, even on short trips. Someone on the
road may be a poor driver and could cause a
collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save
lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of
injuries in a collision. Some of the worst
injuries happen when people are thrown from
the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility
of ejection and the risk of injury caused by
striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in
a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert)
Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)
BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The
Belt Alert feature is active whenever the igni-
tion switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi-
tion.
Initial Indication
If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-
tion, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If
the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition
switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-
tion the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on
and remain on until both outboard front seat
belts are buckled. The outboard front passen-
ger seat BeltAlert is not active when an out-
board front passenger seat is unoccupied.
BeltAlert Warning Sequence
The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated
when the vehicle is moving above a specified
vehicle speed range and the driver or out-
board front seat passenger is unbuckled (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert is not active when the outboard
front passenger seat is unoccupied). The
BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking
the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding
an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert
warning sequence has completed, the Seat
Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the
seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning
sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed
until the driver and occupied outboard front
seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The
driver should instruct all occupants to buckle
their seat belts.
105
Change of Status
If the driver or outboard front seat passenger
(if equipped with outboard front passenger
seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt
while the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert
warning sequence will begin until the seat
belts are buckled again.
The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert
is not active when the outboard front passen-
ger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be
triggered when an animal or other items are
placed on the outboard front passenger seat
or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It
is recommended that pets be restrained in
the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or
pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,
and cargo is properly stowed.
BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by
an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not
recommend deactivating BeltAlert.
NOTE:
If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the
driver or outboard front seat passenger (if
equipped with outboard front passenger seat
BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Re-
minder Light will turn on and remain on until
the driver and outboard front seat passenger
seat belts are buckled.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All seating positions in your vehicle are
equipped with lap/shoulder belts.
The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only
during very sudden stops or collisions. This
feature allows the shoulder part of the seat
belt to move freely with you under normal
conditions. However, in a collision the seat
belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking
the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out
of the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
WARNING!
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always
wear your seat belt even though you have
air bags.
• In a collision, you and your passengers
can suffer much greater injuries if you
are not properly buckled up. You can
strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of
the vehicle. Always be sure you and
others in your vehicle are buckled up
properly.
• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-
sion, people riding in these areas are
more likely to be seriously injured or
killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly. Oc-
cupants, including the driver, should al-
ways wear their seat belts whether or not
an air bag is also provided at their seat-
SAFETY
106
WARNING!
ing position to minimize the risk of se-
vere injury or death in the event of a
crash.
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a
single seat belt. People belted together
can crash into one another in a collision,
hurting one another badly. Never use a
lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their
size.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the
risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt
forces won’t be at the strong hip and
pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.
WARNING!
Always wear the lap part of your seat belt
as low as possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted seat belt may not protect you
properly. In a collision, it could even cut
into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat
against your body, without twists. If you
can’t straighten a seat belt in your ve-
hicle, take it to an authorized dealer
immediately and have it fixed.
• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong
buckle will not protect you properly. The
lap portion could ride too high on your
body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your seat belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A seat belt that is too loose will not
protect you properly. In a sudden stop,
you could move too far forward, increas-
ing the possibility of injury. Wear your
seat belt snugly.
• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is
dangerous. Your body could strike the
inside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli-
sion, increasing head and neck injury. A
seat belt worn under the arm can cause
WARNING!
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as
shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest
bones will take the force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will
not protect you from injury during a
collision. You are more likely to hit your
head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart
in a collision and leave you with no
protection. Inspect the seat belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or
loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-
placed immediately. Do not disassemble
or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a col-
lision.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit
back and adjust the seat.
107
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back
of the front seat, and next to your arm in
the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a
rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull
out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up
the webbing as far as necessary to allow
the seat belt to go around your lap.
3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,
insert the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and
lies low across your hips, below your ab-
domen. To remove slack in the lap belt
portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To
loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the
latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug
seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under
the seat belt in a collision.
5. Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
6. To release the seat belt, push the red
button on the buckle. The seat belt will
automatically retract to its stowed posi-
tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate
down the webbing to allow the seat belt to
retract fully.
Pulling Out The Latch Plate
Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle Positioning The Lap Belt
SAFETY
108
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a
twisted lap/shoulder belt.
1. Position the latch plate as close as pos-
sible to the anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)
above the latch plate, grasp and twist the
seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a
fold that begins immediately above the
latch plate.
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the
folded webbing. The folded webbing must
enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it
clears the folded webbing and the seat
belt is no longer twisted.
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the driver and front passenger seats, the
top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the seat belt
away from your neck. Push or squeeze the
anchorage button to release the anchorage,
and move it up or down to the position that
serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average,
you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in
a lower position, and if you are taller than
average, you will prefer the shoulder belt
anchorage in a higher position. After you
release the anchorage button, try to move it
up or down to make sure that it is locked in
position.
NOTE:
The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-
age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This
feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to
be adjusted in the upward position without
pushing or squeezing the release button. To
verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,
pull downward on the shoulder belt anchor-
age until it is locked into position.
WARNING!
• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could
make your injuries in a collision much
worse. You might suffer internal injuries,
or you could even slide out of the seat
belt. Follow these instructions to wear
your seat belt safely and to keep your
passengers safe, too.
• Position the shoulder belt across the
shoulder and chest with minimal, if any
slack so that it is comfortable and not
resting on your neck. The retractor will
withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.
• Misadjustment of the seat belt could
reduce the effectiveness of the safety
belt in a crash.
Adjustable Upper Anchorage
109
Seat Belt Extender
If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly,
even when the webbing is fully extended and
the adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage
(if equipped) is in its lowest position, an
authorized dealer can provide you with a Seat
Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should
be used only if the existing seat belt is not
long enough. When the Seat Belt Extender is
not required for a different occupant, it must
be removed.
WARNING!
• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is
physically required in order to properly
fit the original seat belt system. DO NOT
USE the Seat Belt Extender if, when
worn, the distance between the front
edge of the Seat Belt Extender buckle
and the center of the occupant’s body is
LESS than 6 inches.
• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not
needed can increase the risk of serious
injury or death in a collision. Only use
the Seat Belt Extender when the lap belt
WARNING!
is not long enough and only use in the
recommended seating positions. Re-
move and store the Seat Belt Extender
when not needed.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
Seat belts must be worn by all occupants
including pregnant women: the risk of injury
in the event of an accident is reduced for the
mother and the unborn child if they are
wearing a seat belt.
Position the lap belt snug and low below the
abdomen and across the strong bones of the
hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest
and away from the neck. Never place the
shoulder belt behind the back or under the
arm.
Seat Belt Pretensioner
The front seat belt system is equipped with
pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event
of a collision. These devices may improve the
performance of the seat belt by removing
slack from the seat belt early in a collision.
Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE:
These devices are not a substitute for proper
seat belt placement by the occupant. The
seat belt still must be worn snugly and posi-
tioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air
bags, the pretensioners are single use items.
A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag
must be replaced immediately.
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts
SAFETY
110
Energy Management Feature
The front seat belt system is equipped with
an Energy Management feature that may help
further reduce the risk of injury in the event of
a collision. The seat belt system has a retrac-
tor assembly that is designed to release web-
bing in a controlled manner.
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR)
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used
to secure a child restraint system. For addi-
tional information, refer to “Installing Child
Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” un-
der the “Child Restraints” section of this
manual. The figure below illustrates the lock-
ing feature for each seating position.
If the passenger seating position is equipped
with an ALR and is being used for normal
usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far
enough to comfortably wrap around the occu-
pant’s mid-section so as to not activate the
ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a
clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow
the webbing to retract completely in this case
and then carefully pull out only the amount of
webbing necessary to comfortably wrap
around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the
latch plate into the buckle until you hear a
"click."
In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder
belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat
belt will still retract to remove any slack in the
shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking
Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in
a seating position that has a seat belt with
this feature. Children 12 years old and under
should always be properly restrained in the
rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (Two-Door Models)
ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor (Four-Door Models)
111
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-
ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.
3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat
belt retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This indicates the seat belt is now
in the Automatic Locking Mode.
How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt
and allow it to retract completely to disen-
gage the Automatic Locking Mode and acti-
vate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-
ing mode.
WARNING!
• The seat belt assembly must be replaced
if the switchable Automatic Locking Re-
tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat
belt function is not working properly
when checked according to the proce-
dures in the Service Manual.
• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly
could increase the risk of injury in colli-
sions.
• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode
to restrain occupants who are wearing
the seat belt or children who are using
booster seats. The locked mode is only
used to install rear-facing or forward-
facing child restraints that have a har-
ness for restraining the child.
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)
Some of the safety features described in this
section may be standard equipment on some
models, or may be optional equipment on
others. If you are not sure, ask an authorized
dealer.
The air bag system must be ready to protect
you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) monitors the internal cir-
cuits and interconnecting wiring associated
with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-
nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the
following Air Bag System Components:
Air Bag System Components
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
SAFETY
112
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
Air Bag Warning Light
The ORC monitors the readiness of the
electronic parts of the air bag system when-
ever the ignition switch is in the START or
ON/RUN position. If the ignition switch is in
the OFF position or in the ACC position, the
air bag system is not on and the air bags will
not inflate.
The ORC contains a backup power supply
system that may deploy the air bag system
even if the battery loses power or it becomes
disconnected prior to deployment.
The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light
in the instrument panel for approximately
four to eight seconds for a self-check when
the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position. After the self-check, the Air Bag
Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it
turns on the Air Bag Warning Light, either
momentarily or continuously. A single chime
will sound to alert you if the light comes on
again after initial startup.
The ORC also includes diagnostics that will
illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag
Warning Light if a malfunction is detected
that could affect the air bag system. The
diagnostics also record the nature of the
malfunction. While the air bag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the
following occurs, have an authorized dealer
service the air bag system immediately.
• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come
on during the four to eight seconds when
the ignition switch is first in the ON/RUN
position.
• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after
the four to eight-second interval.
• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-
mittently or remains on while driving.
NOTE:
If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en-
gine related gauges are not working, the Oc-
cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also
be disabled. In this condition the air bags
may not be ready to inflate for your protec-
tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
WARNING!
Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your
instrument panel could mean you won’t
have the air bag system to protect you in a
collision. If the light does not come on as a
bulb check when the ignition is first turned
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if
it comes on as you drive, have an autho-
rized dealer service the air bag system
immediately.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is
detected, which could affect the Supplemen-
tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant
Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the
113
instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light will stay on until the fault is
cleared. In addition, a single chime will
sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light has come on and a fault has
been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag
Warning Light comes on intermittently or
remains on while driving have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle immediately.
For additional information regarding the Re-
dundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” section
of this manual.
Front Air Bags
This vehicle has front air bags and lap/
shoulder belts for both the driver and front
passenger. The front air bags are a supple-
ment to the seat belt restraint systems. The
driver front air bag is mounted in the center
of the steering wheel. The passenger front air
bag is mounted in the instrument panel,
above the glove compartment. The words
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed
on the air bag covers.
WARNING!
• Being too close to the steering wheel or
instrument panel during front air bag
WARNING!
deployment could cause serious injury,
including death. Air bags need room to
inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending
your arms to reach the steering wheel or
instrument panel.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features
The Advanced Front Air Bag system has mul-
tistage driver and front passenger air bags.
This system provides output appropriate to
the severity and type of collision as deter-
mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC), which may receive information from
the front impact sensors (if equipped) or
other system components.
Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster
Locations
1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air
Bags
2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact
Bolsters
SAFETY
114
The first stage inflator is triggered immedi-
ately during an impact that requires air bag
deployment. A low energy output is used in
less severe collisions. A higher energy output
is used for more severe collisions.
This vehicle may be equipped with a driver
and/or front passenger seat belt buckle
switch that detects whether the driver or front
passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt
buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags.
This vehicle may be equipped with driver
and/or front passenger seat track position
sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of
the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat
position.
This vehicle has an Occupant Classification
System (“OCS”) in the front passenger seat.
The OCS is designed to activate or deactivate
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag de-
pending on the occupant’s seated weight.
It is designed to deactivate the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag for an unoccupied
seat and for occupants whose seated weight
classifies them in a category other than a
properly seated adult. This could be a child,
teenager, or even an adult.
The Passenger Air Bag Disable (“PAD”) Indi-
cator Light (an amber light located on the
overhead sports bar) tells the driver and front
passenger when the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. The PAD Indi-
cator Light illuminates the words “PASSEN-
GER AIR BAG OFF” to show that the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy
during a collision.
NOTE:
When the front passenger seat is empty or
when very light objects are placed on the
seat, the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
will not deploy even though the Passenger Air
Bag Disable (PAD) System Indicator Light is
NOT illuminated.
WARNING!
• No objects should be placed over or near
the air bag on the instrument panel or
steering wheel because any such objects
could cause harm if the vehicle is in a
collision severe enough to cause the air
bag to inflate.
• Do not put anything on or around the air
bag covers or attempt to open them
manually. You may damage the air bags
and you could be injured because the air
bags may no longer be functional. The
protective covers for the air bag cushions
are designed to open only when the air
bags are inflating.
• Relying on the air bags alone could lead
to more severe injuries in a collision. The
air bags work with your seat belt to
restrain you properly. In some collisions,
air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear
your seat belts even though you have air
bags.
115
Front Air Bag Operation
Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-
tional protection by supplementing the seat
belts. Front air bags are not expected to
reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or
rollover collisions. The front air bags will not
deploy in all frontal collisions, including
some that may produce substantial vehicle
damage — for example, some pole collisions,
truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.
On the other hand, depending on the type
and location of impact, front air bags may
deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end
damage but that produce a severe initial
deceleration.
Because air bag sensors measure vehicle
deceleration over time, vehicle speed and
damage by themselves are not good indica-
tors of whether or not an air bag should have
deployed.
Seat belts are necessary for your protection in
all collisions, and also are needed to help
keep you in position, away from an inflating
air bag.
When the ORC detects a collision requiring
the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.
A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated
to inflate the front air bags.
The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel
separate and fold out of the way as the air
bags inflate to their full size. The front air
bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to
blink your eyes. The front air bags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the
driver and front passenger.
Occupant Classification System (OCS) —
Front Passenger Seat
The OCS is part of a Federally regulated
safety system for this vehicle. It is designed
to activate or deactivate the Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag depending on the occu-
pant’s seated weight. It is designed to deac-
tivate the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
for an unoccupied seat and for occupants
whose seated weight classifies them in a
category other than a properly seated adult.
This could be a child, teenager, or even an
adult.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS)
Consists Of The Following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Occupant Classification Module (OCM) and
Sensor located in the front passenger seat
• Passenger Air Bag Disabled (PAD) Indicator
Light – an amber light located on the over-
head sports bar
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Passenger Seat Belt
Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
And Sensor
The Occupant Classification Module (OCM)
is located underneath the front passenger
seat. The Sensor is located beneath the pas-
senger seat cushion foam. Any weight on the
seat will be sensed by the Sensor. The OCM
uses input from the Sensor to determine the
front passenger’s most probable classifica-
tion. The OCM communicates this informa-
tion to the ORC. The ORC uses the classifi-
cation to determine whether it should
activate or deactivate the Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag.
SAFETY
116
In order for the OCS to operate as designed, it
is important for the front passenger to be
seated properly and properly wearing the seat
belt. Properly seated passengers are:
• Sitting upright.
• Facing forward.
• Sitting in the center of the seat with their
feet comfortably on or near the floor.
• Sitting with their back against the seat back
and the seat back in an upright position.
The OCS may deactivate the deployment of
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag if the
OCS estimates that:
• The front passenger seat is unoccupied or
has very light objects in it.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a
rear-facing child restraint.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a
child, including a child seated in a forward-
facing child restraint or booster seat.
• The front passenger seat is occupied by a
small passenger, including a child or small
adult.
• The front passenger is not properly seated
or his or her weight is taken off of the seat
for a period of time.
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front
Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Front
Passenger
Advanced Air
Bag Disabled
Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
Front
Passenger
Air Bag
Status
Unoccupied
seat*
Unbuckled
NOT
ILLUMI-
NATED
DEACTI-
VATED
Unoccupied
seat*
Buckled
“PASSEN-
GER AIR
BAG OFF”
DEACTI-
VATED
Grocery bags,
heavy brief-
cases, and
other
relatively
light objects
“PASSEN-
GER AIR
BAG OFF”
DEACTI-
VATED
Rear-facing
child
restraint**
“PASSEN-
GER AIR
BAG OFF”
DEACTI-
VATED
Seated Properly
117
Passenger Air Bag Disable (PAD) System
Front
Passenger
Seat Occupant
Status
Front
Passenger
Advanced Air
Bag Disabled
Indicator Light
(“PAD”) Status
Front
Passenger
Air Bag
Status
Child,
including
a child in a
forward-
facing child
restraint or
booster
seat**
“PASSEN-
GER AIR
BAG OFF”
DEACTI-
VATED
Small adult “PASSEN-
GER AIR
BAG OFF”
DEACTI-
VATED
Properly
seated adult
NOT
ILLUMI-
NATED
ACTIVATED
* When the front passenger seat is empty or
when very light objects are placed on the seat
and the seat belt is unbuckled, the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag will not deploy even
though the PAD System Indicator Light is
NOT illuminated.
** It is possible for a child to be classified as
an adult, allowing the deployment of the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag. Never
allow children to ride in the front passenger
seat and never install a child restraint sys-
tem, including a rear-facing child restraint, in
the front passenger seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Disabled
(PAD) Indicator Light
The Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag Dis-
abled (PAD) Indicator Light (an amber light
located on the overhead sports bar) tells the
driver and front passenger when the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated.
The PAD Indicator light illuminates the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” to show that
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will
not deploy during a collision. When the front
passenger seat is empty or when very light
objects are placed on the seat and the seat
belt is unbuckled, the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag will not deploy even though the
PAD indicator light is NOT illuminated.
The PAD indicator light should not be illumi-
nated when an adult passenger is properly
seated in the front passenger seat. The driver
and adult passenger should verify that the
PAD Indicator Light is not illuminated when
an adult is riding in the front passenger seat.
If an adult is not seated properly, the Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag may deactivate
and the PAD Indicator Light will be illumi-
nated.
The PAD Indicator Light should be illumi-
nated and the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag should be deactivated for most properly
seated and restrained children in the passen-
ger seat and for most properly installed child
restraint systems.
SAFETY
118
However, under certain conditions, even with
a properly installed child restraint system,
the PAD Indicator Light may not be illumi-
nated, even though the Passenger Advanced
Front Air Bag is deactivated. This can occur if
the child restraint is lighter than the lightest
weight necessary to illuminate the PAD Indi-
cator Light. NEVER assume the Passenger
Advanced Front Air Bag is deactivated unless
the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF.”
NOTE:
If the seat belt is buckled for an empty seat,
the PAD Indicator Light will illuminate.
If The PAD Indicator Light Is Illuminated For
An Adult Passenger:
If an adult passenger is seated in the front
passenger seat and the PAD Indicator Light is
illuminated, the passenger may be sitting
improperly.
Follow the steps below to allow the OCS to
detect the adult passenger’s seated weight to
activate the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag:
1. Turn off the vehicle and have the adult
passenger step out of the vehicle.
2. Remove any extra materials from the pas-
senger seat, such as cushions, pads, seat
covers, seat massagers, blankets, extra
clothing, etc.
3. Place the seatback in the full upright
position.
4. Have the adult passenger sit in the center
of the seat, with the passenger’s feet com-
fortably on or near the floor, and with their
back against the seatback.
5. Restart the vehicle and have the passen-
ger remain in this seated position for two
to three minutes after restarting the
vehicle.
WARNING!
• If the PAD Indicator Light remains illu-
minated for an adult passenger, have an
authorized dealer service the air bag
system immediately. Failure to do so
may cause serious injury or death. If the
PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with
the words "PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF,"
the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
will not deploy in the event of a collision.
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Never install a rear-facing child restraint
in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a
rear-facing child restraint in the rear
seat. If the vehicle does not have a rear
seat, do not transport a rear-facing child
restraint in that vehicle.
• Children 12 years or younger should al-
ways ride buckled up in the rear seat of a
vehicle with a rear seat.
119
Lighter Weight Passengers
(Including Small Adults)
When a lighter weight passenger, including a
small adult, occupies the passenger seat, the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag may be
deactivated. Therefore, the Passenger Ad-
vanced Front Air Bag may or may not be
activated for a lighter weight passenger, in-
cluding a small adult (depending on size)
who is seated in the passenger seat. This
does not mean that the OCS is working im-
properly.
The driver and passenger must always use the
PAD Indicator Light as a determination of
whether the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag is activated or deactivated. If the PAD
Indicator Light is illuminated with the words
“PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” when an adult
is in the front passenger seat, have the pas-
senger reposition his or her body in the seat
until the PAD Indicator Light goes out.
If the PAD Indicator Light is illuminated with
the words “PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF” the
Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag will not
inflate in the event of a collision.
Do Not Decrease OR Increase The Front
Passenger’s Seated Weight On The Front
Passenger Seat
The front passenger’s seated weight must be
properly positioned on the front passenger
seat. Failure to do so may result in serious
injury or death. The OCS determines the most
probable classification of the occupant that it
detects. The OCS will detect the front pas-
senger’s decreased or increased seated
weight, which may result in deactivation or
activation of the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag in a collision. This does not mean that
the OCS is working improperly. Decreasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in deactiva-
tion of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag
causing serious injury or death. Increasing
the front passenger’s seated weight on the
front passenger seat may result in activation
of the Passenger Advanced Front Air Bag.
Examples of improper front passenger seat-
ing include:
• The front passenger’s weight is transferred
to another part of the vehicle (like the door,
arm rest or instrument panel).
• The front passenger leans forward, side-
ways, or turns to face the rear of the ve-
hicle.
• The front passenger’s seatback is not in the
full upright position.
• The front passenger carries or holds an
object while seated (e.g., backpack, box,
etc.).
• Objects are lodged under the front passen-
ger seat.
• Objects are lodged between the front pas-
senger seat and center console.
• Accessories that may change the seated
weight on the front passenger seat are at-
tached to the front passenger seat.
• Anything that may decrease or increase the
front passenger’s seated weight.
The OCS determines the front passenger’s
most probable classification. If an occupant
in the front passenger seat is seated improp-
erly, the occupant may provide an output
signal to the OCS that is different from the
occupant’s properly seated weight input, for
example:
SAFETY
120
WARNING!
• If a child restraint system, child, small
teenager or adult in the front passenger
seat is seated improperly, the occupant
may provide an output signal to the OCS
that is different from the occupant’s
properly seated weight input. This may
result in serious injury or death in a
collision.
• Always wear your seat belt and sit prop-
erly, with the seatback in an upright
position, your back against the seat-
back, sitting upright, facing forward, in
the center of the seat, with your feet
comfortably on or near the floor.
• Do not carry or hold any objects (e.g.,
backpacks, boxes, etc.) while seated in
the front passenger seat. Holding an
object may provide an output signal to
the OCS that is different than the occu-
pant’s properly seated weight input,
which may result in serious injury or
death in a collision.
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
Not Seated Properly
121
The Air Bag Warning Light
will illuminate
whenever the OCS is unable to classify the
front passenger seat status.
A malfunction in the OCS may affect the
operation of the air bag system. If the Air Bag
Warning Light
does not come on, or stays
on after you start the vehicle, or it comes on
as you drive, take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in
your instrument panel could mean you
won’t have the air bags to protect you in
a collision. If the light does not come on
as a bulb check when the ignition is first
turned on, stays on after you start the
vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive,
have an authorized dealer service the air
bag system immediately.
• Placing an object on the floor under the
front passenger seat may prevent the
OCS from working properly, which may
result in serious injury or death in a
WARNING!
collision. Do not place any objects on
the floor under the front passenger seat.
• If there is a fault present in the OCS,
both the PAD Indicator Light and the Air
Bag Warning Light will illuminate to
show that the Passenger Advanced Front
Air Bag is deactivated. Should this oc-
cur, the Passenger Advanced Front Air
Bag will remain deactivated until the
fault is cleared. This indicates that you
should take the vehicle to an authorized
dealer for service immediately.
The passenger seat assembly contains criti-
cal OCS components that may affect Passen-
ger Advanced Front Air Bag inflation. In order
for the OCS to properly classify the seated
weight of a front seat passenger, the OCS
components must function as designed. Do
not make any modifications to the front pas-
senger seat components, assembly, or to the
seat cover. If the seat, trim cover, or cushion
needs service for any reason, take the vehicle
to an authorized dealer. Only FCA US LLC
approved seat accessories may be used.
The following requirements must be strictly
followed:
• Do not modify the front passenger seat
assembly or components in any way.
• Do not use prior or future model year seat
covers or cushions not designated by FCA
US LLC for the specific model being re-
paired. Always use the correct seat cover
and cushion specified for the vehicle.
• Do not replace the seat cover or cushion
with an aftermarket seat cover or cushion.
• Do not add a secondary seat cover or mat.
• At no time should any Supplemental Re-
straint System (SRS) component or SRS
related component or fastener be modified
or replaced with any part except those
which are approved by FCA US LLC.
WARNING!
• Unapproved modifications or service
procedures to the passenger seat assem-
bly, its related components, seat cover,
or cushion may inadvertently change the
air bag deployment in case of a frontal
SAFETY
122
WARNING!
collision. This could result in death or
serious injury to the front passenger if
the vehicle is involved in a collision. A
modified vehicle may not comply with
required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standards (FMVSS) and/or Canadian
Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (CM-
VSS).
• If it is necessary to modify the air bag
system for persons with disabilities,
contact your authorized dealer.
Knee Impact Bolsters
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the
knees of the driver and front passenger, and
position the front occupants for improved
interaction with the front air bags.
WARNING!
• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee
impact bolsters in any way.
WARNING!
• Do not mount any accessories to the
knee impact bolsters such as alarm
lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.
Supplemental Side Air Bags
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs)
This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental
Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).
Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags
(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the
front seats. The SABs are marked with a
“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on
the seat trim on the outboard side of the
seats.
The SABs may help to reduce the risk of
occupant injury during certain side impacts,
in addition to the injury reduction potential
provided by the seat belts and body structure.
When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on
the outboard side of the seatback’s trim
cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the
seat seam into the space between the occu-
pant and the door. The SAB moves at a very
high speed and with such a high force that it
could injure occupants if they are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area
where the SAB inflates. Children are at an
even greater risk of injury from a deploying air
bag.
Supplemental Seat-Mounted
Side Air Bag Label
123
WARNING!
Do not use accessory seat covers or place
objects between you and the Side Air
Bags; the performance could be adversely
affected and/or objects could be pushed
into you, causing serious injury.
Side Impacts
The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in
certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint
Controller (ORC) determines whether the de-
ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular
impact event is appropriate, based on the
severity and type of collision. The side impact
sensors aid the ORC in determining the ap-
propriate response to impact events. The
system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air
Bags on the impact side of the vehicle during
impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant
protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags
deploy independently; a left side impact de-
ploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-
side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags
only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good
indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags
should have deployed.
The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side
collisions, including some collisions at cer-
tain angles, or some side collisions that do
not impact the area of the passenger com-
partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy
during angled or offset frontal collisions
where the front air bags deploy.
Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat
belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in
less time than it takes to blink your eyes.
WARNING!
• Occupants, including children, who are
up against or very close to Side Air Bags
can be seriously injured or killed. Occu-
pants, including children, should never
lean on or sleep against the door, side
windows, or area where the side air bags
inflate, even if they are in an infant or
child restraint.
• Seat belts (and child restraints where
appropriate) are necessary for your pro-
tection in all collisions. They also help
keep you in position, away from an in-
flating Side Air Bag. To get the best
WARNING!
protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-
pants must wear their seat belts properly
and sit upright with their backs against
the seats. Children must be properly
restrained in a child restraint or booster
seat that is appropriate for the size of the
child.
WARNING!
• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do
not lean against the door or window. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
• Being too close to the Side Air Bags
during deployment could cause you to
be severely injured or killed.
• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could
lead to more severe injuries in a colli-
sion. The Side Air Bags work with your
seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t
deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt
even though you have Side Air Bags.
SAFETY
124
NOTE:
Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air bag
deployment.
Air Bag System Components
NOTE:
The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
monitors the internal circuits and intercon-
necting wiring associated with electrical Air
Bag System Components listed below:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Air Bag Warning Light
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags
• Seat Belt Buckle Switch
• Supplemental Side Air Bags
• Front and Side Impact Sensors
• Seat Belt Pretensioners
• Seat Track Position Sensors
• Occupant Classification System
If A Deployment Occurs
The front air bags are designed to deflate
immediately after deployment.
NOTE:
Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all
collisions. This does not mean something is
wrong with the air bag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the
air bags, any or all of the following may occur:
• The air bag material may sometimes cause
abrasions and/or skin reddening to the oc-
cupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.
The abrasions are similar to friction rope
burns or those you might get sliding along a
carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not
caused by contact with chemicals. They are
not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly
within a few days, or if you have any blis-
tering, see your doctor immediately.
• As the air bags deflate, you may see some
smoke-like particles. The particles are a
normal by-product of the process that gen-
erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag
inflation. These airborne particles may irri-
tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you
have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area
with cool water. For nose or throat irritation,
move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on
your clothing, follow the garment manufac-
turer’s instructions for cleaning.
Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags
have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the air bags will not be in place to
protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed air bags and seat belt preten-
sioners cannot protect you in another col-
lision. Have the air bags, seat belt preten-
sioners, and the seat belt retractor
assemblies replaced by an authorized
dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu-
pant Restraint Controller System serviced
as well.
NOTE:
• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the
interior trim, but they will open during air
bag deployment.
125
• After any collision, the vehicle should be
taken to an authorized dealer immediately.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact, if the communica-
tion network remains intact, and the power
remains intact, depending on the nature of
the event, the ORC will determine whether to
have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-
tem perform the following functions:
• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)
• Cut off battery power to the electric motor
(If Equipped)
• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery
has power
• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on
as long as the battery has power or for 15
minutes from the intervention of the En-
hanced Accident Response System.
• Unlock the power door locks.
Your vehicle may also be designed to perform
any of these other functions in response to
the Enhanced Accident Response System:
• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the
HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circu-
lation Door
• Cut off battery power to the:
– Engine
– Electric Motor (if equipped)
– Electric power steering
– Brake booster
– Electric park brake
– Automatic transmission gear selector
– Horn
– Front wiper
– Headlamp washer pump
NOTE:
After an accident, remember to cycle the
ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position
and remove the key from the ignition switch
to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check
the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine com-
partment and on the ground near the engine
compartment and fuel tank before resetting
the system and starting the engine. If there
are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle
electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an
accident, reset the system by following the
procedure described below. If you have any
doubt, contact an authorized dealer.
Enhanced Accident Response System
Reset Procedure
In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Re-
sponse System functions after an event, the
ignition switch must be changed from igni-
tion START or ON/RUN to ignition OFF. Care-
fully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the
engine compartment and on the ground near
the engine compartment and fuel tank before
resetting the system and starting the engine.
SAFETY
126
Maintaining Your Air Bag System
WARNING!
•
Modifications to any part of the air bag
system could cause it to fail when you need
it. You could be injured if the air bag
system is not there to protect you. Do not
modify the components or wiring, includ-
ing adding any kind of badges or stickers to
the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument
panel. Do not modify the front bumper,
vehicle body structure, or add aftermarket
side steps or running boards.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of
the air bag system yourself. Be sure to
tell anyone who works on your vehicle
that it has an air bag system.
• Do not attempt to modify any part of your
air bag system. The air bag may inflate
accidentally or may not function prop-
erly if modifications are made. Take your
vehicle to an authorized dealer for any
air bag system service. If your seat, in-
cluding your trim cover and cushion,
needs to be serviced in any way (includ-
WARNING!
ing removal or loosening/tightening of
seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle
to an authorized dealer. Only manufac-
turer approved seat accessories may be
used. If it is necessary to modify the air
bag system for persons with disabilities,
contact an authorized dealer.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like
situations, such as an air bag deployment or
hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-
formed. The EDR is designed to record data
related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys-
tems for a short period of time, typically
30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle were
operating;
• Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing
the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
• How fast the vehicle was traveling.
These data can help provide a better under-
standing of the circumstances in which
crashes and injuries occur.
NOTE:
EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a
non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are
recorded by the EDR under normal driving con-
ditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gen-
der, age, and crash location) are recorded. How-
ever, other parties, such as law enforcement,
could combine the EDR data with the type of
personally identifying data routinely acquired
during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special
equipment is required, and access to the
vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have the special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
127
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled
up at all times, including babies and chil-
dren. Every state in the United States, and
every Canadian province, requires that small
children ride in proper restraint systems. This
is the law, and you can be prosecuted for
ignoring it.
Children 12 years or younger should ride
properly buckled up in a rear seat, if avail-
able. According to crash statistics, children
are safer when properly restrained in the rear
seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child can
become a projectile inside the vehicle.
The force required to hold even an infant
on your lap could become so great that you
could not hold the child, no matter how
strong you are. The child and others could
be badly injured or killed. Any child riding
in your vehicle should be in a proper re-
straint for the child’s size.
There are different sizes and types of re-
straints for children from newborn size to the
child almost large enough for an adult safety
belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s
Manual to make sure you have the correct
seat for your child. Carefully read and follow
all the instructions and warnings in the child
restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the la-
bels attached to the child restraint.
Before buying any restraint system, make
sure that it has a label certifying that it meets
all applicable Safety Standards. You should
also make sure that you can install it in the
vehicle where you will use it.
NOTE:
• For additional information, refer to
http://www.nhtsa.gov/parents-and-
caregivers or call: 1–888–327–4236
• Canadian residents should refer to
Transport Canada’s website for
additional information:
http://www.tc.gc.ca/ eng/
motorvehiclesafety/
safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm
SAFETY
128
Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint
Infants and Toddlers
Children who are two years old or younger
and who have not reached the height or
weight limits of their child restraint
Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible
Child Restraint, facing rearward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Small Children
Children who are at least two years old or who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of
their rear-facing child restraint
Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a
five-point Harness, facing forward in the
rear seat of the vehicle
Larger Children
Children who have outgrown their forward-
facing child restraint, but are too small to
properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt
Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle
seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle
Children Too Large for Child Restraints
Children 12 years old or younger, who
have outgrown the height or weight limit of
their booster seat
Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat
of the vehicle
Infant And Child Restraints
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two
years old or until they reach either the height
or weight limit of their rear-facing child re-
straint. Two types of child restraints can be
used rear-facing: infant carriers and convert-
ible child seats.
The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in
the vehicle. It is recommended for children
from birth until they reach the weight or
height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible
child seats can be used either rear-facing or
forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible
child seats often have a higher weight limit in
the rear-facing direction than infant carriers
do, so they can be used rear-facing by chil-
dren who have outgrown their infant carrier
but are still less than at least two years old.
Children should remain rear-facing until they
reach the highest weight or height allowed by
their convertible child seat.
WARNING!
• Never place a rear-facing child restraint
in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-
senger front air bag can cause death or
serious injury to a child 12 years or
younger, including a child in a rear-
facing child restraint.
• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in
the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.
129
Older Children And Child Restraints
Children who are two years old or who have
outgrown their rear-facing convertible child
seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.
Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direc-
tion are for children who are over two years
old or who have outgrown the rear-facing
weight or height limit of their rear-facing
convertible child seat. Children should re-
main in a forward-facing child seat with a
harness for as long as possible, up to the
highest weight or height allowed by the child
seat.
All children whose weight or height is above
the forward-facing limit for the child seat
should use a belt-positioning booster seat
until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If
the child cannot sit with knees bent over the
vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back
is against the seatback, they should use a
belt-positioning booster seat. The child and
belt-positioning booster seat are held in the
vehicle by the seat belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure
of an infant or child restraint. It could
come loose in a collision. The child
could be badly injured or killed. Follow
the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-
tions exactly when installing an infant or
child restraint.
• After a child restraint is installed in the
vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat
forward or rearward because it can
loosen the child restraint attachments.
Remove the child restraint before ad-
justing the vehicle seat position. When
the vehicle seat has been adjusted, re-
install the child restraint.
• When your child restraint is not in use,
secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt
or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from
the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the
vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it
could strike the occupants or seatbacks
and cause serious personal injury.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the
shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are
long enough to bend over the front of the seat
when their back is against the seatback,
should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use
this simple 5-step test to decide whether the
child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:
1. Can the child sit all the way back against
the back of the vehicle seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably
over the front of the vehicle seat – while
the child is still sitting all the way back?
3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s
shoulder between their neck and arm?
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as
possible, touching the child’s thighs and
not the stomach?
5. Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
If the answer to any of these questions was
“no,” then the child still needs to use a
booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is
using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt
fit periodically and make sure the seat belt
SAFETY
130
buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position. If
the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,
move the child closer to the center of the
vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the
seat belt on the child correctly.
WARNING!
Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt
under an arm or behind their back. In a
crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a
child properly, which may result in serious
injury or death. A child must always wear
both the lap and shoulder portions of the
seat belt correctly.
Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Restraint Type Combined Weight of the
Child + Child Restraint
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below
LATCH – Lower
Anchors Only
Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors
+ Top Tether Anchor
Seat Belt + Top
Tether Anchor
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
XX
Rear-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
Up to
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
XX
Forward-Facing
Child Restraint
More than
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
X
131
Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren
(LATCH) Restraint System
Your vehicle is equipped with the child re-
straint anchorage system called LATCH,
which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers
for CHildren. The LATCH system has three
vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-
equipped child seats. There are two lower
anchorages located at the back of the seat
cushion where it meets the seatback and one
top tether anchorage located behind the seat-
ing position.
These anchorages are used to install LATCH-
equipped child seats without using the vehi-
cle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may
have a top tether anchorage but no lower
anchorages. In these seating positions, the
seat belt must be used with the top tether
anchorage to install the child restraint.
Please see the following table for more infor-
mation.
LATCH Label
SAFETY
132
LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
LATCH anchorage system to attach
the child restraint?
65 lbs (29.5 kg)
Use the LATCH anchorage system until the
combined weight of the child and the child
restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt
and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system
once the combined weight is more than
65 lbs (29.5 kg).
LATCH Positions (Two-Door Models)
— Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating
Position)
— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
LATCH Positions (Four-Door Models)
— Lower Anchorage Symbol
(2 Anchorages Per Seating
Position)
— Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
133
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH
Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt
be used together to attach a rear-facing or
forward-facing child restraint?
No
Do not use the seat belt when you use the
LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-
facing or forward-facing child restraint.
Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH
anchorages if allowed by the booster seat
manufacturer. See your booster seat
owner’s manual for more information.
Can a child seat be installed in the
center position using the inner LATCH
lower anchorages?
Two Door Models- No
Four Door Only: You can install child restraints
with flexible lower anchors in the center
position. The inner anchorages are 18.5 inches
(484 mm) apart. Do not install child restraints
with rigid lower anchors in the center position.
Can two child restraints be attached using a
common lower LATCH anchorage?
No
Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or
more child restraints. If the center position
does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor-
ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in
the center position next to a child seat using
the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
The child seat may touch the back of the
front passenger seat if the child restraint
manufacturer also allows contact.
See your child restraint owner’s manual
for more information.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models — No
Four Door Models — Yes
Two Door Models — None
Four Door Models — Center Only
SAFETY
134
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded
and the child seat installed in front of it
(Two-Door Models).
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in
its upright position when the seat is to be
used by an occupant who is not in a child
restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head
restraint in its lowered position could re-
sult in serious injury or death in a collision.
Locating The LATCH Anchorages
The lower anchorages are round bars
that are found at the rear of the seat cushion
where it meets the seatback, below the an-
chorage symbols on the seatback. They are
just visible when you lean into the rear seat to
install the child restraint. You will easily feel
them if you run your finger along the gap
between the seatback and seat cushion.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
LATCH Anchorages
(Two-Door Models)
135
Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages
Two-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat, near the floor.
Four-Door Models:
There are tether strap anchorages behind
each rear seating position located on the
back of the seat.
LATCH Anchorages
(Four-Door Models)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Two-Door Models)
Tether Strap Anchorages
(Four-Door Models)
SAFETY
136
LATCH-compatible child restraint systems
will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible
strap on each side. Each will have a hook or
connector to attach to the lower anchorage
and a way to tighten the connection to the
anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints
and some rear-facing child restraints will also
be equipped with a tether strap. The tether
strap will have a hook at the end to attach to
the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten
the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.
Center Seat LATCH
Two-Door Models:
WARNING!
This vehicle does not have a center seating
position. Do not use the center lower
LATCH anchorages to install a child seat in
the center of the back seat.
Four-Door Models:
Do not install child restraints with rigid lower
attachments in the center seating position.
Only install this type of child restraint in the
outboard seating positions. Child restraints
with flexible, webbing mounted lower attach-
ments can be installed in any rear seating
position.
WARNING!
Never use the same lower anchorage to
attach more than one child restraint. If you
are installing LATCH-compatible child re-
straints next to each other, you must use
the seat belt for the center position. You
can then use either the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for installing child
seats in the outboard positions. Please
refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint System” for typical instal-
lation instructions.
Always follow the directions of the child re-
straint manufacturer when installing your child
restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be
installed as described here.
To Install A LATCH-Compatible
Child Restraint
If the selected seating position has a Switch-
able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat
belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-
tions below. See the section “Installing Child
Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to
check what type of seat belt each seating
position has.
1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps
and on the tether strap of the child seat so
that you can more easily attach the hooks
or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.
2. Place the child seat between the lower
anchorages for that seating position. For
some second row seats, you may need to
recline the seat and / or raise the head
restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat
can be moved forward and rearward in the
vehicle, you may wish to move it to its
rear-most position to make room for the
child seat. You may also move the front
seat forward to allow more room for the
child seat.
137
3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of
the child restraint to the lower anchorages
in the selected seating position.
4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,
connect it to the top tether anchorage.
See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the
child restraint rearward and downward
into the seat. Remove slack in the straps
according to the child restraint manufac-
turer’s instructions.
6. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR
(ALR) Seat Belt:
When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat
belts that are not being used by other occu-
pants or being used to secure child restraints.
An unused belt could injure a child if they
play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt
retractor. Before installing a child restraint
using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt
behind the child restraint and out of the
child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-
feres with the child restraint installation,
instead of buckling it behind the child re-
straint, route the seat belt through the child
restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not
lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the
vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and
that they should not play with them.
WARNING!
• Improper installation of a child restraint
to the LATCH anchorages can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed. Follow the
child restraint manufacturer’s directions
exactly when installing an infant or child
restraint.
WARNING!
• Child restraint anchorages are designed
to withstand only those loads imposed
by correctly-fitted child restraints. Un-
der no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or
for attaching other items or equipment
to the vehicle.
Installing Child Restraints Using The
Vehicle Seat Belt
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to prop-
erly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufactur-
er’s directions exactly when installing an
infant or child restraint.
SAFETY
138
The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-
tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-
matic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is de-
signed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt
tight around the child restraint so that it is
not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR
retractor can be “switched” into a locked
mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the
retractor and then letting the webbing retract
back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR
will make a clicking noise while the webbing
is pulled back into the retractor.
Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” de-
scription in “Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractors (ALR)” under “Occupant Re-
straint Systems” for additional information
on ALR.
Please see the table below and the following
sections for more information.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing
Child Restraints In This Vehicle
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Two-Door Models)
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
Automatic Locking Retractor Locations
(Four-Door Models)
ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking
Retractor
Top Tether Anchorage Symbol
139
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts
What is the weight limit (child’s weight +
weight of the child restraint) for using the
Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a
forward facing child restraint?
Weight limit of the Child Restraint
Always use the tether anchor when using
the seat belt to install a forward facing
child restraint, up to the recommended
weight limit of the child restraint.
Can the rear-facing child restraint touch
the back of the front passenger seat?
Yes
Contact between the front passenger seat
and the child restraint is allowed, if the child
restraint manufacturer also allows contact.
Can the head restraints be removed?
Two Door Models — No
Four Door Models — Yes
TwoDoor—None
Four Door — Center Only
Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten
the seat belt against the belt path of the
child restraint?
No
Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating
position with an ALR retractor.
NOTE:
If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint
interferes with the installation of the child
restraint, the head restraint may be folded
and the child seat installed in front of it
(Two-Door Models).
WARNING!
Always make sure the head restraint is in
its upright position when the seat is to be
used by an occupant who is not in a child
restraint. Sitting in a seat with the head
restraint in its lowered position could re-
sult in serious injury or death in a collision.
SAFETY
140
Installing A Child Restraint With A
Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor
(ALR):
Child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap
belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.
WARNING!
• Improper installation or failure to prop-
erly secure a child restraint can lead to
failure of the restraint. The child could
be badly injured or killed.
• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s
directions exactly when installing an in-
fant or child restraint.
1. Place the child seat in the center of the
seating position. For some second row
seats, you may need to recline the seat
and/or raise the head restraint to get a
better fit. If the rear seat can be moved
forward and rearward in the vehicle, you
may wish to move it to its rear-most posi-
tion to make room for the child seat. You
may also move the front seat forward to
allow more room for the child seat.
2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from
the retractor to pass it through the belt
path of the child restraint. Do not twist the
belt webbing in the belt path.
3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until
you hear a “click.”
4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap
portion tight against the child seat.
5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the
shoulder part of the belt until you have
pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the
retractor. Then, allow the webbing to re-
tract back into the retractor. As the web-
bing retracts, you will hear a clicking
sound. This means the seat belt is now in
the Automatic Locking mode.
6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.
If it is locked, you should not be able to
pull out any webbing. If the retractor is not
locked, repeat step 5.
7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion around the child
restraint while you push the child restraint
rearward and downward into the vehicle
seat.
Car Seat With Head Restraint Folded
1 — Folded Headrest
2 — Child Restraint
141
8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap
and the seating position has a top tether
anchorage, connect the tether strap to the
anchorage and tighten the tether strap.
See the section “Installing Child Re-
straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”
for directions to attach a tether anchor.
9. Test that the child restraint is installed
tightly by pulling back and forth on the
child seat at the belt path. It should not
move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any
direction.
Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so
check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if
necessary.
Installing Child Restraints Using The Top
Tether Anchorage
WARNING!
Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-
facing car seat to any location in front of
the car seat, including the seat frame or a
tether anchorage. Only attach the tether
strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether
anchorage that is approved for that seating
position, located behind the top of the
vehicle seat. See the section “Lower An-
chors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)
Restraint System” for the location of ap-
proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.
1. Look behind the seating position where
you plan to install the child restraint to
find the tether anchorage. You may need
to move the seat forward to provide better
access to the tether anchorage. If there is
no top tether anchorage for that seating
position, move the child restraint to an-
other position in the vehicle if one is
available.
SAFETY
142
2. Route the tether strap to provide the most
direct path for the strap between the an-
chor and the child seat. If your vehicle is
equipped with adjustable rear head re-
straints, raise the head restraint, and
where possible, route the tether strap un-
der the head restraint and between the
two posts. If not possible, lower the head
restraint and pass the tether strap around
the outboard side of the head restraint.
3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the top tether anchorage as
shown in the diagram.
4. Remove slack in the tether strap accord-
ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
WARNING!
• An incorrectly anchored tether strap
could lead to increased head motion and
possible injury to the child. Use only the
anchorage position directly behind the
child seat to secure a child restraint top
tether strap.
• If your vehicle is equipped with a split
rear seat, make sure the tether strap
does not slip into the opening between
the seatbacks as you remove slack in the
strap.
Center Tether Attachment — Four-Door
Without Center Armrest
1. Lower the adjustable center head restraint
to the full down position.
2. Attach the tether strap hook of the child
restraint to the center tether anchorage
located on the back of the seat.
3. Remove slack in the tether strap accord-
ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
Tether Strap Mounting (Two-Door Models)
Tether Strap Mounting
(Four-Door Models With Center Armrest)
143
Transporting Pets
Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm
your pet. An unrestrained pet will be thrown
about and possibly injured, or injure a passenger
during panic braking or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat (if
equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers
that are secured by seat belts.
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE
CARGO AREA.
WARNING!
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a
cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.
In a collision, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously
injured or killed.
WARNING!
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of
your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seat belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a
seat and using a seat belt properly.
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con-
tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is col-
orless and odorless. Breathing it can make
you unconscious and can eventually poi-
son you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow
these safety tips:
• Do not run the engine in a closed garage
or in confined areas any longer than
needed to move your vehicle in or out of
the area.
• If you are required to drive with the
trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make
sure that all windows are closed and the
climate control BLOWER switch is set at
WARNING!
high speed. DO NOT use the recircula-
tion mode.
• If it is necessary to sit in a parked
vehicle with the engine running, adjust
your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the
blower at high speed.
The best protection against carbon monoxide
entry into the vehicle body is a properly
maintained engine exhaust system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of
the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can
be detected inside the vehicle, or when the
underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent mechanic inspect the com-
plete exhaust system and adjacent body ar-
eas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or
mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose
connections could permit exhaust fumes to
seep into the passenger compartment. In
addition, inspect the exhaust system each
time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil
change. Replace as required.
SAFETY
144
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside
The Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the seat belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the sys-
tem.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced
after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies
must be replaced after a collision if they have
been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding
seat belt or retractor condition, replace the
seat belt.
Air Bag Warning Light
The Air Bag warning light will turn on for
four to eight seconds as a bulb check when
the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.
If the light is either not on during starting,
stays on, or turns on while driving, have the
system inspected at an authorized dealer as
soon as possible. This light will illuminate
with a single chime when a fault with the Air
Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will
stay on until the fault is removed. If the light
comes on intermittently or remains on while
driving, have an authorized dealer service the
vehicle immediately. Refer to “Occupant Re-
straint Systems” in “Safety” for further infor-
mation.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost
mode and place the blower control on high
speed. You should be able to feel the air
directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster
is inoperable.
Floor Mat Safety Information
Always use floor mats designed to fit your
vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not
interfere with the operation of the pedal as-
semblies. Only use a floor mat that is securely
attached using the floor mat fasteners so it
cannot slip out of position and interfere with
the pedal assemblies or impair safe operation
of your vehicle in other ways.
WARNING!
An improperly attached, damaged, folded,
or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat
fasteners may cause your floor mat to in-
terfere with the accelerator, brake, or
clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle
control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or
DEATH:
• ALWAYS securely attach
your floor
mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO
NOT install your floor mat upside down
or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to
confirm mat is secured using the floor
mat fasteners on a regular basis.
• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING
FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE
before installing any other floor mat.
NEVER install or stack an additional
floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.
• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit
your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat
that cannot be properly attached and
secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat
needs to be replaced, only use a FCA
approved floor mat for the specific
make, model, and year of your vehicle.
145
WARNING!
• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on
the driver’s side floor area. To check for
interference, with the vehicle properly
parked with the engine off, fully depress
the accelerator, the brake, and the
clutch pedal (if present) to check for
interference. If your floor mat interferes
with the operation of any pedal, or is not
secure to the floor, remove the floor mat
from the vehicle and place the floor mat
in your trunk.
• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat
on the passenger’s side floor area.
• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or
slide into the driver’s side floor area
when the vehicle is moving. Objects can
become trapped under accelerator,
brake, or clutch pedals and could cause
a loss of vehicle control.
•
NEVER place any objects under the floor
mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects
could change the position of the floor mat
and may cause interference with the accel-
erator, brake, or clutch pedals.
WARNING!
• If the vehicle carpet has been removed
and re-installed, always properly attach
carpet to the floor and check the floor
mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle
carpet. Fully depress each pedal to
check for interference with the accelera-
tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re-
install the floor mats.
• It is recommended to only use mild soap
and water to clean your floor mats. After
cleaning, always check your floor mat
has been properly installed and is se-
cured to your vehicle using the floor mat
fasteners by lightly pulling mat.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and
uneven wear patterns. Check for stones,
nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the
tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts
and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,
cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for
tightness. Check the tires (including spare)
for proper cold inflation pressure.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of brake
lights and exterior lights while you work the
controls. Check turn signal and high beam
indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for proper closing, latching, and lock-
ing.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight
parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid
leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or
if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The
cause should be located and corrected imme-
diately.
SAFETY
146
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING THE ENGINE .......149
Normal Starting ...............149
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS ........152
MANUAL TRANSMISSION —
IFEQUIPPED...............152
Shifting ....................153
Downshifting .................154
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION —
IFEQUIPPED...............156
Ignition Park Interlock ...........157
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System ....................157
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission . .157
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION................159
Four-Position Transfer Case ........159
Five-Position Transfer Case ........161
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped . . .164
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) —
Rubicon Models ..............164
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect —
If Equipped .................165
STOP/START SYSTEM —
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
(IFEQUIPPED)..............166
Automatic Mode ...............166
Possible Reasons The Engine
Does Not Autostop .............167
To Start The Engine While In
Autostop Mode ...............168
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System ....................168
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ....................169
System Malfunction ............169
STOP/START SYSTEM —
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(IFEQUIPPED)..............169
Automatic Mode ...............169
Possible Reasons The Engine
Does Not Autostop .............170
To Start The Engine While In
Autostop Mode................170
To Manually Turn Off The Start/Stop
System ....................171
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System ....................171
System Malfunction ............171
SPEED CONTROL ............172
To Activate ..................173
To Set A Desired Speed ..........173
To Vary The Speed Setting .........173
To Accelerate For Passing .........174
To Resume Speed .............174
To Deactivate ................174
PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —
IF EQUIPPED ...............174
ParkSense Sensors .............175
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . .175
ParkSense System Usage Precautions. .175
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP
CAMERA..................176
REFUELING THE VEHICLE .....178
Fuel Filler Cap ...............178
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message ......179
STARTING AND OPERATING
147
STARTING THE ENGINE
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,
adjust both inside and outside mirrors, and
fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always remove
the key fob from the ignition and lock
your vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.
•
Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle, or in a location accessible to chil-
dren. A child could operate power win-
dows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Do not leave children or animals inside
parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior
heat build-up may cause serious injury
or death.
Normal Starting
To Turn On The Engine Using The
ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. The transmission must be in PARK or
NEUTRAL.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal while
pushing the ENGINE START/STOP button
once.
3. The system takes over and attempts to
start the vehicle. If the vehicle fails to
start, the starter will disengage automati-
cally after 10 seconds.
4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the
engine prior to the engine starting, push
the button again.
NOTE:
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm
engine is obtained without pumping or press-
ing the accelerator pedal.
To Turn Off The Engine Using
ENGINE START/STOP Button
1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then
push and release the ENGINE START/
STOP button.
2. The ignition will return to the OFF mode.
3. If the gear selector is not in PARK (with
vehicle stopped) and the ENGINE START/
STOP button is pushed once, the trans-
mission will automatically select PARK
and the engine will turn off, however the
ignition will remain in the ACC mode (NOT
the OFF mode). Never leave a vehicle out
of the PARK position, or it could roll.
4. If the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, and
the vehicle speed is below 5 mph
(8 km/h), pushing the START/STOP but-
ton once will turn the engine off. The
ignition will remain in the ACC mode.
5. If the vehicle speed is above 5 mph
(8 km/h), the ENGINE START/STOP but-
ton must be held for two seconds (or three
short pushes in a row) to turn the engine
149
off. The ignition will remain in the ACC
mode (NOT the OFF mode) if the engine is
turned off when the transmission is not in
PARK.
NOTE:
The system will automatically time out and
the ignition will cycle to the OFF mode after
30 minutes of inactivity if the ignition is left
in the ACC or RUN (engine not running) mode
and the transmission is in PARK.
ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With
Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or
NEUTRAL Position)
The ENGINE START/STOP button operates
similar to an ignition switch. It has three
modes: OFF, ACC, and RUN. To change the
ignition modes without starting the vehicle
and use the accessories, follow these steps:
1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF
mode,
2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button
once to place the ignition to the ACC
mode (instrument cluster will display
“ACC”),
3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a
second time to place the ignition to the
RUN mode (instrument cluster will dis-
play “ON/RUN”),
4.
Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third
time to return the ignition to the OFF mode
(instrument cluster will display “OFF”).
AutoPark
AutoPark is a supplemental feature to assist
in placing the vehicle in PARK should the
situations on the following pages occur. It is a
back up system and should not be relied
upon as the primary method by which the
driver shifts the vehicle into PARK.
The conditions under which AutoPark will
engage are outlined on the following pages.
WARNING!
• Driver inattention could lead to failure to
place the vehicle in PARK. ALWAYS DO
A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle is in
PARK by verifying that a solid (not blink-
ing) “P” is indicated in the instrument
cluster display and on the gear selector.
WARNING!
If the "P" indicator is blinking, your ve-
hicle is not in PARK. As an added pre-
caution, always apply the parking brake
when exiting the vehicle.
• AutoPark is a supplemental feature. It is
not designed to replace the need to shift
your vehicle into PARK. It is a back up
system and should not be relied upon as
the primary method by which the driver
shifts the vehicle into PARK.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver turns
off the engine, the vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these con-
ditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
• Drivers door is ajar or in conditions where
driver door is removed an additional trigger
would be if the driver is off the seat (seat
pad sensor detects driver missing).
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Vehicle Speed is 0 mph (0 km/h)
• Ignition switched from RUN to OFF
STARTING AND OPERATING
150
NOTE:
For Keyless Go equipped vehicles, The en-
gine will turn off and the ignition switch will
change to ACC mode. After 30 minutes the
ignition switches to OFF automatically, un-
less the driver turns the ignition switch OFF.
If the vehicle is not in PARK and the driver exits
the vehicle with the engine running, the vehicle
may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage when all of these con-
ditions are met:
• Vehicle is equipped with an 8-speed trans-
mission
• Drivers door is ajar or in conditions where
driver door is removed an aditional trigger
would be if the driver is off the seat (seat
pad sensor detects driver missing).
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Driver’s door is removed
• Vehicle speed is 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) or less
• Driver’s seat belt is unbuckled
• Driver’s door is ajar
• Brake Pedal is not depressed
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Engaged Shift to P
then Shift to Gear” will display in the instru-
ment cluster.
NOTE:
In some cases the ParkSense graphic will be
displayed in the instrument cluster. In these
cases, the shifter must be returned to “P” to
select desired gear.
If the driver shifts into PARK while moving, the
vehicle may AutoPark.
AutoPark will engage ONLY when vehicle
speed is 1.2 mph (2.0 km/h) or less.
The MESSAGE “Vehicle Speed is Too High to
Shift to P” will be displayed in the instrument
cluster if vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(2.0 km/h).
WARNING!
If vehicle speed is above 1.2 mph
(2.0 km/h), the transmission will default to
NEUTRAL until the vehicle speed drops
below 1.2 mph (1.9 km/h). A vehicle left
in the NEUTRAL position can roll. As an
added precaution, always apply the park-
ing brake when exiting the vehicle.
4WD LOW
AutoPark will be disabled when operating the
vehicle in 4WD LOW.
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Disabled” will be
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Additional customer warnings will be given
when both of these conditions are met:
• Vehicle is not in PARK
• Driver’s Door is ajar
The MESSAGE “AutoPark Not Engaged” will
be displayed in the instrument cluster. A
warning chime will continue until you shift
the vehicle into PARK or the Driver’s Door is
closed.
ALWAYS DO A VISUAL CHECK that your vehicle
is in PARK by looking for the "P" in the
instrument cluster display and on the shifter.
As an added precaution, always apply the
parking brake when exiting the vehicle.
151
ENGINE BREAK-IN
RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the
engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle)
in your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles
(500 km). After the initial 60 miles
(100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or
90 km/h) are desirable.
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration
within the limits of local traffic laws contrib-
utes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle
acceleration in low gear can be detrimental
and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the
factory is a high-quality energy conserving
type lubricant. Oil changes should be consis-
tent with anticipated climate conditions un-
der which vehicle operations will occur. For
the recommended viscosity and quality
grades, refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in
“Technical Specifications”.
CAUTION!
Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight
Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may
result.
NOTE:
A new engine may consume some oil during
its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of
operation. This should be considered a nor-
mal part of the break-in and not interpreted
as a problem.
MANUAL TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave
the vehicle unattended without having the
parking brake fully applied. The parking
brake should always be applied when the
driver is not in the vehicle, especially on
an incline.
CAUTION!
• Never drive with your foot resting on the
clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the
vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged, as this will cause ab-
normal wear on the clutch.
• Do not drive with your hand resting on
the gear selector as the force exerted,
even if slight, could lead over time to
premature wear of the gearbox internal
components.
NOTE:
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transmis-
sion fluid warms up. This is normal.
STARTING AND OPERATING
152
To shift the gears, fully press the clutch pedal
and place the gear selector into the desired
gear position (the diagram for the engage-
ment of the gears is displayed on the handle
of the selector).
To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL
position, lift the REVERSE ring, located be-
low the knob and move the gear selector all
the way left and then forward.
Shifting
Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting
gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly
press the accelerator pedal.
You should always use first gear when starting
from a standing position.
NOTE:
A certain amount of noise from the transmis-
sion is normal. This noise can be most notice-
able when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL
with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal re-
leased), but it may also be heard when driv-
ing. The noise may also be more noticeable
when the transmission is warm. This noise is
normal and is not an indication of a problem
with your clutch or transmission.
Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds
To utilize your manual transmission effi-
ciently for both fuel economy and perfor-
mance, it should be upshifted as listed in
recommended shift speed chart. Shift at the
vehicle speeds listed for acceleration. When
heavily loaded or pulling a trailer these rec-
ommended up-shift speeds may not apply.
Manual Transmission Shifter
153
Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Engine Speeds 1to2 2to3 3to4 4to5 5to6
3.6L
Accel. 15 (24) 24 (39) 50 (80) 65 (104) 70 (112)
Cruise 10 (16) 19 (31) 40 (64) 55 (88) 65 (105)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are
for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L
would be significantly less.
Downshifting
Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear
is recommended to preserve brakes when
driving down steep hills. In addition, down-
shifting at the right time provides better ac-
celeration when you desire to resume speed.
Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to
avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.
NOTE:
Above certain speeds downshifts may be
blocked and not available.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip, and the ve-
hicle could skid.
CAUTION!
• Skipping gears and downshifting into
lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can
damage the engine and clutch systems,
Any attempt to shift into lower gear with
clutch pedal depressed may result dam-
age to the clutch system. Shifting into
lower gear and releasing the clutch may
result in engine damage.
CAUTION!
• When descending a hill, be very careful
to downshift one gear at a time to pre-
vent overspeeding the engine which can
cause engine damage, and/or clutch
damage, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed. If transfer case is in low range
the vehicle speeds to cause engine and
clutch damage are significantly lower.
• Failure to follow the maximum recom-
mended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine damage and/or damage the
clutch, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
• Descending a hill in low range with
clutch pedal depressed could result in
clutch damage.
STARTING AND OPERATING
154
Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds
CAUTION!
Failure to follow the maximum recom-
mended downshifting speeds may cause
the engine to overspeed and/or damage the
clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is
pressed.
Manual Transmission Downshift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)
Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1
Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)
NOTE:
Vehicle speeds shown in the chart above are
for 2H and 4H only, vehicle speeds in 4L
would be significantly less.
155
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION —
IF EQUIPPED
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the following precautions are not ob-
served:
• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE
only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,
NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is
above idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure
your foot is firmly pressing the brake
pedal.
NOTE:
You must press and hold the brake pedal
while shifting out of PARK.
WARNING!
• Never use the PARK position as a sub-
stitute for the parking brake. Always
apply the parking brake fully when exit-
ing the vehicle to guard against vehicle
movement and possible injury or dam-
age.
• Your vehicle could move and injure you
and others if it is not in PARK. Check by
trying to move the transmission gear
selector out of PARK with the brake
pedal released. Make sure the transmis-
sion is in PARK before exiting the ve-
hicle.
• The transmission may not engage PARK
if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the
vehicle to a complete stop before shift-
ing to PARK, and verify that the trans-
mission gear position indicator solidly
indicates PARK (P) without blinking.
Ensure that the vehicle is completely
stopped, and the PARK position is prop-
erly indicated, before exiting the ve-
hicle.
WARNING!
• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher
than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly
pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle
could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the
vehicle and hit someone or something.
Only shift into gear when the engine is
idling normally and your foot is firmly
pressing the brake pedal.
• Unintended movement of a vehicle
could injure those in or near the vehicle.
As with all vehicles, you should never
exit a vehicle while the engine is run-
ning. Before exiting a vehicle, always
come to a complete stop, then apply the
parking brake, shift the transmission
into PARK, and turn the ignition OFF.
When the ignition is in the OFF mode,
the transmission is locked in PARK, se-
curing the vehicle against unwanted
movement.
STARTING AND OPERATING
156
WARNING!
• When exiting the vehicle, always make
sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,
remove the key fob from the vehicle, and
lock the vehicle.
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,
or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-
attended is dangerous for a number of
reasons. A child or others could be seri-
ously or fatally injured. Children should
be warned not to touch the parking
brake, brake pedal or the transmission
gear selector.
• Do not leave the key fob in or near the
vehicle (or in a location accessible to
children), and do not leave the ignition
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child
could operate power windows, other
controls, or move the vehicle.
Ignition Park Interlock
This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park
Interlock which requires the transmission to
be in PARK before the ignition can be turned
to the OFF mode. This helps the driver avoid
inadvertently leaving the vehicle without
placing the transmission in PARK. This sys-
tem also locks the transmission in PARK
whenever the ignition is in the OFF mode.
NOTE:
The transmission is NOT locked in PARK
when the ignition is in the ACC mode (even
though the engine will be off). Ensure that
the transmission is in PARK, and the ignition
is OFF (not in ACC mode) before exiting the
vehicle.
Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock
System
This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans-
mission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that
holds the transmission gear selector in PARK
unless the brakes are applied. To shift the
transmission out of PARK, the engine must
be running and the brake pedal must be
pressed. The brake pedal must also be
pressed to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or
REVERSE when the vehicle is stopped or
moving at low speeds.
Eight–Speed Automatic Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with a fuel efficient
8 speed transmission. The gear selector is
located in the center console.
The transmission gear selector provides
PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE and
MANUAL (AutoStick) shift positions. Manual
shifts can be made using the AutoStick shift
control. Toggling the gear selector forward (-)
or rearward (+) while in the MANUAL
(AutoStick) position (beside the DRIVE posi-
Transmission Gear Selector
157
tion) will manually select the transmission
gear, and will display the current gear in the
instrument cluster. Refer to "AutoStick" in
this section for further information.
NOTE:
If the gear selector cannot be moved to the
PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position
(when pushed forward), it is probably in the
AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE
position). In AutoStick mode, the transmis-
sion gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to
the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for
access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.
AutoStick
AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission
feature providing manual shift control, giving
you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick
allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-
nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,
and improve overall vehicle performance.
This system can also provide you with more
control during passing, city driving, cold slip-
pery conditions, mountain driving, trailer
towing, and many other situations.
Operation
To activate AutoStick mode, move the gear
selector into the MANUAL (M) position (be-
side the DRIVE position). The current trans-
mission gear will be displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. In AutoStick mode, you can use
the gear selector (in the MANUAL position) to
manually shift the transmission. Tapping the
gear selector forward (-) while in the
MANUAL (M) position will downshift the
transmission to the next lower gear. Tapping
the selector rearward (+) will command an
upshift.
In AutoStick mode, the transmission will
shift up or down when (+/-) is manually se-
lected by the driver, unless an engine lugging
or overspeed condition would result. It will
remain in the selected gear until another
upshift or downshift is chosen, except as
described below.
• The transmission will automatically down-
shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine
lugging) and will display the current gear.
• The transmission will automatically down-
shift to first gear when coming to a stop.
After a stop, the driver should manually
upshift (+) the transmission as the vehicle
is accelerated.
•
You can start out, from a stop, in first or
second gear (or third gear, in 4LO range).
Tapping (+) (at a stop) will allow starting in
second gear. Starting out in second or third
gear can be helpful in snowy or icy conditions.
•
If a requested downshift would cause the
engine to over-speed, that shift will not occur.
• The system will ignore attempts to upshift
at too low of a vehicle speed.
• Holding the gear selector in the (-) position
will downshift the transmission to the low-
est gear possible at the current speed.
• Transmission shifting will be more notice-
able when AutoStick is enabled.
• The system may revert to automatic shift
mode if a fault or overheat condition is
detected.
NOTE:
When Hill Descent Control is enabled,
AutoStick is not active.
STARTING AND OPERATING
158
To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear
selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift
in or out of the AutoStick position at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING!
Do not downshift for additional engine
braking on a slippery surface. The drive
wheels could lose their grip and the ve-
hicle could skid, causing a collision or
personal injury.
FOUR–WHEEL DRIVE
OPERATION
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case dam-
age or loss of power and vehicle control.
You could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
Four-Position Transfer Case
The transfer case provides four mode posi-
tions:
• 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
• 4H (Four-Wheel Drive High Range)
• N (Neutral)
• 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2H
Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is
for normal street and highway driving on dry,
hard surfaced roads.
4H
Four-Wheel Drive High Range — This range
maximizes torque to the front driveshaft,
forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at
the same speed. This range provides addi-
tional traction for loose, slippery road sur-
faces only.
NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain, and will
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
159
WARNING!
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the auto-
matic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
Neutral — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the pow-
ertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
The transfer case is intended to be driven in
the 2H position for normal street and highway
conditions, such as hard-surfaced roads.
In the event that additional traction is re-
quired, the transfer case 4H and 4L positions
can be used to lock the front and rear drive-
shafts together, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H
and 4L positions are intended for loose, slip-
pery road surfaces only and not intended for
normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L
positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the drive-
line components. Refer to “Shifting Proce-
dures” in this section for further information
on shifting into 4H or 4L.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that
the vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the
front and rear driveshafts are locked together.
The light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the en-
gine speed will be approximately three times
(four times for Rubicon models) that of the
2H or 4H positions at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause dam-
age to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H To 4H Or 4H To 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made
with the vehicle stopped or in motion. The
preferred shifting speed would be 0 to
45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in mo-
tion, the transfer case will engage/disengage
faster if you momentarily release the accel-
erator pedal after completing the shift. Do
not accelerate while shifting the transfer
case. Apply a constant force when shifting
the transfer case lever.
STARTING AND OPERATING
160
NOTE:
• Do not attempt to make a shift while only
the front or rear wheels are spinning. The
front and rear driveshaft speeds must be
equal for the shift to take place. Shifting
while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer
case.
• Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may
be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low
or uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
loading, or cold temperatures.
• Shifting effort will increase with speed, this
is normal.
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transfer
case fluid warms up. This is normal.
4H To 4L Or 4L To 4H
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
transfer case lever firmly to the desired posi-
tion. Do not pause with the transfer case in N
(Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place
the automatic transmission into DRIVE or
release the clutch pedal on a manual trans-
mission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi-
culty may occur due to the mating teeth not
being properly aligned. Several attempts may
be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to
engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle mov-
ing faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case dam-
age or loss of power and vehicle control.
You could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
Five-Position Transfer Case
The transfer case provides five mode posi-
tions:
• 2H (Two-Wheel Drive High Range)
•
4H Auto (Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range)
•
4H PT (Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range)
• N (Neutral)
• 4L (Four-Wheel Drive Low Range)
Four-Wheel Drive Gear Selector
161
For additional information on the appropriate
use of each transfer case mode position, see
the information below:
2H
Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is
for normal street and highway driving on dry,
hard surfaced roads.
4H AUTO
Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This
range sends power to the front wheels. The
four-wheel drive system will be automatically
engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of
traction. Additional traction for varying road
conditions.
4H P-T
Four-Wheel Drive Part Time High Range —
This range maximizes torque to the front
driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels
to rotate at the same speed. This range pro-
vides additional traction for loose, slippery
road surfaces only.
NEUTRAL (N)
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain, and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the auto-
matic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
Neutral — This range disengages both the
front and rear driveshafts from the pow-
ertrain. To be used for flat towing behind
another vehicle.
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for further information.
4L
Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range
provides low speed four-wheel drive. It maxi-
mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing
the front and rear wheels to rotate at the
same speed. This range provides additional
traction and maximum pulling power for
loose, slippery road surfaces only. Do not
exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).
This transfer case is designed to be driven in
the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-
wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal
street and highway conditions on dry hard
surfaced roads). Driving the vehicle in 2WD
will have greater fuel economy benefits as the
front axle is not engaged in 2WD.
For variable driving conditions, the 4WD
AUTO mode can be used. In this mode, the
front axle is engaged, but the vehicle's power
is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive
will be automatically engaged when the ve-
hicle senses a loss of traction. Because the
front axle is engaged, this mode will result in
lower fuel economy than the 2WD mode.
In the event that additional traction is re-
quired, the transfer case 4H and 4L positions
can be used to lock the front and rear drive-
shafts together, forcing the front and rear
wheels to rotate at the same speed. The 4H
and 4L positions are intended for loose, slip-
STARTING AND OPERATING
162
pery road surfaces only and not intended for
normal driving. Driving in the 4H and 4L
positions on hard-surfaced roads will cause
increased tire wear and damage to the drive-
line components. Refer to “Shifting Proce-
dures” in this section for further information
on shifting into 4H or 4L.
The instrument cluster alerts the driver that
the vehicle is in four-wheel drive, and the
front and rear driveshafts are locked together.
The light will illuminate when the transfer
case is shifted into the 4H position.
When operating your vehicle in 4L, the en-
gine speed will be approximately three times
(four times for Rubicon models) that of the
2H or 4H positions at a given road speed.
Take care not to overspeed the engine.
Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles
depends on tires of equal size, type, and
circumference on each wheel. Any difference
will adversely affect shifting and cause dam-
age to the transfer case.
Because four-wheel drive provides improved
traction, there is a tendency to exceed safe
turning and stopping speeds. Do not go faster
than road conditions permit.
Shifting Procedures
2H To 4H Auto Or 4H Auto To 2H
Shifting between 2H and 4H Auto can be
made with the vehicle stopped or in motion.
The preferred shifting speed would be 0 to
45 mph (72 km/h). With the vehicle in mo-
tion, the transfer case will engage/disengage
faster if you momentarily release the accel-
erator pedal after completing the shift. Do not
accelerate while shifting the transfer case.
Apply a constant force when shifting the
transfer case lever.
2H/4H Auto To 4H Part Time Or 4H Part Time
To 2H/4H Auto
Shifting between 2H/4H AUTO to 4H PART
TIME can be made with the vehicle stopped
or in motion. The preferred shifting speed
would be 0 to 45 mph (72 km/h). With the
vehicle in motion, the transfer case will
engage/disengage faster if you momentarily
release the accelerator pedal after complet-
ing the shift. Do not accelerate while shifting
the transfer case. Apply a constant force
when shifting the transfer case lever.
NOTE:
• Do not attempt to make a shift while only
the front or rear wheels are spinning. The
front and rear driveshaft speeds must be
equal for the shift to take place. Shifting
while only the front or rear wheels are
spinning can cause damage to the transfer
case.
• Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may
be experienced due to uneven tire wear, low
or uneven tire pressures, excessive vehicle
loading, or cold temperatures.
• Shifting effort will increase with speed, this
is normal.
During cold weather, you may experience
increased effort in shifting until the transfer
case fluid warms up. This is normal.
4H Part Time/4H Auto To 4L Or
4L To 4H Part Time/4H Auto
With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to
5 km/h), shift an automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL (N), or press the clutch pedal on a
manual transmission. While the vehicle is
coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the
transfer case lever firmly to the desired posi-
163
tion. Do not pause with the transfer case in N
(Neutral). Once the shift is completed, place
the automatic transmission into DRIVE or
release the clutch pedal on a manual trans-
mission.
NOTE:
Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the
vehicle completely stopped; however, diffi-
culty may occur due to the mating teeth not
being properly aligned. Several attempts may
be required for clutch teeth alignment and
shift completion to occur. The preferred
method is with the vehicle rolling at 2 to
3 mph (3 to 5 km/h). Avoid attempting to
engage or disengage 4L with the vehicle
moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).
WARNING!
Failure to engage a transfer case position
completely can cause transfer case dam-
age or loss of power and vehicle control.
You could have a collision. Do not drive the
vehicle unless the transfer case is fully
engaged.
Trac-Lok Rear Axle — If Equipped
The Trac-Lok rear axle provides a constant
driving force to both rear wheels and reduces
wheel spin caused by the loss of traction at
one driving wheel. If traction differs between
the two rear wheels, the differential auto-
matically proportions the usable torque by
providing more torque to the wheel that has
traction.
Trac-Lok is especially helpful during slippery
driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a
slippery surface, a slight application of the
accelerator will supply maximum traction.
WARNING!
On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip
differential, never run the engine with one
rear wheel off the ground. The vehicle may
drive through the rear wheel remaining on
the ground and cause you to lose control of
your vehicle.
Axle Lock (Tru-Lok) — Rubicon Models
The AXLE LOCK switch is located on the
instrument panel (to the right of the steering
column).
This feature will only activate when the fol-
lowing conditions are met:
• Ignition in RUN position, vehicle in 4L
(Low) range.
• Vehicle speed should be 10 mph (16 km/h)
or less.
Axle Lock Switch Panel
STARTING AND OPERATING
164
• Both right and left wheels on axle are at the
same speed.
To activate the system, push the AXLE LOCK
switch down to lock the rear axle only (the
“REAR ONLY” will illuminate), push the
switch up to lock the front axle and rear axle
(the “FRONT + REAR” will illuminate). When
the rear axle is locked, pushing the bottom of
switch again will lock or unlock the front axle.
NOTE:
The indicator lights will flash until the axles
are fully locked or unlocked.
To unlock the axles, push the AXLE LOCK
OFF button.
Axle lock will disengage if the vehicle is taken
out of 4L (Low) range, or the ignition switch is
turned to the OFF position.
The axle lock disengages at speeds above
30 mph (48 km/h), and will automatically
re-lock once vehicle speed is less than
10 mph (16 km/h).
Electronic Sway Bar Disconnect —
If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with an elec-
tronic disconnecting stabilizer/sway bar. This
system allows greater front suspension travel
in off-road situations.
This system is controlled by the SWAY BAR
switch located on the instrument panel (to
the right of the steering column).
Push the SWAY BAR switch to activate the
system. Push the switch again to deactivate
the system. The “Sway Bar Indicator Light”
(located in the instrument cluster) will illumi-
nate when the bar is disconnected. The
“Sway Bar Indicator Light” will flash during
activation transition, or when activation con-
ditions are not met. The stabilizer/sway bar
should remain in on-road mode during nor-
mal driving conditions.
WARNING!
Ensure the stabilizer/sway bar is recon-
nected before driving on hard surfaced
roads or at speeds above 18 mph
(29 km/h); a disconnected stabilizer/sway
bar may contribute to the loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious in-
jury. Under certain circumstances, the
front stabilizer/sway bar enhances vehicle
stability and assists with vehicle control.
The system monitors vehicle speed and
will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer/
sway bar at speeds over 18 mph
(29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing
or solid “Sway Bar Indicator Light.” Once
Sway Bar Switch
165
WARNING!
vehicle speed is reduced below 14 mph
(22 km/h), the system will once again
attempt to return to off-road mode.
To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to
either 4H or 4L and push the SWAY BAR
switch to obtain the off-road position. Refer
to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation” in this sec-
tion for further information. The “Sway Bar
Indicator Light” will flash until the stabilizer/
sway bar has been fully disconnected.
NOTE:
The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked
due to left and right suspension height differ-
ences. This condition is due to driving sur-
face differences or vehicle loading. In order
for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/
reconnect, the right and left halves of the bar
must be aligned. This alignment may require
that the vehicle be driven onto level ground or
rocked from side to side.
To return to on-road mode, push the SWAY
BAR switch again.
WARNING!
If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to
on-road mode, the “Sway Bar Indicator
Light” will flash in the instrument cluster
and vehicle stability may be reduced. Do
not attempt to drive the vehicle over
18 mph (29 km/h). Driving faster than
18 mph (29 km/h) with a disconnected
stabilizer/sway bar may contribute to the
loss of vehicle control, which could result
in serious injury.
STOP/START SYSTEM —
AUTOMATIC
TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED)
The Stop/Start function is developed to re-
duce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle
stop if the required conditions are met. Re-
leasing the brake pedal or pressing the accel-
erator pedal will automatically re-start the
engine.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a
heavy duty starter, enhanced battery, and
other upgraded engine parts, to handle the
additional engine starts. Vehicles equipped
with eTorque contain a heavy duty motor
generator and an additional hybrid electric
battery to store energy from vehicle decelera-
tion for use on engine startup after a stop as
well as providing launch torque assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Start/Stop Sys-
tem be disabled during off-road use.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled
after every normal customer en-
gine start. At that time, the sys-
tem will go into STOP/START
READY and if all other conditions are met,
can go into a STOP/START AUTOSTOP AC-
TIVE “Autostop” mode.
STARTING AND OPERATING
166
To Activate The Autostop Mode,
The Following Must Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START
READY state. A STOP/START READY mes-
sage will be displayed in the instrument
cluster display within the Stop/Start sec-
tion. Refer to “Instrument Cluster” in “Get-
ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’s Manual for further informa-
tion.
• The vehicle must be completely stopped.
• The shifter must be in a forward gear and
the brake pedal depressed.
The engine will shut down, the tachometer
will move to the zero position and the Stop/
Start telltale will illuminate indicating you
are in Autostop. Customer settings will be
maintained upon return to an engine running
condition.
Refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” section located in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will
check many safety and comfort conditions to
see if they are fulfilled. Detailed information
about the operation of the Stop/Start system
may be viewed in the instrument cluster dis-
play Stop/Start Screen. In the following situ-
ations, the engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Driver’s door is not closed.
• Battery temperature is too warm or cold.
• Battery charge is low.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and
an acceptable cabin temperature has not
been achieved.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high
blower speed.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
• Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
• Engine temperature too high.
• The transmission is not in a forward gear.
• Hood is open.
• Transfer case is in 4LO or Neutral.
• Brake pedal is not pressed with sufficient
pressure.
Other Factors Which Can Inhibit Autostop
Include:
• Accelerator pedal input.
• Vehicle speed threshold not achieved from
previous auto-stop.
• Steering angle beyond threshold. (ESS
Models Only)
• ACC is on and speed is set.
• Vehicle is at high altitude.
• System fault present.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the STOP/START sys-
tem going into a STOP/START READY state
under more extreme conditions of the items
listed above.
167
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode
While in a forward gear, the engine will start
when the brake pedal is released or the
throttle pedal is depressed. The transmission
will automatically re-engage upon engine re-
start.
Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start
Automatically While In Autostop Mode:
• The transmission selector is moved out of
DRIVE.
• To maintain cabin temperature comfort.
• Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto
HVAC.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• HVAC system temperature or fan speed is
manually adjusted.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake
pedal applications).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed.
• A STOP/START system error occurs.
• STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time ex-
ceeds 5 minutes.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO or Neutral
mode.
• Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
(ESS Models Only)
To Manually Turn Off The Stop/Start
System
1. Push the STOP/START OFF switch (lo-
cated on the switch bank). The light on
the switch will illuminate.
2. The “STOP/START OFF” message will ap-
pear in instrument cluster display within
the Stop/Start section. Refer to “Instru-
ment Cluster” in “Getting To Know Your
Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual for further information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off
the STOP/START system), the engine will
not be stopped.
STOP/START Off Switch
STARTING AND OPERATING
168
4. The STOP/START system will reset itself
back to an ON condition every time the
ignition is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located
on the switch bank). The light on the switch
will turn off.
For complete details on the Stop/Start Sys-
tem refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” section located in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play“ in “Getting to Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an au-
thorized dealer.
STOP/START SYSTEM —
MANUAL TRANSMISSION
(IF EQUIPPED)
The Stop/Start function is developed to re-
duce fuel consumption. The system will stop
the engine automatically during a vehicle
stop if the required conditions are met. Press-
ing the clutch pedal will automatically restart
the vehicle.
ESS vehicles have been upgraded with a
heavy duty starter, enhanced battery, and
other upgraded engine parts, to handle the
additional engine starts. Vehicles equipped
with eTorque contain a heavy duty motor
generator and an additional hybrid electric
battery to store energy from vehicle decelera-
tion for use on engine startup after a stop as
well as providing launch torque assist.
NOTE:
It is recommended that the Start/Stop Sys-
tem be disabled during off-road use.
Automatic Mode
The Stop/Start feature is enabled
after every normal customer en-
gine start. It will remain in STOP/
START NOT READY until you
drive forward with a vehicle speed greater
than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the
system will go into STOP/START READY and
if all other conditions are met, can go into an
STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE mode.
To Activate The STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE
Mode, The Following Must Occur:
• The system must be in STOP/START
READY state. A STOP/START READY mes-
sage will be displayed in the instrument
cluster. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play” in “Getting To Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
• Vehicle speed must be less than 2 mph
(3 km/h).
• The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL
position and the clutch pedal must be fully
released
169
The engine will shut down, the tachometer will
fall to the Stop/Start position, the STOP/START
AUTO STOP ACTIVE message will appear,
and the heater/air conditioning (HVAC) air
flow will be reduced.
Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not
Autostop
Prior to engine shut down, the system will
check many safety and comfort conditions to
see if they are fulfilled. In following situa-
tions the engine will not stop:
• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.
• Outside temperature is less than 10°F
(–12°C) or greater than 109°F (43°C).
• Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto
HVAC.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• Engine has not reached normal operating
temperature.
• Battery discharged.
• When driving in REVERSE.
• Hood is open.
• Transfer case is in 4LO or Neutral
• Driver's seat is not occupied or driver door
is open.
• Vehicle is at high altitude.
• The vehicle is on a steep grade.
• Forward Gear is engaged.
• Steering angle beyond threshold. (ESS
Models Only)
• System fault is present.
• HVAC set to MAX A/C.
It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven
several times without the STOP/START sys-
tem going into a STOP/START READY state
under more extreme conditions of the items
listed above.
To Start The Engine While In Autostop
Mode
When the gear selector is in NEUTRAL, the
engine will start when the clutch pedal is
pressed (does not require complete/full pedal
press). The vehicle will go into STOP/START
SYSTEM NOT READY mode until the vehicle
speed is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h).
Conditions that will cause the engine to start
automatically while in STOP/START AUTO STOP
ACTIVE mode
The Engine Will Start Automatically When:
• Actual cabin temperature is significantly
different than temperature set on Auto
HVAC.
• HVAC is set to full defrost mode.
• STOP/START AUTO STOP ACTIVE time ex-
ceeds 5 minutes.
• Battery voltage drops too low.
• Low brake vacuum e.g. after several brake
pedal applications.
• Vehicle is moving faster than 5 mph
(8 km/h).
• STOP/START OFF switch is pressed.
• 4WD system is put into 4LO or Neutral
mode.
• Steering wheel is turned beyond threshold.
(ESS Models Only)
STARTING AND OPERATING
170
To Manually Turn Off The Start/Stop
System
1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located
on the switch bank). The light on the
switch will illuminate.
2. The STOP/START OFF message will ap-
pear in the instrument cluster. Refer to
“Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for fur-
ther information.
3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off
the STOP/START system), the engine will
not be stopped.
4. If the STOP/START system is manually
turned off, the engine can only be started
and stopped by cycling the ignition
switch.
5. The STOP/START system will reset itself
back to an ON condition every time the
ignition is turned off and back on.
To Manually Turn On The Stop/Start
System
Push the STOP/START OFF switch (located
on the switch bank). The light on the switch
will turn off.
For complete details on the Stop/Start Sys-
tem refer to the “Stop/Start System” in the
“Starting And Operating” section located in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
System Malfunction
If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START
system, the system will not shut down the
engine. A “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message will appear in the instrument cluster
display. Refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-
play“ in “Getting to Know Your Instrument
Panel” for further information.
If the “SERVICE STOP/START SYSTEM”
message appears in the instrument cluster
display, have the system checked by an au-
thorized dealer.
STOP/START Off Switch
171
SPEED CONTROL
When engaged, the Speed Control takes over
accelerator operations at speeds greater than
20 mph (32 km/h).
The Speed Control buttons are located on the
right side of the steering wheel.
NOTE:
• In order to ensure proper operation, the
Speed Control System has been designed
to shut down if multiple Speed Control
functions are operated at the same time. If
this occurs, the Speed Control System can
be reactivated by pushing the Speed Con-
trol on/off button and resetting the desired
vehicle set speed.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the con-
ditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Con-
trol in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
Speed Control Buttons
1 — CANC/Cancel
2 — On/Off
3 — SET (+)/Accel
4 — RES/Resume
5 — SET (-)/Decel
STARTING AND OPERATING
172
To Activate
Push the on/off button to activate the Speed
Control. The cruise indicator light in the in-
strument cluster display will illuminate. To
turn the system off, push the on/off button a
second time. The cruise indicator light will
turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.
WARNING!
Leaving the Speed Control system on when
not in use is dangerous. You could acci-
dentally set the system or cause it to go
faster than you want. You could lose con-
trol and have an accident. Always leave the
system off when you are not using it.
To Set A Desired Speed
Turn the Speed Control on.
NOTE:
The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pushing the
SET (+) or SET (-) button.
When the vehicle has reached the desired
speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and
release. Release the accelerator and the ve-
hicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting
To Increase Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can in-
crease speed by pushing the SET (+) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer
to ”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Own-
er’s Manual for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependent on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 mph.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result
in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in an
increase of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to increase until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Decrease Speed
When the Speed Control is set, you can de-
crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.
The driver’s preferred units can be selected
through the instrument panel settings. Refer
to ”Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” in your Own-
er’s Manual for more information. The speed
increment shown is dependent on the chosen
speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):
U.S. Speed (mph)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 mph.
173
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
Metric Speed (km/h)
• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result
in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each
subsequent tap of the button results in a
decrease of 1 km/h.
• If the button is continually pushed, the set
speed will continue to decrease until the
button is released, then the new set speed
will be established.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally.
When the pedal is released, the vehicle will
return to the set speed.
Using Speed Control On Hills
The transmission may downshift on hills to
maintain the vehicle set speed.
NOTE:
The Speed Control system maintains speed
up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain
may occur so it may be preferable to drive
without Speed Control.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed.
Your vehicle could go too fast for the con-
ditions, and you could lose control and
have an accident. Do not use Speed Con-
trol in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the
RES button and release. Resume can be used
at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the
CANC (cancel) button, or normal brake pres-
sure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate
the speed control without erasing the set
speed from memory.
Pushing the on/off button or cycling the igni-
tion to OFF, erases the set speed from
memory.
PARKSENSE REAR PARK
ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED
The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system pro-
vides visual and audible indications of the
distance between the rear fascia and a de-
tected obstacle when backing up, e.g. during
a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense
System Usage Precautions” in this section
for limitations of this system and recommen-
dations.
ParkSense will retain the last system state
(enabled or disabled) from the last ignition
cycle when the ignition is changed to the
ON/RUN position.
ParkSense can be active only when the gear
selector is in REVERSE. If ParkSense is en-
abled at this gear selector position, the sys-
tem will remain active until the vehicle speed
is increased to approximately 7 mph
(11 km/h) or above. When in REVERSE and
above the system's operating speed, a warn-
STARTING AND OPERATING
174
ing will appear within the instrument cluster
display indicating the vehicle speed is too
fast. The system will become active again if
the vehicle speed is decreased to speeds less
than approximately 6 mph (9 km/h).
ParkSense Sensors
The four ParkSense sensors, located in the
rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area behind
the vehicle that is within the sensors’ field of
view. The sensors can detect obstacles from
approximately 12 inches (30 cm) up to
79 inches (200 cm) from the rear fascia/
bumper in the horizontal direction, depend-
ing on the location, type and orientation of
the obstacle.
Enabling And Disabling ParkSense
ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with
the ParkSense switch, located on the switch
panel below the climate controls.
When the ParkSense switch is pushed to
disable the system, the instrument cluster
display will show the “PARKSENSE OFF”
message for approximately five seconds.
Refer to “Instrument Cluster Display” in
“Getting To Know Your Instrument Panel” in
your Owner’s Manual for further information.
When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE
and the system is disabled, the instrument
cluster display will show the “PARKSENSE
OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in
REVERSE.
The ParkSense switch LED will be on when
ParkSense is disabled or requires service.
The ParkSense switch LED will be off when
the system is enabled. If the ParkSense
switch is pushed, and requires service, the
ParkSense switch LED will blink momen-
tarily, and then the LED will be on.
ParkSense System Usage Precautions
NOTE:
• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow,
ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the
ParkSense system operating properly.
• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi-
brations could affect the performance of
ParkSense.
• When you turn ParkSense OFF, the instru-
ment cluster display will read
“PARKSENSE OFF” Furthermore, once you
turn ParkSense OFF, it remains off until you
turn it on again, even if you cycle the
ignition.
• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the vol-
ume of the radio when it is sounding a tone.
• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, tak-
ing care not to scratch or damage them. The
sensors must not be covered with ice, snow,
slush, mud, dirt or debris. Failure to do so
can result in the system not working prop-
erly. The ParkSense system might not de-
tect an obstacle behind the fascia/bumper,
or it could provide a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the fascia/bumper.
• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the
ParkSense system OFF if objects such as
bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc. are
placed within 12 inches (30 cm) from the
rear fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can
result in the system misinterpreting a close
object as a sensor problem, causing the
“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE
REQUIRED” message to be displayed in
the instrument cluster display.
175
• The operation of the rear sensors is auto-
matically deactivated when the trailer's
electric plug is inserted in the vehicle's tow
hook socket. The rear sensors are automati-
cally reactivated when the trailer's cable
plug is removed.
WARNING!
• Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using ParkSense. Always
check carefully behind your vehicle,
look behind you, and be sure to check
for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,
obstructions, and blind spots before
backing up. You are responsible for
safety and must continue to pay atten-
tion to your surroundings. Failure to do
so can result in serious injury or death.
• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly
recommended that the ball mount and
hitch ball assembly is disconnected
from the vehicle when the vehicle is not
used for towing. Failure to do so can
result in injury or damage to vehicles or
obstacles because the hitch ball will be
much closer to the obstacle than the
WARNING!
rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds
the continuous tone. Also, the sensors
could detect the ball mount and hitch
ball assembly, depending on its size and
shape, giving a false indication that an
obstacle is behind the vehicle.
CAUTION!
• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is
unable to recognize every obstacle, in-
cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs
might be temporarily detected or not
detected at all. Obstacles located above
or below the sensors will not be detected
when they are in close proximity.
• The vehicle must be driven slowly when
using ParkSense in order to be able to
stop in time when an obstacle is de-
tected. It is recommended that the
driver looks over his/her shoulder when
using ParkSense.
PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP
CAMERA
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera allows
you to see an on-screen image of the rear
surroundings of your vehicle whenever the
gear selector is put into REVERSE. The im-
age will be displayed in the touchscreen
display along with a caution note to “check
entire surroundings” across the top of the
screen. After five seconds this note will dis-
appear. The ParkView camera is located on
the rear of the vehicle in the center of the
spare tire.
Manual Activation Of The Rear View Camera
1. Press the “Controls” button located on
the bottom of the Uconnect display.
2. Press the “Backup Camera” button to
turn the Rear View Camera system on.
STARTING AND OPERATING
176
NOTE:
The ParkView Rear Back Up Camera has
programmable modes of operation that may
be selected through the Uconnect System.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE
(with camera delay turned off), the rear cam-
era mode is exited and the previous screen
appears again. When the vehicle is shifted
out of REVERSE (with camera delay turned
on), the camera image will continue to be
displayed for up to ten seconds after shifting
out of REVERSE unless the vehicle speed
exceeds 8 mph (13 km/h), the vehicle is
shifted into PARK, the vehicle’s ignition is
cycled to the OFF position, or the user
presses image defeat [X] to exit out of the
camera video display.
NOTE:
• If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph
(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will
be displayed continuously until deactivated
via the touchscreen button “X”, the vehicle
is shifted into PARK, or the ignition is
placed in the OFF position.
• The touchscreen button “X” to disable dis-
play of the camera image is made available
ONLY when the vehicle is not in REVERSE.
When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle and its projected backup path based
on the steering wheel position. A dashed
center line overlay indicates the center of the
vehicle to assist with parking or aligning to a
hitch/receiver.
When enabled, fixed guide lines are overlaid
on the image to illustrate the width of the
vehicle.
Different colored zones indicate the distance
to the rear of the vehicle.
WARNING!
Drivers must be careful when backing up
even when using the ParkView Rear Back
Up Camera. Always check carefully behind
your vehicle, and be sure to check for
pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-
structions, or blind spots before backing
up. You are responsible for the safety of
your surroundings and must continue to
pay attention while backing up. Failure to
do so can result in serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView
should only be used as a parking aid.
The ParkView camera is unable to view
every obstacle or object in your drive
path.
• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle
must be driven slowly when using
ParkView to be able to stop in time when
an obstacle is seen. It is recommended
that the driver look frequently over his/
her shoulder when using ParkView.
177
NOTE:
If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance
builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,
rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do
not cover the lens.
REFUELING THE VEHICLE
Fuel Filler Cap
The fuel filler cap is located on the driver's
side of the vehicle. If the fuel filler cap is lost
or damaged, be sure the replacement cap is
the correct one for this vehicle.
Fuel Filler Door Fuel Filler Cap
STARTING AND OPERATING
178
WARNING!
• Never have any smoking materials lit in
or near the vehicle when the fuel door is
open or the tank is being filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is run-
ning. This is in violation of most state
and federal fire regulations and may
cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light”
to turn on.
• A fire may result if fuel is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a
vehicle. You could be burned. Always
place fuel containers on the ground
while filling.
CAUTION!
• Damage to the fuel system or emission
control system could result from using
an improper fuel filler cap. A poorly
fitting cap could let impurities into the
fuel system. Also, a poorly fitting after-
market cap can cause the “Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL)” to illuminate, due
to fuel vapors escaping from the system.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do
not “top off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE:
• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off,
the fuel tank is full.
• Tighten the fuel filler cap about 1/4 turn
until you hear one click. This is an indica-
tion that the cap is properly tightened.
• If the fuel filler cap is not tightened prop-
erly, the MIL will come on. Be sure the cap
is tightened every time the vehicle is
refueled.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel has been added, the vehicle diag-
nostic system can determine if the fuel filler
cap is possibly loose, improperly installed, or
damaged. If the system detects a malfunc-
tion, the “gASCAP” message will display in
the odometer display. Tighten the gas cap
until a "clicking" sound is heard. This is an
indication that the gas cap is properly tight-
ened. Push the odometer reset button to turn
the message off. If the problem persists, the
message will appear the next time the vehicle
is started. This might indicate a damaged
cap. If the problem is detected twice in a row,
the system will turn on the MIL. Resolving the
problem will turn the MIL off.
179
TRAILER TOWING
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
Engine/Transmission Model
GCWR (Gross Combined
Wt. Rating)
Frontal Area
Max. GTW
(Gross Trailer Wt.)
Max. Trailer Tongue Wt.
(See Note)
2.0L
Two–Door 8,016 lbs (3 636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Four–Door 8,117 lbs (3 682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
3.6L
Two–Door 8,016 lbs (3 636 kg) 20 ft2 (1.86 m2) 2,000 lbs (907 kg) 200 lbs (91 kg)
Four–Door 8,117 lbs (3 682 kg) 30 ft2 (2.79 m2) 3,500 lbs (1 587 kg) 350 lbs (158 kg)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
NOTE:
The trailer tongue weight must be considered
as part of the combined weight of occupants
and cargo (ie. the GVWR), and the GVWR
should never exceed the weight referenced
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servic-
ing And Maintenance” in the Owner’s infor-
mation for further details.
STARTING AND OPERATING
180
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
Towing Condition Wheels OFF the Ground Four-Wheel Drive Models
Flat Tow NONE
See Instructions
•
Automatic transmission in PARK.
• Manual transmission in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL [N]).
• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N).
• Tow in forward direction.
Dolly Tow
Front NOT ALLOWED
Rear NOT ALLOWED
On Trailer ALL OK
NOTE:
When towing your vehicle, always follow applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and provincial Highway Safety offices for additional
details.
Recreational Towing —
Four-Wheel Drive Models
NOTE:
The transfer case must be shifted into NEU-
TRAL (N), automatic transmission must be in
PARK, and manual transmission must be in
gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recreational
towing.
181
CAUTION!
• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle.
Towing with only one set of wheels on
the ground (front or rear) will cause
severe transmission and/or transfer case
damage. Tow with all four wheels either
ON the ground, or OFF the ground (using
a vehicle trailer).
• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing
this vehicle backwards can cause severe
damage to the transfer case.
• Automatic transmissions must be
placed in PARK for recreational towing.
• Manual transmissions must be placed in
gear (not in Neutral) for recreational
towing.
• Before recreational towing, perform the
procedure outlined under “Shifting Into
NEUTRAL (N)” to be certain that the
transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N).
Otherwise, internal damage will result.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case dam-
age. Damage from improper towing is
CAUTION!
not covered under the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on
tow bar on your vehicle. The bumper
face bar will be damaged.
Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for recreational towing.
WARNING!
You or others could be injured or killed if
you leave the vehicle unattended with the
transfer case in the NEUTRAL (N) position
without first fully engaging the parking
brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)
position disengages both the front and rear
driveshafts from the powertrain, and will
allow the vehicle to roll, even if the auto-
matic transmission is in PARK (or manual
transmission is in gear). The parking brake
should always be applied when the driver
is not in the vehicle.
CAUTION!
It is necessary to follow these steps to be
certain that the transfer case is fully in
NEUTRAL (N) before recreational towing
to prevent damage to internal parts.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop on
level ground.
2. Press and hold the brake pedal.
3. Shift the automatic transmission into
NEUTRAL or depress the clutch pedal on
a manual transmission.
4. Turn the engine OFF.
5. Shift the transfer case lever into NEU-
TRAL (N).
6. Start the engine.
7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.
8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal
on manual transmissions) for five seconds
and ensure that there is no vehicle
movement.
STARTING AND OPERATING
182
9. Repeat steps seven and eight with auto-
matic transmission in DRIVE or manual
transmission in first gear.
10. Turn the engine OFF.
11. Firmly apply the parking brake.
12. Shift the transmission into PARK or
place manual transmission in gear (NOT
in NEUTRAL).
CAUTION!
Damage to the transmission may occur if
the transmission is shifted into PARK with
the transfer case in NEUTRAL (N) and the
engine running. With the transfer case in
NEUTRAL (N) ensure that the engine is
OFF before shifting the transmission into
PARK.
13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle
using a suitable tow bar.
14. Release the parking brake.
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL (N)
Use the following procedure to prepare your
vehicle for normal usage.
1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leav-
ing it connected to the tow vehicle.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake.
3. Start the engine.
4. Press and hold the brake pedal.
5. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.
6. Turn the engine OFF.
7. Shift the transfer case lever to the desired
position.
NOTE:
When shifting the transfer case out of
NEUTRAL (N), the engine should remain
OFF to avoid gear clash.
8. Shift the automatic transmission into
PARK, or place manual transmission in
NEUTRAL.
9. Release the brake pedal.
10. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.
11. Start the engine.
12. Press and hold the brake pedal.
13. Release the parking brake.
14. Shift the transmission into gear, release
the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on
manual transmissions), and check that
the vehicle operates normally.
183
184
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS ................186
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR —
IFEQUIPPED...............186
BULB REPLACEMENT ........191
Replacement Bulbs ............191
Bulb Replacement .............193
FUSES ...................196
General Information.............196
Power Distribution Center (PDC) .....196
JACKING AND TIRE
CHANGING ................203
Jack Location ................203
Spare Tire Removal .............203
Preparations For Jacking .........204
Jacking Instructions ............204
Road Tire Installation ............206
JUMPSTARTING............207
Preparations For Jump Start........207
Jump Starting Procedure..........208
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS ..............209
MANUAL PARK RELEASE......210
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . .211
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE..................212
Four–Wheel Drive Models .........213
Emergency Tow Hooks —
If Equipped .................214
ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE
SYSTEM(EARS).............214
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR) ....................214
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
185
HAZARD WARNING
FLASHERS
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located
on the instrument panel below the climate
controls.
Push the switch to turn on the
Hazard Warning flasher. When the
switch is activated, all directional
turn signals will flash on and off to
warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push
the switch a second time to turn off the
Hazard Warning flashers.
This is an emergency warning system and it
should not be used when the vehicle is in
motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and it is creating a safety hazard for other
motorists.
When you must leave the vehicle to seek
assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will
continue to operate even though the ignition
is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
With extended use the Hazard Warning flash-
ers may wear down your battery.
ASSIST AND SOS MIRROR —
IF EQUIPPED
If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an
ASSIST and a SOS button.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with
your hands on the steering wheel. You have
full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
• The SOS and ASSIST buttons will only
function if you are connected to an oper-
able LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
Other Uconnect services will only be oper-
able if your SiriusXM Guardian service is
active and you are connected to an oper-
able LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network.
Assist And SOS Mirror
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
186
ASSIST Call
The ASSIST Button is used to automatically
connect you to any one of the following sup-
port centers:
• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire,
or need a tow, just push the ASSIST button
and you’ll be connected to someone who
can help. Roadside Assistance will know
what vehicle you’re driving and its location.
Additional fees may apply for roadside as-
sistance.
• SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care – In-
vehicle support for SiriusXM Guardian.
• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for
all other vehicle issues.
SOS Call
1. Push the SOS Call button on the Rearview
Mirror.
NOTE:
In case the SOS Call button is pushed in
error, there will be a ten second delay
before the SOS Call system initiates a call
to a SOS operator. To cancel the SOS Call
connection, push the SOS call button on
the Rearview Mirror or press the cancella-
tion button on the Device Screen. Termi-
nation of the SOS Call will turn off the
green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.
2. The LED light located between the AS-
SIST and SOS buttons on the Rearview
Mirror will turn green once a connection to
a SOS operator has been made.
3. Once a connection between the vehicle
and a SOS operator is made, the SOS Call
system may transmit the following impor-
tant vehicle information to a SOS opera-
tor:
• Indication that the occupant placed a
SOS Call.
• The vehicle brand.
• The last known GPS coordinates of the
vehicle.
4. You should be able to speak with the SOS
operator through the vehicle audio system
to determine if additional help is needed.
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with
your hands on the steering wheel. You have
full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
187
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data
as authorized by the subscriber.
• Once a connection is made between the
vehicle’s SOS Call system and the SOS
operator, the SOS operator may be able
to open a voice connection with the
vehicle to determine if additional help
is needed. Once the SOS operator
opens a voice connection with the vehi-
cle’s SOS Call system, the operator
should be able to speak with you or
other vehicle occupants and hear
sounds occurring in the vehicle. The
vehicle’s SOS Call system will attempt
to remain connected with the SOS op-
erator until the SOS operator termi-
nates the connection.
5. The SOS operator may attempt to contact
appropriate emergency responders and
provide them with important vehicle infor-
mation and GPS coordinates.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in
danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,
dangerous road conditions or location),
do not wait for voice contact from an
Emergency Services Agent. All occu-
pants should exit the vehicle immedi-
ately and move to a safe location.
•
Never place anything on or near the vehi-
cle’s operable network and GPS antennas.
You could prevent operable network and
GPS signal reception, which can prevent
your vehicle from placing an emergency
call. An operable network and GPS signal
reception is required for the SOS Call sys-
tem to function properly.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into
the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not
add aftermarket electrical equipment to
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a sig-
nal to initiate an emergency call. To
avoid interference that can cause the
SOS Call system to fail, never add after-
market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
WARNING!
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to
your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle. IF
YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD-
ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), THE UCONNECT FEATURES,
APPS AND SERVICES, AMONG OTH-
ERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.
• Modifications to any part of the SOS Call
system could cause the air bag system to
fail when you need it. You could be
injured if the air bag system is not there
to help protect you.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
188
SOS Call System Limitations
Vehicles sold in Mexico DO NOT have SOS Call
system capabilities.
SOS or other emergency line operators in
Mexico may not answer or respond to SOS
system calls.
If the SOS Call system detects a malfunction,
any of the following may occur at the time the
malfunction is detected, and at the begin-
ning of each ignition cycle:
• The Rearview Mirror light located between
the ASSIST and SOS buttons will continu-
ously be illuminated red.
• The Device Screen will display the follow-
ing message “Vehicle device requires ser-
vice. Please contact your dealer.”
• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Ve-
hicle device requires service. Please con-
tact your dealer.”
WARNING!
• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could
mean you will not have SOS Call ser-
vices. If the Rearview Mirror light is
illuminated, have your authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immedi-
ately.
• The Occupant Restraint Control module
turns on the air bag Warning Light on the
instrument panel if a malfunction in any
part of the system is detected. If the Air
Bag Warning Light is illuminated, have
your authorized dealer service the Occu-
pant Restraint Control system immedi-
ately.
Even if the SOS Call system is fully func-
tional, factors beyond FCA US LLC’s control
may prevent or stop the SOS Call system
operation. These include, but are not limited
to, the following factors:
• Delayed accessories mode is active.
• The ignition is in the OFF position.
• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not
intact.
• The SOS Call system software and/or hard-
ware are damaged during a crash.
• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes
disconnected during a vehicle crash.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network
and/or Global Positioning Satellite signals
are unavailable or obstructed.
• Equipment malfunction at the SOS opera-
tor facility.
• Operator error by the SOS operator.
• LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) network con-
gestion.
• Weather.
• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain,
or tunnels.
189
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with
your hands on the steering wheel. You have
full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
• Never place anything on or near the vehi-
cle’s LTE (voice/data) or 4G (data) and GPS
antennas. You could prevent LTE (voice/
data) or 4G (data) and GPS signal recep-
tion, which can prevent your vehicle from
placing an emergency call. An operable LTE
(voice/data) or 4G (data) network connec-
tion and a GPS signal is required for the
SOS Call system to function properly.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions: (1) This device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device
must accept any interference received, in-
cluding interference that may cause unde-
sired operation.
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user's authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during
cleaning, never spray any cleaning solu-
tion directly onto the mirror. Apply the
solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
190
BULB REPLACEMENT
Replacement Bulbs
Interior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Automatic Transmission Indicator Lamp 658
Heater Control Lamps (2) 194
Rocker Switch Indicator Lamp
(Rear Window Defogger, and Rear Wash/Wipe)
**
Soundbar Dome Lamp 912
** Bulbs only available from an authorized dealer.
191
Exterior Bulbs
Bulb Number
Headlamps (2) H13
Premium Head Lamps LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Sport Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) 7442NALL
Premium Front Park/Turn Signal Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Turn Lamp 7440NA
Base (Sahara/Rubicon) Park DRL Lamp 7443
Front Side Marker Lamps (2) LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Base Fog Lamps PSX24W
Premium Fog Lamps LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Premium LED Tail Lamps LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Rear Base Tail Lamp Stop/Tail/Turn Bulb 3157
Rear Base Tail Lamp Backup Bulb 7440
Rear Base Tail Lamp Side Marker LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
License Lamp LED – (Serviced At Authorized Dealer)
NOTE:
Numbers refer to commercial bulb types that can be purchased from an authorized dealer.
If a bulb needs to be replaced, visit an authorized dealer or refer to the applicable Service Manual.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
192
Bulb Replacement
NOTE:
Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-
spheric conditions. This will usually clear as
atmospheric conditions change to allow the
condensation to change back into a vapor.
Turning the lamps on will usually accelerate
the clearing process.
Halogen Headlamps
1. Open hood and support using prop rod.
2. Remove the front grille. Turn the retainers
along the top 1/4 turn counterclockwise
and remove.
3. Pull the bottom of the grille away starting
at one side and working toward the other.
4. Remove the three screws holding the
headlamp to the vehicle.
5. Remove lamp from the vehicle.
6. Remove the lamp from the collar.
7. Grasp the bulb and turn 1/4 turn
counterclockwise.
8. Pull the bulb from the housing.
9. Push connector locking tab to the unlock
position.
10. Remove connector from bulb.
11. Push connector onto new bulb base, and
push the connector locking tab to the
lock position.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fin-
gers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
12. Reinstall bulb housing. Rotate the bulb
1/4 turn clockwise.
Front Park/Turn Signal
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to
access bulb sockets.
2. Turn the socket assembly 1/4 turn coun-
terclockwise and remove from housing.
Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
replace.
Wheel Liner
193
LED Front Side Marker
1. Remove the front wheel liner fasteners to
access side maker screw and electrical
connector.
2. Remove fastening screw in the back of the
front side maker assembly and disconnect
electrical connector.
3. Remove and replace LED front side
marker light assembly.
Halogen Front Fog Lamp
1. Reach under the vehicle to access the
back of the front fog lamp.
2. Disconnect the wire harness connector
from the front fog lamp connector
receptacle.
3. Firmly grasp the bulb by the two latch
features and squeeze them together to
unlock the bulb from the back of the front
fog lamp housing.
4. Pull the bulb straight out from the keyed
opening in the housing and then connect
the replacement bulb.
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new bulb with your fin-
gers. Oil contamination will severely
shorten bulb life. If the bulb comes in
contact with any oily surface, clean the
bulb with rubbing alcohol.
LED Front Fog Lamp
If your vehicle is equipped with LED fog
lamps they are replaced as an assembly.
Rear Tail, Stop, Turn Signal, And
Backup Lamp
1. Remove interior trim panel cap to access
single retaining screw for tail lamp
assembly.
Trim Cap
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
194
2. Remove retaining screw and disconnect
electrical connector, then remove tail
lamp assembly from the vehicle.
NOTE:
If necessary, push in on the assembly tab
located inboard behind the lamp housing.
3. Remove the three screws from assembly
bracket to access bulb sockets.
4. Rotate the appropriate socket 1/4 turn
counterclockwise, then remove it from the
housing.
5. Pull the bulb straight from the socket to
replace.
Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL)
The stop lamp is mounted on a bracket that
extends upward from the tailgate behind the
spare tire. If service is needed, obtain the
LED Assembly from an authorized dealer.
1. Remove the spare tire.
2. Remove the screws holding the tire carrier
cover.
3. Remove two screws from lamp assembly
and disconnect electrical connector.
License Plate Lamps
See an authorized dealer to replace these
LED assemblies.
Retaining Screw
Assembly Bracket
195
FUSES
WARNING!
• When replacing a blown fuse, always use
an appropriate replacement fuse with
the same amp rating as the original fuse.
Never replace a fuse with another fuse of
higher amp rating. Never replace a
blown fuse with metal wires or any other
material. Failure to use proper fuses may
result in serious personal injury, fire
and/or property damage.
• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that
the ignition is off and that all the other
services are switched off and/or disen-
gaged.
• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact
an authorized dealer.
• If a general protection fuse for safety
systems (air bag system, braking sys-
tem), power unit systems (engine sys-
tem, gearbox system) or steering system
blows, contact an authorized dealer.
General Information
The fuses protect electrical systems against
excessive current.
When a device does not work, you must check
the fuse element inside the blade fuse for a
break/melt.
Also, please be aware that when using power
outlets for extended periods of time with the
engine off may result in vehicle battery dis-
charge.
Power Distribution Center (PDC)
The Power Distribution Center is located in
the engine compartment near the battery.
This center contains cartridge fuses, mini
fuses, and relays. The PDC top cover is la-
belled with each serviceable fuse/relay loca-
tion, function, and size.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
196
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F01 – – Spare
F02 40 Amp Green – Starter
F03 – 5 Amp Tan Intelligent Battery Sensor (IBS)
F04 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Pump MTR/FPCM
F05 – 5 Amp Tan Security Gateway
F06 – – Spare
F07 – 15 Amp Blue Low Temp Radiator Cooling Pump (LTR) — If Equipped
F08 – 15 Amp Blue Trans Control Module TCM-8HP CYGNUS
F09 – – Spare
F10 – 15 Amp Blue Key Ignition Node (KIN)/Radio Frequency Hub(RF HUB)/
Electric Steering Column Lock (ESCL)
F11 – 10 Amp Red UCI Port (USB & AUX)
F12 – 25 Amp Clear HIFI Amplifier
F13 – – Spare
F14 – – Spare
F15 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster (IPC)/Switch Bank-Heavy Duty
Electrical Pkg (SWITCH BANK-HD ELEC)
F16 – – Spare
F17 – – Spare
F18 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch (AC CLUTCH)
F19 – – Spare
F20 30 Amp Pink – Central Body Controller (CBC) 1-INTERIOR LIGHTS
F21 – 20 Amp Yellow REAR WIPER
197
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F22 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module (ECM)/Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/
Motor Generator Unit (MGU) WAKE UP/
Power Pack Unit (PPU) WAKE UP
F23 – 10 Amp Red Powertrain Control Module (PCM)/Engine Control Module (ECM)
F24 – – Spare
F25 – 10 Amp Red Module Shift By Wire (MOD_SBW)
F26 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 2-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #1
F27 30 Amp Pink – Front Wipers
F28 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 3-POWER LOCKS
F29 40 Amp Green – Central Body Controller (CBC) 4-EXTERIOR LIGHTS #2
F30 – – Spare
F31 – 10 Amp Red DIAGNOSTIC PORT
F32 – 10 Amp Red Heating Ventilation Air Conditioning Mod (HVAC CTRL MOD)/
Steering Column Lock (SCL)/Occupant Classification Module
(OCM)/Driver Presence Detection Module (DPDM)
F33 – 10 Amp Red ParkTronics System (PTS)/Infrared Camera Module (IRCM)/
Airbag Disable Lamps (AIRBAG DISABLE LMPS)
F34 – 10 Amp Red Electronic Stability Control (ESC)/Electric Hydraulic Power Steering
(EHPS)/Smart Bar Control Module (SBCM) WAKE UP
F35 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP — If Equipped
F36 30 Amp Pink – TRLR TOW MOD — If Equipped
F37 30 Amp Pink – TRLR TOW CONN 7W — If Equipped
F38 20 Amp Blue – Engine Control Module ECM
F39 – – Spare
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
198
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F40 – 15 Amp Blue DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)/Axle Lock (AXLE LOC) FT_RR
F41 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Cluster (IC)/Security GateWay (SGW) WAKE UP
F42 – 10 Amp Red Power Control Relay Control Feed (Electric Stop/Start)/
Spare (Belt Starter Generator) -- If Equipped
F43 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) BATT
F44 – 10 Amp Red InfraRed Camera (IRCAM) HEATERS
F45 – 20 Amp Yellow PWR OUTLET (CARGO) IGN*
F46 – 10 Amp Red AUTO HDLP LVL MOD/LVL MTR/HDLP SW
F47 – – Spare
F48 – – Spare
F49 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller ORC
F50 – 10 Amp Red HD ACC — If Equipped
F51 – 10 Amp Red Digital TV (DSRC)/USB/InSide RearView Mirror (ISRVM)/
Compass Module (CSGM)
F52 – 20 Amp Yellow CIGAR LTR
F53 – – Spare
F54 – – Spare
F55 – – Spare
F56 – 10 Amp Red IN-CAR TEMP SENSOR
F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Drvr Htd Seat
F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Frt Pass Htd Seat
F59 – – Spare
F60 – 15 Amp Blue Comfort Steering Wheel Module (CSWM) (HTD STR WHEEL)
199
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F61 – 10 Amp Red Left Blind Spot Sensor (LBSS)/Right Blind Spot Sensor (RBSS)
F62 – – Spare
F63 – 10 Amp Red Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
F64 – – Spare
F65 – – Spare
F66 40 Amp Green – HVAC BLOWER MTR FRT
F67 – – Spare
F68 – – Spare
F69 – 5 Amp Tan Motor Generator Unit MGU Belt Starter Generator (BSG) —
If Equipped
F70 – 25 Amp Clear INJ/IGN COIL (GAS)/GLO PLUG MOD (DSL)
F71 – – Spare
F72 – 10 Amp Red HD ELEC ACC PKG — If Equipped
F73 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP LT
F74 20 Amp Blue – PWR TOP RT
F75 – 10 Amp Red Power Pack Unit - Battery Pack Control Module & Auxiliary
Power Module (PPU-BPCM & APM) Belt Starter Generator (BSG) —
If Equipped
F76 – 20 Amp Yellow ECM (GAS)/PCM (DSL)
F77 – 10 Amp Red HTD MIRRORS
F78 – 10 Amp Red COMP/INTRUSION/SIREN/INTRUSION SNSRS
F79 – 20 Amp Yellow SMART BAR CTRL MOD
F80 – 15 Amp Blue Powertrain Control Module (PCM)
F81 30 Amp Pink – REAR DEFROSTER (EBL)
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
200
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F82 30 Amp Pink – FUEL HTR — If Equipped
F83 60 Amp Yellow GLOW PLUG — If Equipped
F84 30 Amp Pink – UREA HTR CTRL UNIT — If Equipped
F85 – 10 Amp Red PM SENSOR — If Equipped
F86 30 Amp Pink – BRAKE VAC PMP2—IfEquipped
F87 – 10 Amp Red SUPPLY/PURGING PMP — If Equipped
F88 20 Amp Blue – NOx SENSOR #1/ #2 — IF Equipped
F89 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module (SCCM)/
Cruise Control (CRUISE CTL)/Digital TV (DTV)
F90 20 Amp Blue – TRLR TOW PARK LMP — If Equipped
F91 – 20 Amp Yellow HORN
F92 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #2 — If Equipped
F93 40 Amp Green – HD ACCY #1 — If Equipped
F94 – 10 Amp Red Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)/RF Hub system (CORAX)
F95 – – Spare
F96 – 10 Amp Red PWR MIRROR SW
F97 – 20 Amp Yellow RADIO/TBM
F98 – 10 Amp Red SW BANK-HD ELEC/OFF ROAD
F99 – – Spare
F100 30 Amp Pink – ESC-ECU & VALVES
F101 30 Amp Pink – DriveTrain Control Module (DTCM)
F102 – 15 Amp Blue DUAL USB PORT
F103 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #3 — If Equipped
201
Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description
F104 – 15 Amp Blue PPU COOL PUMP — If Equipped
F105 – 10 Amp Red Integrated Center Stack (ICS)/Heat Ventilation Air Conditioning
(HVAC)
F106 40 Amp Green – Electronic Speed Control (ESC)-PUMP MTR
F107 – 20 Amp Yellow TRLR TOW STOP/TURN LT — If Equipped
F108 – 15 Amp Blue HD ACCY #4 — If Equipped
F109 – 20 Amp Yellow TRLR TOW STOP/TURN RT — If Equipped
F110 30 Amp Pink – POWER INVERTER
F111 20 Amp Blue – TRLR TOW BACKUP — If Equipped
* Customer can select to switch the Cargo
Power Outlet from F43 battery fed power to
this position F45 which is fed when the
ignition in ON.
CAUTION!
• When installing the power distribution
center cover, it is important to ensure
the cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water
to get into the power distribution center
and possibly result in an electrical sys-
tem failure.
CAUTION!
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is impor-
tant to use only a fuse having the correct
amperage rating. The use of a fuse with
a rating other than indicated may result
in a dangerous electrical system over-
load. If a properly rated fuse continues
to blow, it indicates a problem in the
circuit that must be corrected.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
202
JACKING AND
TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Do not attempt to change a tire on the
side of the vehicle close to moving traf-
fic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid
the danger of being hit when operating
the jack or changing the wheel.
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dan-
gerous. The vehicle could slip off the
jack and fall on you. You could be
crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take
it to a service center where it can be
raised on a lift.
• Never start or run the engine while the
vehicle is on a jack.
• The jack is designed to be used as a tool
for changing tires only. The jack should
not be used to lift the vehicle for service
purposes. The vehicle should be jacked
on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and lug wrench are located in the
rear cargo area. To remove jack and tools
proceed as follows:
1. Lift the load floor in the cargo area.
NOTE:
The load floor can be removed for easier
access by pulling the load floor directly
rearward.
2. Remove the hardware storage cover by
pinching the latch on the left side and
pulling upward.
3. Turn the black plastic wing nut counter-
clockwise to loosen the jack from the
storage bin.
4. Remove tool kit and assemble tools.
Spare Tire Removal
1. To remove the spare tire from the carrier,
remove the tire cover, if equipped.
2. Remove the Rear Camera Cover by turning
the lock bolt to the left with the #T40 Torx
head driver and ratchet from the supplied
tool kit.
3. Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench
turning them counterclockwise. If
equipped, remove the locking lug nut with
the lock key (located in the glove box)
turning it counterclockwise.
Stowing The Replaced Spare Tire
1. Mount the spare tire onto the carrier.
Torque down lug nuts and locking lug nut.
2. Return the lock bolt to the lock position on
the camera cover by turning the lock to
the right using the provided #40 Torx
head driver and ratchet. Then, reinstall
the camera cover by slipping it over the
camera/tire carrier until it snaps into
place.
3. Reinstall the tire cover if applicable.
NOTE:
If you have added aftermarket accessories to
the spare tire mounted carrier, it cannot ex-
ceed a gross weight of 85 lbs (38.5 kg)
including the weight of the spare tire.
203
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side
of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull
far enough off the road to avoid being hit
when operating the jack or changing the
wheel.
2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Shift the automatic transmission into
PARK, or a manual transmission into
REVERSE.
5. Turn the ignition OFF.
6. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the jacking position.
For example, if the right front wheel is
being changed, block the left rear wheel.
NOTE:
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
when the vehicle is being jacked.
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warn-
ings to help prevent personal injury or
damage to your vehicle:
• Always park on a firm, level surface as
far from the edge of the roadway as
possible before raising the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flashers.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the
wheel to be raised.
• Apply the parking brake firmly and shift
an automatic transmission in PARK; a
manual transmission to REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the
vehicle on a jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when
it is on a jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is
on a jack. If you need to get under a
raised vehicle, take it to a service center
where it can be raised on a lift.
• Only use the jack in the positions indi-
cated and for lifting this vehicle during a
tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be
extremely careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or in-
flated, are securely stowed, spares must
be stowed with the valve stem facing the
ground.
Wheel Blocked
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
204
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by
jacking on locations other than those indi-
cated.
1. Remove the spare tire, jack and tools from
the stored location.
2. Loosen (but do not remove) the wheel lug
nuts by turning them to the left one turn
while the wheel is still on the ground.
3. Assemble the jack and jacking tools. Con-
nect the jack handle driver to the exten-
sion, then to the lug wrench.
4. Operate the jack from the front or the rear
of the vehicle. Place the jack under the
axle tube, as shown. Do not raise the ve-
hicle until you are sure the jack is fully
engaged.
5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack
screw clockwise. Raise the vehicle only
until the tire just clears the surface and
enough clearance is obtained to install
the spare tire. Minimum tire lift provides
maximum stability.
Warning Label
Front Jack Engagement Location
Rear Jack Engagement Location
205
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary
can make the vehicle less stable. It could
slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.
Raise the vehicle only enough to remove
the tire.
6. Remove the lug nuts and wheel.
7. Position the spare wheel/tire on the ve-
hicle and install the lug nuts with the
cone-shaped end toward the wheel.
Lightly tighten the lug nuts clockwise.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
8. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack
screw to the left, and remove the jack.
9. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down
on the wrench while tightening for in-
creased leverage. Alternate nuts until
each nut has been tightened twice. Refer
to “Torque Specifications” in “Technical
Specifications” for correct lug nut torque.
10. Remove the jack assembly and wheel
blocks.
11. Secure the jack and tools in their proper
locations.
12. Secure the damaged wheel/tire on the
spare tire carrier. Torque down lug nuts
and locking lug nut.
13. Return the lock bolt to the lock position
on the camera cover by turning the lock
to the right using the provided #40 Torx
head driver and ratchet. Then, reinstall
the camera cover by slipping it over the
camera/tire carrier until it snaps into
place.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a
collision or hard stop, could endanger the
occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the
jack parts and the spare tire in the places
provided.
Road Tire Installation
1. Mount the road tire on the axle.
2. Install the remaining lug nuts with the
cone shaped end of the nut toward the
wheel. Lightly tighten the lug nuts.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the wheel nuts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
serious injury.
3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning
the jack handle counterclockwise.
4. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down
on the wrench while at the end of the
handle for increased leverage. Tighten the
lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut
has been tightened twice. For the correct
lug nut torque refer to “Torque Specifica-
tions” in “Technical Specifications”. If in
doubt about the correct tightness, have
them checked with a torque wrench by an
authorized dealer or service station.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
206
5. After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut
torque with a torque wrench to ensure that
all lug nuts are properly seated against the
wheel.
JUMP STARTING
If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it can
be jump started using a set of jumper cables
and a battery in another vehicle, or by using a
portable battery booster pack. Jump starting
can be dangerous if done improperly, so
please follow the procedures in this section
carefully.
WARNING!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery
is frozen. It could rupture or explode and
cause personal injury.
CAUTION!
Do not use a portable battery booster pack
or any other booster source with a system
voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to
the battery, starter motor, alternator or
electrical system may occur.
NOTE:
When using a portable battery booster pack,
follow the manufacturer's operating instruc-
tions and precautions.
Preparations For Jump Start
The battery in your vehicle is located in the
right rear of the engine compartment, behind
the Power Distribution Center.
NOTE:
The positive battery post is covered with a
protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain
access to the post.
Positive Battery Post
207
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling
fan whenever the hood is raised. It can
start anytime the ignition switch is ON.
You can be injured by moving fan
blades.
• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,
watch bands and bracelets that could
make an inadvertent electrical contact.
You could be seriously injured.
• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can
burn your skin or eyes and generate
hydrogen gas which is flammable and
explosive. Keep open flames or sparks
away from the battery.
1. Apply the parking brake, shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK (manual
transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn the
ignition OFF.
2. Apply the parking brake, shift the auto-
matic transmission into PARK and turn
the ignition OFF.
3. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnec-
essary electrical accessories.
4. If using another vehicle to jump start the
battery, park the vehicle within the
jumper cable’s reach, apply the parking
brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.
WARNING!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other
as this could establish a ground connec-
tion and personal injury could result.
Jump Starting Procedure
WARNING!
Failure to follow this jump starting proce-
dure could result in personal injury or
property damage due to battery explosion.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these procedures could re-
sult in damage to the charging system of the
booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle.
NOTE:
Make sure at all times that unused ends of
jumper cables are not contacting each other
or either vehicle while making connections.
Connecting The Jumper Cables
1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper
cable to the remote positive (+) post of the
discharged vehicle.
2. Connect the opposite end of the positive
(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
3. Connect the negative end (-) of the jumper
cable to the negative (-) post of the
booster battery.
4. Connect the opposite end of the negative
(-) jumper cable to a good engine ground
(exposed metal part of the discharged
vehicle’s engine) away from the battery
and the fuel injection system.
WARNING!
Do not connect the jumper cable to the
negative (-) post of the discharged battery.
The resulting electrical spark could cause
the battery to explode and could result in
personal injury. Only use the specific
ground point, do not use any other exposed
metal parts.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
208
5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the
booster battery, let the engine idle a few
minutes, and then start the engine in the
vehicle with the discharged battery.
CAUTION!
Do not run the booster vehicle engine
above 2,000 rpm since it provides no
charging benefit, wastes fuel, and can
damage booster vehicle engine.
6. Once the engine is started, remove the
jumper cables in the reverse sequence:
Disconnecting The Jumper Cables
1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the
jumper cable from the engine ground of
the vehicle with the discharged battery.
2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega-
tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)
post of the booster battery.
3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the
jumper cable from the positive (+) post of
the booster battery.
4. Disconnect the opposite end of the posi-
tive (+) jumper cable from the remote
positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
5. Reinstall the protective cover over the
remote positive (+) post of the discharged
vehicle.
If frequent jump starting is required to start
your vehicle you should have the battery and
charging system tested at an authorized
dealer.
CAUTION!
Accessories plugged into the vehicle
power outlets draw power from the vehi-
cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,
cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough without engine
operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis-
charge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent the engine from starting.
IF YOUR ENGINE
OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can
reduce the potential for overheating by taking
the appropriate action.
• On the highways — slow down.
• In city traffic — while stopped, shift trans-
mission into NEUTRAL, but do not increase
engine idle speed.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If the temperature
gauge reads HOT (H), pull over and stop
the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air
conditioner turned off until the pointer
drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on HOT (H), and you hear
continuous chimes, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
209
NOTE:
There are steps that you can take to slow
down an impending overheat condition:
• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.
The A/C system adds heat to the engine
cooling system and turning the A/C off can
help remove this heat.
• You can also turn the temperature control
to maximum heat, the mode control to floor
and the blower control to high. This allows
the heater core to act as a supplement to
the radiator and aids in removing heat from
the engine cooling system.
WARNING!
You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from
your radiator. If you see or hear steam
coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to
cool. Never try to open a cooling system
pressure cap when the radiator or coolant
bottle is hot.
MANUAL PARK RELEASE
WARNING!
Always secure your vehicle by fully apply-
ing the parking brake before activating the
Manual Park Release. In addition, you
should be seated in the driver’s seat with
your foot firmly on the brake pedal when
activating the Manual Park Release. Acti-
vating the Manual Park Release will allow
your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured
by the parking brake, or by proper connec-
tion to a tow vehicle. Activating the
Manual Park Release on an unsecured
vehicle could lead to serious injury or
death for those in or around the vehicle.
In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases
where the transmission will not shift out of
PARK (such as a dead battery), a Manual
Park Release is available.
Follow these steps to use the Manual Park
Release:
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Remove the manual park release cover,
located above the gear selector, to access
the release tether strap.
3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool,
fish the tether strap up through the open-
ing in the console base.
Manual Park Release Cover
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
210
4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the
brake pedal.
5. Pull the tether strap up and to the left
until the release lever locks into place in
the vertical position. The vehicle is now
out of PARK and can be moved. Release
the parking brake only when the vehicle is
securely connected to a tow vehicle.
To Reset The Manual Park Release:
1. Pull upward on the tether strap, releasing
it from the “locked” position.
2. Lower the Manual Park Release lever
downward and to the right, into its original
position.
3. Tuck the tether strap into the base of the
console, and reinstall the cover.
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or
snow, it can often be moved using a rocking
motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left
to clear the area around the front wheels. For
vehicles with automatic transmission, push
and hold the lock button on the gear selector.
Then, shift back and forth between DRIVE
and REVERSE (with automatic transmission)
or SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (with
manual transmission), while gently pressing
the accelerator. Use the least amount of ac-
celerator pedal pressure that will maintain
the rocking motion, without spinning the
wheels or racing the engine.
NOTE:
• For vehicles with automatic transmission:
Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can
only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmis-
sion remains in NEUTRAL for more than
2 seconds, you must press the brake pedal
to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.
• Push the "ESC Off" switch, to place the
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system in
"Partial Off" mode, before rocking the ve-
hicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control
System” in “Safety” in your Owner’s
Manual for further details. Once the vehicle
has been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch
again to restore "ESC On" mode.
Tether Strap
211
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause damage, or even failure,
of the axle and tires. A tire could explode
and injure someone. Do not spin your
vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph
(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you
are stuck and do not let anyone near a
spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
• Racing the engine or spinning the
wheels may lead to transmission over-
heating and failure. Allow the engine to
idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL
for at least one minute after every five
rocking-motion cycles. This will mini-
mize overheating and reduce the risk of
clutch or transmission failure during
prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.
• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shift-
ing between DRIVE/SECOND GEAR and
REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster
than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain
damage may result.
• Revving the engine or spinning the
wheels too fast may lead to transmission
overheating and failure. It can also dam-
age the tires. Do not spin the wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear
(no transmission shifting occurring).
TOWING A DISABLED
VEHICLE
This section describes procedures for towing
a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing
service. If the transmission and drivetrain are
operable, disabled vehicles may also be
towed as described under “Recreational Tow-
ing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
212
Towing Condition Wheels OFF The Ground 4WD MODELS
Flat Tow NONE
See instructions under “Recreational Towing”
in “Starting And Operating”.
• Automatic Transmission in PARK
• Manual Transmission in gear ( NOT in NEUTRAL)
• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL
• Tow in forward direction
Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow
Front
NOT ALLOWED
Rear
NOT ALLOWED
Flatbed
ALL BEST METHOD
Proper towing or lifting equipment is required
to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only
tow bars and other equipment designed for
this purpose, following equipment manufac-
turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is
mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing
device to main structural members of the
vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack-
ets. State and local laws regarding vehicles
under tow must be observed.
If you must use the accessories (wipers, de-
frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition
must be in the ON/RUN position, not the ACC
position.
If the vehicle's battery is discharged, refer to
"Manual Park Release" in this section for
instructions on shifting the automatic trans-
mission out of PARK in order to move the
vehicle.
CAUTION!
• Do not use sling type equipment when
towing. Vehicle damage may occur.
•
When securing the vehicle to a flatbed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspen-
sion components. Damage to your vehicle
may result from improper towing.
CAUTION!
• If the vehicle being towed requires steer-
ing, the ignition switch must be in the
ACC or ON/RUN mode, not in the OFF
mode.
Four–Wheel Drive Models
The manufacturer recommends towing with
all wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable meth-
ods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed or with
one end of the vehicle raised and the opposite
end on a towing dolly.
213
If flatbed equipment is not available and the
transfer case is operable, the vehicle may be
towed (in the forward direction, with ALL
wheels on the ground), IF the transfer case is
in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmission is in
PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear
(NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions).
Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting
And Operating” for detailed instructions.
CAUTION!
• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used
(if the remaining wheels are on the
ground). Internal damage to the trans-
mission or transfer case will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when
towing.
• Towing this vehicle in violation of the
above requirements can cause severe
transmission and/or transfer case dam-
age. Damage from improper towing is
not covered under the New Vehicle Lim-
ited Warranty.
Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped
If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks,
they are mounted in the front and the rear.
NOTE:
For off-road recovery, it is recommended to
use both of the front tow hooks to minimize
the risk of damage to the vehicle. Always use
an appropriately rated tow strap.
WARNING!
• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck
vehicle. Chains may break, causing seri-
ous injury or death.
• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling
with tow hooks. Tow straps may become
disengaged, causing serious injury.
CAUTION!
Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to
rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not
use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or
highway towing. You could damage your
vehicle. Tow straps are recommended
when towing the vehicle, chains may
cause vehicle damage.
ENHANCED ACCIDENT
RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)
This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced
Accident Response System.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Enhanced Accident Response System
(EARS) function.
EVENT DATA RECORDER
(EDR)
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data
Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR
is to record data that will assist in under-
standing how a vehicle’s systems performed
under certain crash or near crash-like situa-
tions, such as an air bag deployment or hit-
ting a road obstacle.
Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-
tems” in “Safety” for further information on
the Event Data Recorder (EDR).
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
214
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
SCHEDULED SERVICING ......216
Maintenance Plan ..............217
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle ......219
ENGINE COMPARTMENT .....220
2.0L Engine .................220
3.6L Engine .................221
Checking Oil Level .............222
Adding Washer Fluid ............222
Maintenance-Free Battery ........222
DEALER SERVICE ...........223
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......223
Windshield Wiper Blades .........225
Cooling System ...............227
Brake System ................228
Manual Transmission ...........229
Automatic Transmission ..........229
RAISINGTHEVEHICLE .......229
TIRES....................229
Tire Safety Information ..........229
Tires — General Information .......238
Tire Types ...................242
Spare Tires — If Equipped ........243
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .......244
Tire Chains (Traction Devices).......246
Tire Rotation Recommendations .....246
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES.......247
Treadwear ...................247
Traction Grades ...............247
Temperature Grades.............248
STORINGTHEVEHICLE ......248
BODYWORK...............248
Body And Underbody Maintenance . . .248
Preserving The Bodywork .........249
INTERIORS ................251
Seats And Fabric Parts ...........251
Plastic And Coated Parts..........251
Leather Parts.................252
Glass Surfaces ...............252
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
215
SCHEDULED SERVICING
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
oil change indicator system. The oil change
indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled
maintenance.
Based on engine operation conditions, the oil
change indicator message will illuminate.
This means that service is required for your
vehicle. Operating conditions such as fre-
quent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or
cold ambient temperatures will influence
when the “Change Oil” or “Oil Change Re-
quired” message is displayed. Severe Oper-
ating Conditions can cause the change oil
message to illuminate as early as
3,500 miles (5,600 km) since last reset.
Have your vehicle serviced as soon as pos-
sible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
On vehicles equipped with instrument cluster
display, “Oil Change Required” will be dis-
played and a single chime will sound, indi-
cating that an oil change is necessary.
On non-instrument cluster display equipped
vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash in the in-
strument cluster odometer and a single
chime will sound, indicating that an oil
change is necessary.
An authorized dealer will reset the oil change
indicator message after completing the
scheduled oil change. If a scheduled oil
change is performed by someone other than
an authorized dealer, the message can be
reset by referring to the steps described un-
der “Instrument Cluster Display” in “Getting
To Know Your Instrument Panel” for further
information.
NOTE:
Under no circumstances should oil change
intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),
twelve months or 350 hours of engine run
time, whichever comes first. The 350 hours
of engine run or idle time is generally only a
concern for fleet customers.
Severe Duty All Models
Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles
(6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time
if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off
road environment or is operated predomi-
nately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s.
This type of vehicle use is considered Severe
Duty.
Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:
• Check engine oil level
• Check windshield washer fluid level
• Check the tire inflation pressures and look
for unusual wear or damage
• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser-
voir, brake master cylinder, and power
steering, and fill as needed
• Check function of all interior and exterior
lights
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
216
Maintenance Plan
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the maintenance plan on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
•
Change oil and filter
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
•
Rotate the tires
Rotate at the first sign of irregular wear, even
if it occurs before the oil indicator system
turns on
• Inspect battery and clean and tighten ter-
minals as required
• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,
hoses and park brake
At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By
Oil Change Indicator System:
• Inspect engine cooling system protection
and hoses
•
Inspect exhaust system
• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty
or off-road conditions
• Inspect all door latches for presence of
grease, reapply if necessary.
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Additional Inspections
Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X X X
Inspect front suspension, tie rod ends,
and replace if necessary.
XXX X X X X
Inspect the front and rear axle fluid. X X X X
Inspect the brake linings, replace as
necessary
XXX X X X X
Adjust parking brake on vehicles equipped
with four wheel disc brakes.
XXX X X X X
217
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X
Additional Maintenance
Replace engine air cleaner filter. X X X X X
Replace air conditioning/cabin air filter. X X X X X X X
Replace Spark Plugs – 2.0L Engine** X X
Replace spark plugs – 3.6L Engine** X
Flush and replace the engine, intercooler
(if equipped), battery (if equipped), and
Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (if equipped)
coolant at 10 years or 150,000 miles
(240,000 km) whichever comes first.
XX
Change the manual transmission fluid if
using your vehicle for any of the following:
trailer towing, snow plowing, heavy loading,
taxi, police, delivery service (commercial
service), off-road, desert operation or more
than 50% of your driving is at sustained
high speeds during hot weather, above 90°F
(32°C).
XX X X X
Change transfer case fluid if using your
vehicle for any of the following: police, taxi,
fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
XX
Inspect and replace PCV valve if necessary. X
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
218
Mileage or time passed
(whichever comes first)
20,000
30,000
40,000
50,000
60,000
70,000
80,000
90,000
100,000
110,000
120,000
130,000
140,000
150,000
Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
Or Kilometers:
32,000
48,000
64,000
80,000
96,000
112,000
128,000
144,000
160,000
176,000
192,000
208,000
224,000
240,000
Change front and rear axle fluid if using
your vehicle for police, taxi, fleet, off-road or
frequent trailer towing.
XX X
**
The spark plug change interval is mileage
based only, yearly intervals do not apply.
WARNING!
• You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Do only service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the right equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a com-
petent mechanic.
• Failure to properly inspect and maintain
your vehicle could result in a component
malfunction and effect vehicle handling
and performance. This could cause an
accident.
Heavy Duty Use Of The Vehicle
Change engine oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km)
or 350 hours of engine run time if the vehicle
is operated in a dusty and off road environ-
ment or is operated predominately at idle or
only very low engine RPM’s. This type of
vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.
219
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
2.0L Engine
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped
2 — Battery 9 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Reservoir — If Equipped
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit (If Equipped) Coolant Pressure Cap
5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 12 — Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit (If Equipped) Coolant Reservoir
6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 13 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 14 — Engine Air Cleaner
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
220
3.6L Engine
1 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Cap — If Equipped
2 — Battery 9 — Power Pack Unit Pressure Reservoir — If Equipped
3 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Washer Fluid Reservoir
4 — Engine Oil Fill 11 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Pressure Cap — If Equipped
5 — Engine Coolant Reservoir 12 — Motor Generator Unit Coolant Reservoir — If Equipped
6 — Engine Coolant Pressure Cap 13 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
7 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 14 — Engine Air Cleaner
221
Checking Oil Level
To ensure proper lubrication of your vehicle's
engine, the engine oil must be maintained at
the correct level. The engine oil level should
be checked five minutes after a warmed up
engine has been shut off.
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level
ground will improve the accuracy of the oil
level readings. Always maintain the oil level
within the SAFE zone on the dipstick. Adding
1 quart (0.95 liters) of oil when the reading is
at the bottom of the crosshatch zone will
result in a reading at the top of the cross-
hatch zone on these engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase
will cause aeration or loss of oil pressure.
This could damage your engine.
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers
and the rear window washer (if equipped) is
shared. The fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment. Be sure to check the
fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reser-
voir with windshield washer solvent only (not
radiator antifreeze). When refilling the
washer fluid reservoir, take some washer fluid
and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe clean
the wiper blades; this will help blade perfor-
mance.
To prevent freeze-up of your windshield
washer system in cold weather, select a solu-
tion or mixture that meets or exceeds the
temperature range of your climate. This rat-
ing information can be found on most washer
fluid containers.
WARNING!
Commercial windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn
you. Care must be exercised when filling or
working around the washer solution.
Maintenance-Free Battery
Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-
free battery. You will never have to add water,
nor is periodic maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution
and can burn or even blind you. Do not
allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,
skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the
area immediately with large amounts of
water. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce-
dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for
further information.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.
Keep flame or sparks away from the
battery. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
• Battery posts, terminals, and related ac-
cessories contain lead and lead com-
pounds. Wash hands after handling.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
222
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables
on the battery that the positive cable is
attached to the positive post and the
negative cable is attached to the nega-
tive post. Battery posts are marked posi-
tive (+) and negative (-) and are identi-
fied on the battery case. Cable clamps
should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion.
• If a “fast charger” is used while the
battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both
vehicle battery cables before connecting
the charger to the battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting volt-
age.
DEALER SERVICE
An authorized dealer has the qualified service
personnel, special tools, and equipment to
perform all service operations in an expert
manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your
vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals be-
fore attempting any procedure yourself.
NOTE:
Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems may void your warranty and could
result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or
around a motor vehicle. Only do service
work for which you have the knowledge
and the proper equipment. If you have any
doubt about your ability to perform a ser-
vice job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air con-
ditioner should be checked and serviced by
an authorized dealer at the start of each warm
season. This service should include cleaning
of the condenser fins and a performance test.
Drive belt tension should also be checked at
this time.
WARNING!
• Use only refrigerants and compressor
lubricants approved by the manufac-
turer for your air conditioning system.
Some unapproved refrigerants are flam-
mable and can explode, injuring you.
Other unapproved refrigerants or lubri-
cants can cause the system to fail, re-
quiring costly repairs. Refer to Warranty
Information Book, located in your own-
er’s information kit, for further warranty
information.
• The air conditioning system contains re-
frigerant under high pressure. To avoid
risk of personal injury or damage to the
system, adding refrigerant or any repair
requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced tech-
nician.
CAUTION!
Do not use chemical flushes in your air
conditioning system as the chemicals can
damage your air conditioning components.
223
CAUTION!
Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Air Conditioning Filter Replacement
(A/C Air Filter)
WARNING!
Do not remove the cabin air filter while the
vehicle is running, or while the ignition is
in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. With the
cabin air filter removed and the blower
operating, the blower can contact hands
and may propel dirt and debris into your
eyes, resulting in personal injury.
The A/C air filter is located in the fresh air
inlet behind the glove compartment. Perform
the following procedure to replace the filter:
1. Open the glove compartment and remove
all contents.
2. Push up on the glove compartment travel
stop and lower the door.
3. Pivot the glove compartment downward.
4. Disengage the two retaining tabs that se-
cure the air filter access door to the HVAC
housing.
Glove Compartment Travel Stop
Air Filter Retaining Tabs
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
224
5. Remove the air filter from the HVAC air
inlet housing. Pull the filter elements out
pinching them to the right for clearance.
6. Install the A/C air filter with the air filter
position indicators pointing in the same
direction as removal.
CAUTION!
The cabin air filter is identified with an
arrow to indicate airflow direction through
the filter. Failure to properly install the
filter will result in the need to replace it
more often.
7. Close A/C Air Filter access door and se-
cure retaining tabs.
8. Rotate the glove compartment door back
into position ensuring you have properly
engaged the travel damper.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this sec-
tion for the proper maintenance intervals.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades
and the windshield periodically with a sponge
or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner.
This will remove accumulations of salt or road
film.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long
periods may cause deterioration of the wiper
blades. Always use washer fluid when using
the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry
windshield.
Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost
or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade
rubber out of contact with petroleum prod-
ucts such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.
NOTE:
Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de-
pending on geographical area and frequency
of use. Poor performance of blades may be
present with chattering, marks, water lines or
wet spots. If any of these conditions are
present, clean the wiper blades or replace as
necessary.
Air Filter
225
The wiper blades and wiper arms should be
inspected periodically, not just when wiper
performance problems are experienced. This
inspection should include the following
points:
• Wear or uneven edges
• Foreign material
• Hardening or cracking
• Deformation or fatigue
If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged,
replace the affected wiper arm or blade with
a new unit. Do not attempt to repair a wiper
arm or blade that is damaged.
Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
CAUTION!
Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back
against the glass without the wiper blade
in place or the glass may be damaged.
1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade
off of the glass, until the wiper arm is in
the full up position.
2. To disengage the wiper blade from the
wiper arm, raise the cover, press the re-
lease tab on the wiper blade and while
holding the wiper arm with one hand,
slide the wiper blade down towards the
base of the wiper arm.
3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove
the wiper blade from the wiper arm.
4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.
Installing The Front Wipers
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until
the wiper arm is in the full up position.
2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on
the tip of the wiper arm.
3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm
through the opening in the wiper blade.
4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on
the wiper arm, latch engagement will be
accompanied by an audible click then
close the cover.
5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the
glass.
Wiper Blade With Release Tab
In Locked Position
1 — Wiper Blade
2 — Cover
3 — Release Tab
4 — Wiper Arm
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
226
Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation
1. Open tailgate to access the wiper arm.
2. Lift wiper arm off of the glass and rotate
wiper blade outward to disengage the
wiper blade from the wiper arm.
3. Gently set the arm on the glass.
Installing The Rear Wiper
1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass.
2. Insert the wiper blade pivot pin into the
opening on the end of the wiper arm and
rotate the wiper in to place.
3. Place with wiper on the glass and close
the tail gate.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• You or others can be badly burned by hot
engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam
from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do
not open the hood until the radiator has
had time to cool. Never open a cooling
system pressure cap when the radiator or
coolant bottle is hot.
• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry
away from the radiator cooling fan when
the hood is raised. The fan starts auto-
matically and may start at any time,
whether the engine is running or not.
• When working near the radiator cooling
fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or
turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The
fan is temperature controlled and can
start at any time the ignition is in the ON
mode.
Rear Wiper Assembly
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Arm
2 — Wiper Blade
Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm
1 — Wiper Blade Pivot Pin
2 — Wiper Arm Receptacle
227
Coolant Checks
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), in-
tercooler (if equipped), and Motor Generator
Unit (MGU) (if equipped) coolant (antifreeze)
protection every 12 months (before the onset
of freezing weather, where applicable). If the
engine, battery (if equipped), intercooler (if
equipped), and MGU (if equipped) coolant
(antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appearance,
the system should be drained, flushed and
refilled with fresh OAT coolant (conforming to
MS.90032) by an authorized dealer. Check
the front of the A/C condenser (if equipped)
or radiator for any accumulation of bugs,
leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently spraying
water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the
back of the radiator core.
Check the engine, battery (if equipped), inter-
cooler (if equipped), and MGU (if equipped)
cooling system hoses for brittle rubber, crack-
ing, tears, cuts, and tightness of the connection
at the coolant recovery bottle and radiator. In-
spect the entire system for leaks. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN
THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance,
all brake system components should be in-
spected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte-
nance Plan” in this section for the proper
maintenance intervals.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure
and possibly a collision. Driving with your
foot resting or riding on the brake pedal
can result in abnormally high brake tem-
peratures, excessive lining wear, and pos-
sible brake damage. You would not have
your full braking capacity in an emergency.
Fluid Level Check — Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level of the master cylinder should
be checked whenever the vehicle is serviced,
or immediately if the brake system warning
light is on. If necessary, add fluid to bring
level within the designated marks on the side
of the reservoir of the brake master cylinder.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylin-
der area before removing cap.
With disc brakes, fluid level can be expected
to fall as the brake pads wear. Brake fluid
level should be checked when pads are re-
placed. If the brake fluid is abnormally low,
check the system for leaks.
Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Techni-
cal Specifications” for further information.
WARNING!
• Use only manufacturer's recommended
brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-
cants” in “Technical Specifications” for
further information. Using the wrong
type of brake fluid can severely damage
your brake system and/or impair its per-
formance. The proper type of brake fluid
for your vehicle is also identified on the
original factory installed hydraulic mas-
ter cylinder reservoir.
• To avoid contamination from foreign
matter or moisture, use only new brake
fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly
closed container. Keep the master cylin-
der reservoir cap secured at all times.
Brake fluid in a open container absorbs
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
228
WARNING!
moisture from the air resulting in a lower
boiling point. This may cause it to boil
unexpectedly during hard or prolonged
braking, resulting in sudden brake fail-
ure. This could result in a collision.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot en-
gine parts, causing the brake fluid to
catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage
painted and vinyl surfaces, care should
be taken to avoid its contact with these
surfaces.
• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to
contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal
components could be damaged, causing
partial or complete brake failure. This
could result in a collision.
Manual Transmission
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill
plug. The fluid level should be between the
bottom of the fill hole and a point not more
than 3/16 of an inch (4.76 mm) below the
bottom of the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper
level.
Automatic Transmission
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level is preset at the factory and
does not require adjustment under normal
operating conditions. Routine fluid level
checks are not required; therefore the trans-
mission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer
can check your transmission fluid level using
special service tools. If you notice fluid leak-
age or transmission malfunction, visit an au-
thorized dealer immediately to have the
transmission fluid level checked. Operating
the vehicle with an improper fluid level can
cause severe transmission damage.
CAUTION!
If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an
authorized dealer immediately. Severe
transmission damage may occur. An au-
thorized dealer has the proper tools to
adjust the fluid level accurately.
RAISING THE VEHICLE
In the case where it is necessary to raise the
vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service
station.
TIRES
Tire Safety Information
Tire safety information will cover aspects of
the following information: Tire Markings, Tire
Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and
Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.
229
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based
on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires
have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation.
Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European — Metric tire sizing is based on
European design standards. Tires designed
to this standard have the tire size molded
into the sidewall beginning with the section
width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire
size designation.
Example: 215/65R15 96H.
• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is
based on U.S. design standards. The size
designation for LT-Metric tires is the same
as for P-Metric tires except for the letters
“LT” that are molded into the sidewall
preceding the size designation.
Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are designed for tem-
porary emergency use only. Temporary high
pressure compact spare tires have the letter
“T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation.
Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards and it begins with the tire
diameter molded into the sidewall.
Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Tire Markings
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
230
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or
"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or
TorS= Temporary spare tire or
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
•
Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
•
"R" means radial construction, or
• "D" means diagonal or bias construction
15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
•
A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
231
EXAMPLE:
Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT
H = Speed Symbol
•
A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions
• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle
loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:
•
XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or
• LL = Light load tire or
• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of
the tire; however, the date code may only be
on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will
have the full TIN, including the date code,
located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black
sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If
the TIN is not found on the outboard side,
then you will find it on the inboard side of the
tire.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
232
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for
highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
03 means the 3rd week
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
•
01 means the year 2001
• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured.
Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
233
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition
B-Pillar
The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front
door.
Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting
for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds
per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).
Maximum Inflation Pressure
The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation
pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.
Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure
Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the
tire placard.
Tire Placard
A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,
the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
234
Tire Loading And Tire Pressure
NOTE:
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear
edge of the driver's side door.
Check the inflation pressure of each tire,
including the spare tire (if equipped), at least
monthly and inflate to the recommended
pressure for your vehicle.
Tire And Loading Information Placard
This placard tells you important information
about the:
1. Number of people that can be carried in
the vehicle.
2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.
3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.
4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,
rear, and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must
not exceed the load carrying capacity of the
tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the
tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to
the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and
Loading Information placard in “Vehicle
Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”
section of your Owner’s Manual.
NOTE:
Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the
front and rear axles must not be exceeded.
Example Tire Placard Location (Door)
Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)
Tire And Loading Information Placard
235
To determine the maximum loading condi-
tions of your vehicle, locate the statement
“The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”
on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/
luggage and trailer tongue weight (if appli-
cable) should never exceed the weight refer-
enced here.
Steps For Determining Correct
Load Limit—
(1) Locate the statement “The com-
bined weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or
XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.
(2) Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will be
riding in your vehicle.
(3) Subtract the combined weight of
the driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lbs.
(4) The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage
load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there
will be five 150 lb passengers in your
vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.
(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)
(5) Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity calculated in Step
4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a
trailer, load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and lug-
gage load capacity of your vehicle.
Metric Example For Load Limit
For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg
and there will be five 68 kg passengers in
your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-
340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.
NOTE:
• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load
from your trailer will be transferred to your
vehicle. The following table shows ex-
amples on how to calculate total load,
cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of
your vehicle with varying seating configura-
tions and number and size of occupants.
This table is for illustration purposes only
and may not be accurate for the seating and
load carry capacity of your vehicle.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
236
• For the following example, the combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).
237
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous.
Overloading can cause tire failure, affect
vehicle handling, and increase your stop-
ping distance. Use tires of the recom-
mended load capacity for your vehicle.
Never overload them.
Tires — General Information
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to
the safe and satisfactory operation of your
vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by
improper tire pressure:
• Safety and Vehicle Stability
• Economy
• Tread Wear
• Ride Comfort
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous
and can cause collisions.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and
can result in overheating and tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to
cushion shock. Objects on the road and
chuckholes can cause damage that re-
sult in tire failure.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can
affect vehicle handling and can fail sud-
denly, resulting in loss of vehicle con-
trol.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steer-
ing problems. You could lose control of
your vehicle.
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of
the vehicle to the other can cause the
vehicle to drift to the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to
the recommended cold tire inflation
pressure.
Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect
the stability of the vehicle and can produce a
feeling of sluggish response or over respon-
siveness in the steering.
NOTE:
• Unequal tire pressures from side to side
may cause erratic and unpredictable steer-
ing response.
• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may
cause the vehicle to drift left or right.
Fuel Economy
Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling
resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-
tion.
Tread Wear
Improper cold tire inflation pressures can
cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced
tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire
replacement.
Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-
able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring
and uncomfortable ride.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
238
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is
listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge
of the driver's side door.
At least once a month:
• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good
quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not
make a visual judgement when determining
proper inflation. Tires may look properly
inflated even when they are under-inflated.
• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible
damage.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-
sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.
This will prevent moisture and dirt from
entering the valve stem, which could dam-
age the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard
are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold
tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven
for at least three hours, or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of
three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure
must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to
a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire
pressures vary with temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi
(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature
change. Keep this in mind when checking tire
pressure inside a garage, especially in the
Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F
(20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F
(0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure
should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which
equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for
this outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi
(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT
reduce this normal pressure build up or your
tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe
speeds and within posted speed limits. Where
speed limits or conditions are such that the
vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain-
ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-
tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced ve-
hicle loading may be required for high-speed
vehicle operation. Refer to an authorized tire
dealer or original equipment vehicle dealer for
recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under
maximum load is dangerous. The added
strain on your tires could cause them to
fail. You could have a serious collision. Do
not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum
capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
239
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types
of tires on your vehicle will cause your
vehicle to handle poorly. The instability
could cause a collision. Always use radial
ply tires in sets of four. Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Tire Repair
If your tire becomes damaged, it may be
repaired if it meets the following criteria:
• The tire has not been driven on when flat.
• The damage is only on the tread section of
your tire (sidewall damage is not repair-
able).
• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofan
inch (6 mm).
Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire re-
pairs and additional information.
Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that
have experienced a loss of pressure should be
replaced immediately with another Run Flat
tire of identical size and service description
(Load Index and Speed Symbol).
Run Flat Tires — If Equipped
Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive
50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after
a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid
loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat
mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire
inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi
(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the
run flat mode it has limited driving capabili-
ties and needs to be replaced immediately. A
Run Flat tire is not repairable.
It is not recommended driving a vehicle
loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while
a tire is in the run flat mode.
See the tire pressure monitoring section for
more information.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice con-
ditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels
above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than
30 seconds continuously without stopping.
Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In
Case Of Emergency” for further information.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.
Forces generated by excessive wheel
speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A
tire could explode and injure someone. Do
not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 sec-
onds continuously when you are stuck,
and do not let anyone near a spinning
wheel, no matter what the speed.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
240
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original
equipment tires to help you in determining
when your tires should be replaced.
These indicators are molded into the bottom
of the tread grooves. They will appear as
bands when the tread depth becomes a
1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is
worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire
should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement
Tires” in this section for further information.
Life Of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon
varying factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style.
• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation
pressures can cause uneven wear patterns
to develop across the tire tread. These ab-
normal wear patterns will reduce tread life,
resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-
ment.
• Distance driven.
• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating
of V or higher, and Summer tires typically
have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these
tires per the vehicle scheduled mainte-
nance is highly recommended.
WARNING!
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced
after six years, regardless of the remaining
tread. Failure to follow this warning can
result in sudden tire failure. You could lose
control and have a collision resulting in
serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Wheel Valve Stem must be replaced as well
when installing new tires due to wear and tear
in existing tires.
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease,
and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a bal-
ance of many characteristics. They should be
inspected regularly for wear and correct cold
tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer
strongly recommends that you use tires
equivalent to the originals in size, quality and
performance when replacement is needed.
Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indi-
cators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and
Loading Information placard or the Vehicle
Certification Label for the size designation of
your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol
for your tire will be found on the original
equipment tire sidewall.
Tire Tread
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
241
See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in
the “Tire Safety Information” section of this
manual for more information relating to the
Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.
It is recommended to replace the two front
tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just
one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make
sure that the wheel’s specifications match
those of the original wheels.
It is recommended you contact an authorized
tire dealer or original equipment dealer with
any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability. Failure to use equiva-
lent replacement tires may adversely affect
the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,
or speed rating other than that specified
for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may
change suspension dimensions and per-
formance characteristics, resulting in
changes to steering, handling, and brak-
WARNING!
ing of your vehicle. This can cause un-
predictable handling and stress to steer-
ing and suspension components. You
could lose control and have a collision
resulting in serious injury or death. Use
only the tire and wheel sizes with load
ratings approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index
or capacity, other than what was origi-
nally equipped on your vehicle. Using a
tire with a smaller load index could re-
sult in tire overloading and failure. You
could lose control and have a collision.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires
having adequate speed capability can
result in sudden tire failure and loss of
vehicle control.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a
different size may result in false speedom-
eter and odometer readings.
Tire Types
All Season Tires — If Equipped
All Season tires provide traction for all sea-
sons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).
Traction levels may vary between different all
season tires. All season tires can be identi-
fied by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designa-
tion on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires
only in sets of four; failure to do so may
adversely affect the safety and handling of
your vehicle.
Summer Or Three Season Tires —
If Equipped
Summer tires provide traction in both wet
and dry conditions, and are not intended to
be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is
equipped with Summer tires, be aware these
tires are not designed for Winter or cold
driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your
vehicle when ambient temperatures are less
than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with
ice or snow. For more information, contact an
authorized dealer.
Summer tires do not contain the all season
designation or mountain/snowflake symbol
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
242
on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in
sets of four; failure to do so may adversely
affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
WARNING!
Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice con-
ditions. You could lose vehicle control,
resulting in severe injury or death. Driving
too fast for conditions also creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Snow Tires
Some areas of the country require the use of
snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can
be identified by a “mountain/snowflake”
symbol on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires,
select tires equivalent
in size and type to the
original equipment
tires. Use snow tires
only in sets of four;
failure to do so may
adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings
than what was originally equipped with your
vehicle and should not be operated at sus-
tained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For
speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to
original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating
speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pres-
sures.
While studded tires improve performance on
ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry
surfaces may be poorer than that of non-
studded tires. Some states prohibit studded
tires; therefore, local laws should be checked
before using these tire types.
Spare Tires — If Equipped
For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit
instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire
Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in the
Owner’s Manual for further information.
CAUTION!
Because of the reduced ground clearance,
do not take your vehicle through an auto-
matic car wash with a compact or limited
use temporary spare installed. Damage to
the vehicle may result.
Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire
And Wheel — If Equipped
Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare
tire and wheel equivalent in look and function
to the original equipment tire and wheel
found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.
This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation
for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this op-
tion, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the
recommended tire rotation pattern.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. You can identify if your ve-
hicle is equipped with a compact spare by
looking at the spare tire description on the
Tire and Loading Information Placard located
on the driver’s side door opening or on the
243
sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de-
scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”
preceding the size designation. Example:
T145/80D18 103M.
T,S=Temporary Spare Tire
Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original equipment tire should be repaired (or
replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at
the first opportunity.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to
mount a conventional tire on the compact
spare wheel, since the wheel is designed
specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not
install more than one compact spare tire and
wheel on the vehicle at any given time.
WARNING!
Compact and collapsible spares are for
temporary emergency use only. With these
spares, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have
limited tread life. When the tread is worn
to the tread wear indicators, the temporary
use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be
sure to follow the warnings, which apply to
WARNING!
your spare. Failure to do so could result in
spare tire failure and loss of vehicle con-
trol.
Full Size Spare — If Equipped
The full size spare is for temporary emer-
gency use only. This tire may look like the
originally equipped tire on the front or rear
axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare
tire may have limited tread life. When the
tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the
temporary use full size spare tire needs to be
replaced. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary
emergency use only. This tire is identified by
a label located on the limited use spare
wheel. This label contains the driving limita-
tions for this spare. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle
of your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of
this limited use spare tire affects vehicle
handling. Since it is not the same as your
original equipment tire, replace (or repair)
the original equipment tire and reinstall on
the vehicle at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Limited use spares are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,
do not drive more than the speed listed on
the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated
to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on
your Tire and Loading Information Placard
located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the
rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace
(or repair) the original equipment tire at
the first opportunity and reinstall it on your
vehicle. Failure to do so could result in
loss of vehicle control.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi-
num and chrome plated wheels, should be
cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph)
soap and water to maintain their luster and to
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
244
prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the
same soap solution recommended for the
body of the vehicle and remember to always
wash when the surfaces are not hot to the
touch.
Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration
caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium
chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other
road chemicals used to melt ice or control
dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge
and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not
use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can
damage the wheel’s protective coating that
helps keep them from corroding and
tarnishing.
CAUTION!
Avoid products or automatic car washes
that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline
additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermar-
ket wheel cleaners and automatic car
washes may damage the wheel's protective
finish. Such damage is not covered by the
New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car
wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or
equivalent is recommended.
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includ-
ing excessive brake dust, care must be taken
in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning
chemicals and equipment to prevent damage
to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or
Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is
recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-
acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome
wheels.
CAUTION!
Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a
bristle brush, metal polishes or oven
cleaner. These products may damage the
wheel's protective finish. Such damage is
not covered by the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar
Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-
mended.
NOTE:
If you intend parking or storing your vehicle
for an extended period after cleaning the
wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle
and apply the brakes to remove the water
droplets from the brake components. This
activity will remove the red rust on the brake
rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when
braking.
Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome,
or Low Gloss Clear Coat Wheels
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with these
specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel
cleaners, abrasives, or polishing com-
pounds. They will permanently damage
this finish and such damage is not covered
by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP
AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used
on a regular basis; this is all that is re-
quired to maintain this finish.
245
Tire Chains (Traction Devices)
Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-
to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-
dations to guard against damage.
• Traction device must be of proper size for
the tire, as recommended by the traction
device manufacturer.
• Install on Rear Tires Only.
• P225/75R16 or a P235/65R17 tire with
the use of a traction device that meets the
SAE type “Class S” specification is
recommended.
WARNING!
Using tires of different size and type
(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles
can cause unpredictable handling. You
could lose control and have a collision.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,
observe the following precautions:
CAUTION!
• Because of restricted traction device
clearance between tires and other sus-
pension components, it is important
that only traction devices in good condi-
tion are used. Broken devices can cause
serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-
diately if noise occurs that could indi-
cate device breakage. Remove the dam-
aged parts of the device before further
use.
• Install device as tightly as possible and
then retighten after driving about ½ mile
(0.8 km).
• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).
• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns
and large bumps, especially with a
loaded vehicle.
• Do not drive for a prolonged period on
dry pavement.
• Observe the traction device manufactur-
er’s instructions on the method of instal-
lation, operating speed, and conditions
for use. Always use the suggested oper-
ating speed of the device manufacturer’s
if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).
CAUTION!
• Do not use traction devices on a com-
pact spare tire.
Tire Rotation Recommendations
The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle
operate at different loads and perform differ-
ent steering, handling, and braking func-
tions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal
rates.
These effects can be reduced by timely rota-
tion of tires. The benefits of rotation are
especially worthwhile with aggressive tread
designs such as those on On/Off Road type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to
maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels,
and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.
Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” for the
proper maintenance intervals. The reasons
for any rapid or unusual wear should be
corrected prior to rotation being performed.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
246
The suggested rotation method is the
“rearward-cross” shown in the following
diagram.
CAUTION!
Proper operation of four-wheel drive ve-
hicles depends on tires of equal size, type
and circumference on each wheel. Any
difference in tire size can cause damage to
the transfer case. Tire rotation schedule
should be followed to balance tire wear.
DEPARTMENT OF
TRANSPORTATION
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY
GRADES
The following tire grading categories
were established by the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the
tire's manufacturer in each category is
shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger vehicle tires must con-
form to Federal safety requirements in
addition to these grades.
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative
rating, based on the wear rate of the
tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test
course. For example, a tire graded
150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100. The rela-
tive performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their
use, however, and may depart signifi-
cantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices,
and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to
lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These
grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement, as measured
under controlled conditions on speci-
fied government test surfaces of as-
phalt and concrete. A tire marked C
may have poor traction performance.
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this
tire is based on straight-ahead brak-
ing traction tests, and does not in-
Tire Rotation
247
WARNING!
clude acceleration, cornering, hy-
droplaning, or peak traction charac-
teristics.
Temperature Grades
The Temperature grades are A (the
highest), B, and C, representing the
tire's resistance to the generation of
heat and its ability to dissipate heat,
when tested under controlled condi-
tions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance, which all pas-
senger vehicle tires must meet under
the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-
dard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-
sent higher levels of performance on
the laboratory test wheel, than the
minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire
is established for a tire that is prop-
erly inflated and not overloaded. Ex-
cessive speed, under-inflation, or
excessive loading, either separately
or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
STORING THE VEHICLE
If you are storing your vehicle for more than
21 days, we recommend that you take the
following steps to minimize the drain on your
vehicle's battery:
• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.
• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it
out of service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks
or more, run the air conditioning system at
idle for about five minutes in the fresh air
and high blower setting. This will ensure
adequate system lubrication to minimize
the possibility of compressor damage when
the system is started again.
BODYWORK
Body And Underbody Maintenance
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle is equipped with plastic head-
lights and fog lights that are lighter and less
susceptible to stone breakage than glass
headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and
therefore different lens cleaning procedures
must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the
lenses and reducing light output, avoid wip-
ing with a dry cloth. To remove road dirt, wash
with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components,
solvents, steel wool or other aggressive mate-
rial to clean the lenses.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
248
Preserving The Bodywork
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash
your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car
Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse
the panels completely with clear water.
• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have
accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar
Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to re-
move.
• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as
Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,
stains and to protect your paint finish. Take
care never to scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power
buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin
out the paint finish.
CAUTION!
• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning
materials such as steel wool or scouring
powder that will scratch metal and
painted surfaces.
CAUTION!
• Use of power washers exceeding
1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in
damage or removal of paint and decals.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you
drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-
riage at least once a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the
lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and
trunk be kept clear and open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in
the paint, touch them up immediately. The
cost of such repairs is considered the re-
sponsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision
or similar cause that destroys the paint and
protective coating, have your vehicle re-
paired as soon as possible. The cost of such
repairs is considered the responsibility of
the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemi-
cals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure
that such materials are well packaged and
sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,
consider mud or stone shields behind each
wheel.
• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as
soon as possible. An authorized dealer has
touch up paint to match the color of your
vehicle.
Appearance Care For Fabric Top Models
To maintain the appearance of your vehicle's
interior trim and top, follow these precau-
tions:
• Avoid leaving your vehicle unattended with
the top down, as exposure to sun or rain
may damage interior trim.
• Do not use harsh cleaners or bleaching
agents on top material, as damage may
result.
• Do not allow any vinyl cleaner to run down
and dry on the paint, leaving a streak.
249
• After cleaning your vehicle's fabric top,
always make sure it is completely dry be-
fore lowering.
• Be especially careful when washing the
windows by following the directions for
“Care of Fabric Top Windows.”
Washing – Use Mopar Car Wash or equivalent,
or mild soap suds, lukewarm water, and a
brush with soft bristles. If extra cleaning is
required, use Mopar Convertible Cloth Top
Cleaner or equivalent, or a mild foaming
cleaner on the entire top, but support the top
from underneath.
Rinsing – Be sure to remove all traces of
cleaner by rinsing the top thoroughly with
clean water. Remember to allow the top to dry
before lowering it.
CAUTION!
Failure to follow these cautions may cause
interior water damage, stains or mildew on
the top material:
• Avoid high-pressure car washes, as they
can damage the top material. Also, in-
creased water pressure may force past
the weather strips.
• It is recommended that the top be free of
water prior to opening it. Operating the
top, opening a door or lowering a window
while the top is wet may allow water to
drip into the vehicle's interior.
• Use care when washing the vehicle, wa-
ter pressure directed at the weather strip
seals may cause water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
• Careless handling and storage of the
removable roof panels may damage the
seals, causing water to leak into the
vehicle's interior.
• The front panel(s) must be positioned
properly to ensure sealing. Improper in-
stallation can cause water to leak into
the vehicle's interior.
Care Of Fabric Top Windows
Your vehicle's fabric top has pliable plastic
windows which can be scratched unless spe-
cial care is taken by following these direc-
tions:
• Never use a dry cloth to remove dust. In-
stead, use a microfiber towel or soft cotton
cloth moistened with cold or warm, clean
water, and wipe across the window, not up
and down. Mopar Jeep Soft Glass Window
Cleaner or equivalent will safely clean all
plastic windows without scratching. It re-
moves fine scratches to improve visibility
and provides UV protection to help prevent
yellowing.
• When washing, never use hot water or any-
thing stronger than a mild soap. Never use
solvents such as alcohol or harsh cleaning
agents.
• Always rinse thoroughly with cold water,
then wipe with a soft and slightly moist,
clean cloth.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
250
• When removing frost, snow or ice, never use
a scraper or de-icing chemicals. Use warm
water only if you must clean the window
quickly.
• Debris (sand, mud/dirt, dust, or salt) from
off-road driving will have an impact on
plastic retainer operation. Even normal on-
road driving and vehicle washing will even-
tually impact window plastic retainer op-
eration. To maintain ease of use of the
window plastic retainers, each window
plastic retainer should be cleaned and lu-
bricated regularly. Clean them with a mild
soap solution and a small brush. Cleaning
products are available through an autho-
rized dealer.
• Never paste stickers, gummed labels or any
tape to the windows. Adhesives are hard to
remove and may damage the windows.
INTERIORS
Seats And Fabric Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-
stery and carpeting.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning
purposes. Many are potentially flammable,
and if used in closed areas they may cause
respiratory harm.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with
chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This
will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also
weaken the fabric.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap
solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove
the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry
with a soft cloth.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or
worn or if the buckles do not work properly.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a
collision and leave you with no protection.
Inspect the belt system periodically,
checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-
ately. Do not disassemble or modify the
system. Seat belt assemblies must be re-
placed after a collision if they have been
damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-
bing, etc.).
Plastic And Coated Parts
Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl
upholstery.
CAUTION!
• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect
repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-
tizers to the plastic, painted, or deco-
rated surfaces of the interior may cause
permanent damage. Wipe away immedi-
ately.
251
CAUTION!
• Damage caused by these type of prod-
ucts may not be covered by your New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this
vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When
cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to
avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap
solution may be used, but do not use high
alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If
soap is used, wipe clean with a clean
damp cloth.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
Leather Parts
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recom-
mended for leather upholstery.
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved
by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.
Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive
and damage the leather upholstery and
should be removed promptly with a damp
cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily
with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care
should be taken to avoid soaking your leather
upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use
polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, de-
tergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to
clean your leather upholstery. Application of
a leather conditioner is not required to main-
tain the original condition.
NOTE:
If equipped with light colored leather, it
tends to show any foreign material, dirt, and
fabric dye transfer more so than darker col-
ors. The leather is designed for easy cleaning,
and FCA recommends Mopar total care
leather cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the
leather seats as needed.
CAUTION!
Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based
and/or Ketone based cleaning products to
clean leather seats, as damage to the seat
may result.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a
regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or
any commercial household-type glass
cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.
Use caution when cleaning the inside rear
window equipped with electric defrosters or
windows equipped with radio antennas. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments
that may scratch the elements.
When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray
cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are
using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the
mirror.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
252
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER .................254
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS ...........254
Torque Specifications............254
FUELREQUIREMENTS........255
2.0L Engine .................255
3.6L Engine .................255
Materials Added To Fuel .........256
FLUIDCAPACITIES..........256
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS.....258
Engine ....................258
Chassis ....................259
MOPARACCESSORIES .......260
Authentic Accessories And Jeep
Performance Parts By Mopar .......260
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
253
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is
found on the left front corner of the A pillar,
visible from outside of the vehicle through
the windshield. This number also appears
underbody, on the right side of the frame rail
near the center of the vehicle, as well as on
the Automobile Information Disclosure Label
affixed to a window on your vehicle. Save this
label for a convenient record of your vehicle
identification number and optional equip-
ment.
The VIN is also stamped on either right or left
hand side of the engine block.
NOTE:
It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN plate.
WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE
SPECIFICATIONS
Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to
ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to
the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re-
moved and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug
nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly
calibrated torque wrench using a high quality
six sided (hex) deep wall socket.
Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
130 Ft-Lbs
(176 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
**Use only your authorized dealer recom-
mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove
any dirt or oil before tightening.
Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to
mounting the tire and remove any corrosion
or loose particles.
Spare Tire Torque Specifications
Lug Nut/Bolt
Torque
**Lug Nut/Bolt
Size
Lug Nut/Bolt
Socket Size
59 Ft-Lbs
(80 N·m)
M14x1.50 22mm
Spare tire torque is for the spare tire carrier
located on the tailgate.
Vehicle Identification Number
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
254
Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern
until each nut/bolt has been tightened twice.
Ensure that the socket is fully engaged on the
lug nut/bolt (do not insert it halfway).
After 25 miles (40 km), check the lug nut/
bolt torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/
bolts are properly seated against the wheel.
WARNING!
To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off
the jack, do not tighten the lug nuts/bolts
fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
Failure to follow this warning may result in
personal injury.
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
2.0L Engine
This engine is designed
to meet all emission
regulations, and pro-
vide satisfactory fuel
economy and perfor-
mance when using
high-quality unleaded
“Regular” gasoline hav-
ing a posted octane number of 87 as speci-
fied by the (R+M)/2 method. For optimal
performance the use of 91 or higher octane
“Premium” gasoline is recommended in
these engines.
While operating on gasoline with the required
octane number, hearing a light knocking
sound from the engine is not a cause for
concern. However, if the engine is heard
making a heavy knocking sound, see your
dealer immediately. Use of gasoline with a
lower than recommended octane number can
cause engine failure and may void or not be
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-
tions. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
3.6L Engine
This engine is designed
to meet all emissions
regulations and provide
excellent fuel economy
and performance when
using high-quality un-
leaded “Regular” gaso-
line having an octane
rating of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/
2 method. The use of higher octane “Pre-
mium” gasoline will not provide any benefit
over “Regular” gasoline in these engines.
While operating on gasoline with an octane
number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound
from the engine is not a cause for concern.
However, if the engine is heard making a
heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-
diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num-
Torque Patterns
RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING
(R+M)/2 METHOD
91
RECOMMENDED OCTANE RATING
(R+M)/2 METHOD
87
255
ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure
and may void or not be covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems
such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-
tions. If you experience these symptoms, try
another brand of gasoline before considering
service for the vehicle.
Materials Added To Fuel
Designated TOP TIER
Detergent Gasoline
contains a higher level
of detergents to fur-
ther aide in minimiz-
ing engine and fuel
system deposits. When
available, the usage of
TOP TIER Detergent
gasoline is recommended.
Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP
TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.
Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning
agents should be avoided. Many of these
materials intended for gum and varnish re-
moval may contain active solvents or similar
ingredients. These can harm fuel system gas-
ket and diaphragm materials.
FLUID CAPACITIES
U.S. Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
Two Door Models 18.5/17.5 Gallons 70/66 Liters
Four Door Models 21.5 Gallons 81 Liters
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
3.6L Engine 5 Quarts 4.73 Liters
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
256
U.S. Metric
Cooling System *
2.0L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
10.3 Quarts 9.7 Liters
2.0L Engine Intercooler without Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (Mopar
Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
3.2 Quarts 3.0 Liters
2.0L Engine Intercooler with Motor Generator Unit (MGU)
(Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula
or equivalent)
3.5 Quarts 3.3 Liters
2.0L Battery Coolant (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
2.5 Quarts 2.4 Liters
3.6L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
11.2 Quarts 10.6 Liters
3.6L Motor Generator Unit (MGU) (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
1.9 Quarts 1.8 Liters
3.6L Battery Coolant (Mopar Antifreeze/
Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula or equivalent)
2.5 Quarts 2.4 Liters
* Includes coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
257
FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS
Engine
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Intercooler/Motor Generator Unit (if equipped) We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Battery Coolant (if equipped) We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic
Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.
Engine Oil — 2.0L Engine We recommend you use Mopar API SN PLUS Certified SAE 5W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil which
meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-13340. Equivalent full synthetic SAE
5W-30 engine oil can be used if it meets API SN PLUS Certification. If SN PLUS or equivalent oil
is unavailable then please contact your local dealership for recommendation.
CAUTION!
Failure to use the recommended SN PLUS or equivalent oil can cause
engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty.
Engine Oil — 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 0W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.
Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use Mopar Engine Oil Filter or equivalent.
Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.
Fuel Selection — 2.0L Engine 87 Octane Minimum – 91 Octane Recommended, 0-15% Ethanol.
Fuel Selection — 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
258
CAUTION!
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze)
other than specified Organic Additive
Technology (OAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze), may result in engine damage
and may decrease corrosion protection.
Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-
gine coolant is different and should not
be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive
Technology (HOAT) engine coolant (anti-
freeze) or any “globally compatible”
CAUTION!
coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine
coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into
the cooling system in an emergency, the
cooling system will need to be drained,
flushed, and refilled with fresh OAT cool-
ant (conforming to MS.90032), by an
authorized dealer as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) products. Do
not use additional rust inhibitors or an-
CAUTION!
tirust products, as they may not be com-
patible with the radiator engine coolant
and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for
use with propylene glycol-based engine
coolant (antifreeze). Use of propylene
glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze)
is not recommended.
Chassis
Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or performance of your transmission.
Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Transfer Case We recommend you use Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Axle Differential (Front) We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API GL-5)
Axle Differential (Rear) We recommend you use Mopar Gear & Axle Lubricant (SAE 75W85)(API GL-5).
Models equipped with Trac-Lok Limited Slip Differential require a friction modifier additive.
Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 3 Brake Fluid, SAE J1703.
If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.
Power Steering Reservoir We recommend you use Mopar Electric Steering Pump Fluid.
259
MOPAR ACCESSORIES
Authentic Accessories And Jeep Performance Parts By Mopar
• Mopar Accessories and Jeep performance
parts are developed with the same engi-
neering that went into your Wrangler.
Choose these products with confidence
knowing that they have passed the same
rigid standards for function, fit, durability
and performance as your Wrangler.
• For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accesso-
ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or
online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and
mopar.ca for Canadian residents.
NOTE:
All parts are subject to availability.
Off Road & Performance:
• Bumpers • Performance Brakes • Rock Rails
• Winches • Axle Locker Kit • Grille Guard
• Performance Axles • Differential Covers • Spare Tire Carrier
• Performance Hoods • LED Off Road Lights • Fender Flares
• Lift Kits • Skid Plates • Tailgate Reinforcement
Exterior:
• Wheels • Hood Lock • Front End Cover
• Spare Tire Covers • Wheel Locks • Parking Cover
• Fuel Doors • Trailer Hitches • LED Lights
• Air Deflectors • Body Graphics • Valve Stem Caps
• Locking Gas Cap • Hood Graphics • Ski And Snowboard Carriers
• Tubular Steps • Satin Black Grille • Roof Basket
• Molded Side Steps • Camping Tent • Roof Basket Net
• Windshield Tie Down Strap • Hood Cover • Towing Kit
• Splash Guards
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
260
Interior:
• Hard Top Headliner • Door Sill Guards • Trailrail Cargo Rail
• Premium Carpet Floor Mats • Storage Bags • Trailrail Vertical Cargo Divider
• All Weather Floor Mats • Cargo Tub • Tailgate Table
• Radio Screen Protector • Cargo Tray • Dog Kennel
• Grab Handles • Cargo Net • Dog Partition
Electronics:
• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System
261
262
MULTIMEDIA
CYBERSECURITY ...........265
STEERING WHEEL
AUDIOCONTROLS ..........266
Radio Operation ...............266
Media Mode .................266
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN —
IFEQUIPPED ..............266
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display) ..........266
SiriusXM Guardian Activation ......267
Download The Uconnect App .......268
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display) ........268
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account ...................269
Built-In Features ..............269
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features . .272
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH
DISPLAY—IFEQUIPPED .....274
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display
At A Glance ..................274
Clock Setting ................275
Audio Setting ................275
Radio Operation ..............276
Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible
With iPhone) ................276
UCONNECT 4 WITH
7-INCH DISPLAY ............277
Uconnect 4 At A Glance .........277
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ...........279
Radio .....................280
Android Auto — If Equipped .......281
Apple CarPlay Integration —
If Equipped..................283
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH
8.4-INCH DISPLAY ..........284
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance . . .284
Drag & Drop Menu Bar ...........285
Radio .....................286
Android Auto — If Equipped .......287
Apple CarPlay Integration —
If Equipped..................291
UCONNECT SETTINGS .......293
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED...............294
NAVIGATION —
IF EQUIPPED ..............296
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume ....................296
Finding Points Of Interest .........298
Finding A Place By Spelling
The Name...................298
One-Step Voice Destination Entry . . . .298
Setting Your Home Location........298
Home .....................299
Adding A Stop ................300
Taking A Detour ...............300
SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display) ...........300
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display) ..........300
UCONNECT PHONE .........302
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth
Hands Free Calling) ............302
MULTIMEDIA
263
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting)
Your Mobile Phone To The
Uconnect System ..............305
Common Phone Commands
(Examples) ..................309
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone
During Call ..................309
Transfer Ongoing Call Between
Handset And Vehicle ............309
Phonebook ..................309
Voice Command Tips ............309
Changing The Volume ...........310
Using Do Not Disturb ...........310
Incoming Text Messages .........310
Helpful Tips And Common Questions
To Improve Bluetooth Performance
With Your Uconnect System .......311
UCONNECT VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS . . . .312
Introducing Uconnect ...........312
Get Started ..................313
Basic Voice Commands...........314
Radio .....................314
Media .....................314
Phone .....................315
Voice Text Reply ...............316
Climate ....................317
Navigation (4C NAV) ............317
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)—
If Equipped..................318
Register (4C/4C NAV)............318
Vehicle Health Report/Alert
(4C/4C NAV) .................319
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)..........319
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) ......319
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ......320
Using Do Not Disturb ............320
Android Auto — If Equipped .......321
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped .......321
General Information.............322
Additional Information ...........323
MULTIMEDIA
264
CYBERSECURITY
Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and
may be equipped with both wired and wire-
less networks. These networks allow your ve-
hicle to send and receive information. This
information allows systems and features in
your vehicle to function properly.
Your vehicle may be equipped with certain
security features to reduce the risk of unau-
thorized and unlawful access to vehicle sys-
tems and wireless communications. Vehicle
software technology continues to evolve over
time and FCA US LLC, working with its sup-
pliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps
as needed. Similar to a computer or other
devices, your vehicle may require software
updates to improve the usability and perfor-
mance of your systems or to reduce the po-
tential risk of unauthorized and unlawful ac-
cess to your vehicle systems.
The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access
to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if
the most recent version of vehicle software
(such as Uconnect software) is installed.
WARNING!
• It is not possible to know or to predict all
of the possible outcomes if your vehi-
cle’s systems are breached. It may be
possible that vehicle systems, including
safety related systems, could be im-
paired or a loss of vehicle control could
occur that may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card,
or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a
trusted source. Media of unknown origin
could possibly contain malicious soft-
ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it
may increase the possibility for vehicle
systems to be breached.
• As always, if you experience unusual
vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to
your nearest authorized dealer immedi-
ately.
NOTE:
• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you
directly regarding software updates.
• To help further improve vehicle security and
minimize the potential risk of a security
breach, vehicle owners should:
– Routinely check
www.driveuconnect.com/support/
software-update.html
(U.S. Residents)
or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian
Residents) to learn about available
Uconnect software updates.
– Only connect and use trusted media
devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,
USBs, CDs).
Privacy of any wireless and wired communi-
cations cannot be assured. Third parties may
unlawfully intercept information and private
communications without your consent. For
further information, refer to ”Data Collection
& Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System
(OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know
Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s
Manual.
265
STEERING WHEEL
AUDIO CONTROLS
The remote sound system controls are lo-
cated on the rear surface of the steering
wheel. Reach behind the wheel to access the
switches.
The right-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push-button in the center and controls
the volume and mode of the sound system.
Pushing the top of the rocker switch in-
creases the volume, and pushing the bottom
of the rocker switch decreases the volume.
Pushing the center button will make the radio
switch between the various modes available
(AM/FM/SAT/CD/USB/AUX, etc.).
The left-hand control is a rocker-type switch
with a push-button in the center. The func-
tion of the left-hand control is different de-
pending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control
operation in each mode.
Radio Operation
Pushing the top of the switch will “Seek” up
for the next listenable station and pushing
the bottom of the switch will “Seek” down for
the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-
hand control will tune to the next preset
station that you have programmed in the
radio preset button.
Media Mode
Pushing the top of the switch once goes to
the next track on the selected media (AUX/
USB/Bluetooth). Pushing the bottom of the
switch once goes to the beginning of the
current track, or to the beginning of the
previous track if it is within eight seconds
after the current track begins to play.
SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN —
IF EQUIPPED
SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped
(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
With 8.4–inch Display)
WARNING!
ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with
your hands on the steering wheel. You have
full responsibility and assume all risks
related to the use of the features and
applications in this vehicle. Only use the
features and applications when it is safe to
do so. Failure to do so may result in an
accident involving serious injury or death.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
Audio Controls
(Back View Of Steering Wheel)
MULTIMEDIA
266
SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership
and driving experience. When connected to
an operable network, you can:
• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian
operator who can connect you to emergency
responders.
• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start
your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using
the Uconnect App from your device. You
can also do so by logging into your owner
site, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian Care
when your vehicle has an operable network
connection. Services can only be used
where coverage is available.
• Receive text or email notifications if your
vehicle's security alarm goes off.
• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using
GPS technology to help authorities locate
your vehicle if it is stolen.
• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST
button on your interior rearview mirror.
Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the
easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are
located on your rearview mirror. The AS-
SIST button is used for contacting Road-
side Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM
Guardian Care, and Uconnect Care. The
SOS Call button connects you to a
SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent, who can
connect you to emergency services.
2. The Uconnect “Apps
” button is lo-
cated in the center of the menu bar of the
radio touchscreen. This is where you can
manage your Apps.
3. The Uconnect Voice Command and
Uconnect Phone buttons are located on
the left side of your steering wheel. These
buttons let you use your voice to give
commands, make phone calls, send and
receive text messages, enter navigation
destinations, and control your radio and
media devices.
Included Trial Period For New Vehicles
Your new vehicle may come with an included
trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian
services starting at the date of vehicle pur-
chase (date based on vehicle sales notifica-
tion from your dealer). To activate the trial, you
must first register with SiriusXM Guardian. Af-
ter the trial period, if you wish to continue
your SiriusXM Guardian services you can
choose to purchase a subscription.
NOTE:
You can check UconnectPhone.com for sys-
tem and device compatibility.
SiriusXM Guardian Activation
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from
your list of apps.
267
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the
web.
Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are
just a few examples of things you’ll be able to
do:
• Know that help, if you need it, is only a
button press away with Assist.
• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from
hundreds of miles away.
• Find your vehicle, no matter where you
parked, using the convenient Vehicle
Finder function.
• Use Send & Go to send a navigation route
from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s
navigation system.
For further information:.
• U.S. residents visit:
www.siriusxm.com/guardian
• Canadian residents visit:
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian
Download The Uconnect App
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and other valuable ser-
vices.
To use the Uconnect App:
• Search for and download the Uconnect App
from the store on your compatible iPhone or
Android powered device.
• Log in to the app using the email address
and password you created when you acti-
vated the services.
• Press the “Remote” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Re-
mote Start (if equipped), and activate your
horn and lights remotely.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your vehicle’s navigation system.
• Press the menu button (three horizontal
lines) in the upper left corner of the app to
access settings and support information.
Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV With 8.4-inch Display)
Subscriptions can be purchased online by
logging into your owner account. If you need
help push the ASSIST button on the rearview
mirror, then select SiriusXM Guardian Care
or:
• U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091
Mobile App
MULTIMEDIA
268
Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian
Account
Selling Your Vehicle
When you sell your vehicle, we recommend
that you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Ac-
count information from the vehicle. You can
do this by pressing the ASSIST button in your
vehicle and selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or
call:
• U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091
Built-In Features
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
WARNING!
• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-
tion to the road. Some features are lim-
ited while the vehicle is in motion. Some
services, including SOS, will NOT work
without a subscription and an operable
network connection.
• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could
mean you may not have SOS Call service
if needed. If the rearview mirror light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service the SOS Call system immedi-
ately.
• The Occupant Restraint Controller
(ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning
Light on the instrument panel if a mal-
function is detected in any part of the
airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning
Light is illuminated, the air bag system
may not be working properly and the
SOS Call system may not send a signal to
a SOS Call operator if an air bag is
deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is
illuminated, have an authorized dealer
service your vehicle immediately.
WARNING!
• If anyone in the vehicle could be in
danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,
dangerous road conditions or location),
do not wait for voice contact from a SOS
Call operator. All occupants should exit
the vehicle immediately and move to a
safe location.
• The SOS Call system is embedded into
the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not
add aftermarket electrical equipment to
the vehicle’s electrical system. This may
prevent your vehicle from sending a sig-
nal to initiate an emergency call. To
avoid interference that can cause the
SOS Call system to fail, never add after-
market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile
radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to
your vehicle’s electrical system or
modify the antennas on your vehicle.
• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY
POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD-
ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-
DENT), the Uconnect features, apps,
and SiriusXM Guardian services, among
others, will not operate.
269
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
1. ASSIST Call (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped —
The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST
button, allowing you to speak to a call
center agent for support:
• Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a
flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be con-
nected to someone who can help any-
time. Additional fees may apply. Addi-
tional information in this section.
• Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for
Uconnect Apps and Features.
• SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle
support for SiriusXM Guardian services.
• Vehicle Care — Total support for your
FCA US LLC vehicle.
NOTE:
In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Ser-
vices to you, we may record and monitor your
conversations with Roadside Assistance,
Uconnect Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or
Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are
initiated through the SiriusXM Guardian ser-
vices in your vehicle, your device, or via a
landline device, and may share information
obtained through such recording and moni-
toring in accordance with regulatory require-
ments. You acknowledge, agree, and consent
to any recording, monitoring or sharing of
information obtained through any such call
recordings.
2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The
rearview mirror contains a SOS Call but-
ton that, when pressed, may place a call
from your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian
Care operator, who can connect you to
emergency service operators, to request
help from local police, fire or ambulance
personnel. If this button is accidentally
pressed, you will have ten seconds to stop
the call. To cancel, press the SOS Call
button again or press the “Cancel” button
shown on the touchscreen. After ten sec-
onds has passed, the SOS call will be
placed and only the SOS Call operator can
cancel it. The LED light on the rearview
mirror will turn green once a connection to
a SOS Call operator has been made. The
green LED light will turn off once the SOS
Call is terminated. Have an authorized
dealer service the vehicle if the rearview
mirror light is continuously red. On
equipped vehicles, this feature requires a
functioning electrical system, a subscrip-
tion, and an operable network connection.
If a connection is made between a SOS Call
operator and your vehicle, you understand
and agree that SOS Call operators will stay
Assist And SOS
1 — ASSIST Button
2 — SOS Button
MULTIMEDIA
270
on the line, even after you connect with
emergency services. The Emergency ser-
vices operator may, like any other emer-
gency call, record conversations and
sounds in and near your vehicle upon
connection.
3. Theft Alarm Notification — If Equipped —
The Theft Alarm Notification feature noti-
fies you via email or text (SMS) message
when the vehicle’s factory-installed secu-
rity alarm system has been triggered.
There are a number of reasons why your
alarm may have been triggered, one of
which could be that your vehicle was sto-
len. If so, please see the details of the
Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below.
When activated, Theft Alarm Notification
is automatically set to send you an email
at the email address you provide should
the alarm go off. You may also opt to have
a text message sent to your device.
4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle
is stolen, contact local law enforcement
immediately to file a stolen vehicle report.
Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM
Guardian Care can help locate your ve-
hicle. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent
will ask for the stolen vehicle report num-
ber issued by local law enforcement. As
long as your vehicle has a SiriusXM Guard-
ian subscription and an operable network
connection, the agent may be able to
locate the stolen vehicle and work with
law enforcement to help recover it. Your
vehicle must have an operable network
connection and must be registered with
SiriusXM Guardian with an active sub-
scription that includes the applicable
feature.
5. 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows
you and your passengers to connect their
portable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi
capabilities of your Uconnect system.
Purchasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the
use of an Internet-enabled portable
device.
NOTE:
Uconnect offers a complimentary
3–month trial period that includes 1GB of
total data. The trial can be activated any
time within the first year of new vehicle
ownership.
a. To start, the Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot box
should be un-checked.
b. Select the Wi-Fi Hotspot Setup option
from the toushcreeen to locate your
Hotspot Name and Password. Make
note of this information.
c. Tap the Back Arrow to return to the
main Wi-Fi Hotspot page, then check
the box to Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot.
d. From your portable device Wi-Fi set-
tings menu, select the Hotspot Name
from the list of available networks and
enter the provided Password.
e. Open the web browser on your portable
device and enter the following web
address:
https://myvehicle.att.com/#/login.
f. Create a myVehicle account or log in to
your existing one.
g. Select and purchase the desired sub-
scription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot
will activate after a few minutes.
For additional assistance, call AT&T Cus-
tomer Care at: 866-595-1330.
271
NOTE:
Your vehicle must have a working electrical
system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM
Guardian services to operate.
SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features
If you own a compatible iPhone or Android
powered device, the Uconnect App allows
you to remotely lock or unlock your doors,
start your engine or activate your horn and
lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle
must be equipped with remote start, must
have a SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and
must have an operable network connection.
Services can only be used where coverage is
available. You can download the App from
Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store
(iPhone) or Google Play Store (Android). Visit
UconnectPhone.com to determine if your de-
vice is compatible. For Uconnect Phone cus-
tomer support and to determine if your device
is compatible.
U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com
or call 1-877-855-8400.
Canadian residents - visit
UconnectPhone.com or call:
1-800-465-2001 (English) or
call:1-800-387-9983 (French).
Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature
provides the ability to start the engine on your
vehicle, without the keys and from virtually
any distance. You can send a request to your
vehicle in one of two ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
• After 15 minutes if you have not en-
tered your vehicle with the key, the
engine will shut off automatically.
• You can also send a command to turn-
off an engine that has been remote
started.
• This remote function requires your ve-
hicle to be equipped with a factory-
installed Remote Start system. To uti-
lize this feature after the Uconnect App
is downloaded, login with your user
name and password.
You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guard-
ian Security PIN to confirm the request.
Press the “remote start” icon on your
Uconnect App to remotely start the vehicle.
You can set-up notifications for your account
to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to
Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM
Guardian Notifications.
Remote Door Lock/Unlock — If Equipped —
This feature provides the ability to lock or
unlock the door on your vehicle, without the
keys and from virtually any distance. You can
send a request to your vehicle in one of three
ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting SiriusXM Guardian Care on
the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit
SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm
MULTIMEDIA
272
the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on
your Uconnect App to lock the doors, and
press the “open lock” icon to unlock the
driver’s door.
You can set-up notifications for your account
to receive an email or text (SMS) message
every time a command is sent. Login to
Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and
click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM
Guardian Notifications.
Remote Horn And Lights — If Equipped — It’s
easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or
noisy parking area by activating the horn and
lights. It may also help if you need to draw
attention to your vehicle for any reason. You
can send a request to your vehicle in one of
three ways:
1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-
ible device.
2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.
3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care
on the phone.
To use this feature after the Uconnect App is
downloaded, login using your user name and
password. You will need your four digit
SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm
the request. You can set-up notifications for
your account to receive an email or text
(SMS) message every time a command is
sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at
mopar.com and click on Edit Profile to man-
age SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.
Vehicle Finder
The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to find the location of
your vehicle when you can't remember where
it's parked. You can also sound the alarm and
flash the lights to make finding your vehicle
even easier.
To find your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine the
location of your vehicle.
3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap-
pears, once your vehicle is located.
4. Select your preferred Navigation App to
route a path to your vehicle.
Send & Go
The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect
Mobile App allows you to search for a desti-
nation on your mobile device and then send
the route to your vehicle’s Uconnect Naviga-
tion system.
To send a navigation route to your vehicle:
1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect
Mobile App bottom bar.
2. Either type in the destination you would
like to navigate to, or search through one
of the categories provided.
3. Select the destination you want to route to
from the list that appears.
4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and
then confirm the destination by pressing
“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the
Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.
5. Finally, confirm the route inside your ve-
hicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on
the pop-up that appears on the touch-
screen, when the vehicle is started.
273
UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display At A Glance
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio Buttons
1 — RADIO Button
2 — COMPASS Button
3 — SETTINGS Button
4 — MORE Functions Button
5 — BROWSE/ENTER Button — TUNE/SCROLL Knob
6 — SCREEN OFF Button
7 — MUTE Button
8 — System On/Off — Volume Control Knob
9 — Uconnect PHONE Button
10 — MEDIA Button
MULTIMEDIA
274
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,
doing so can result in damage to the touch-
screen.
Clock Setting
To start the clock setting procedure:
1.
Press the Settings button on the faceplate,
then press the “Clock and Date” button.
2. Press the “Set Time” button on the
touchscreen.
3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to adjust
the hours or minutes, then select the
“AM” or “PM” button on the touchscreen.
You can also select 12hr or 24hr format by
pressing the desired button on the
touchscreen.
4. Once the time is set, press the “Done”
button on the touchscreen to exit the time
screen.
NOTE:
In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select
Display Clock. Display Clock turns the clock
display in the status bar on or off.
Audio Setting
1. Press the “Settings” button on the
faceplate.
2. Scroll down and press the “Audio” button
on the touchscreen to open the Audio
menu.
3. The Audio Menu shows the following op-
tions for you to customize your audio
settings.
Equalizer
Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.
Use the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen
to adjust the equalizer to your desired set-
tings.
Balance/Fade
Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound from the
speakers. Use the arrow buttons on the
touchscreen to adjust the sound level from
the front and rear or right and left side speak-
ers. Press the Center “C” button on the
touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to
the factory setting.
Speed Adjusted Volume — If Equipped
Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to select between OFF, 1,
2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume
relative to a decrease in vehicle speed.
Loudness — If Equipped
Press the “Loudness” button on the touch-
screen to select the Loudness feature. When
this feature is activated it improves sound
quality at lower volumes.
Surround Sound — If Equipped
Press the “Surround Sound” button on the
touchscreen, select On or Off followed by
pressing the back arrow button on the touch-
screen. When this feature is activated, it
provides simulated surround sound mode.
275
Radio Operation
Store Radio Presets Manually
The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of
the Radio modes. There are four visible pre-
sets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing
the “All” button on the touchscreen on the
radio home screen displays all of the preset
stations for that mode.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-
ton on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds, or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
Seek Next/Previous Buttons
• Press the Seek up or Seek down button to
seek through radio stations in AM, FM or
SXM bands.
• Hold either button to bypass stations with-
out stopping.
Voice Text Reply
(Not Compatible With iPhone)
Once your Uconnect system is paired with a
compatible mobile device, the system can
announce a new incoming text message, and
read it to you over the vehicle audio system.
You can reply to the message using Voice
Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of
the 18 pre-defined messages.
Here’s How:
1. Push the Voice Recognition (VR)
or
the Phone button and wait for the beep,
then say “reply.” Uconnect gives the fol-
lowing prompt: “Please say the message
you would like to send.”
2.
Wait for the beep and say one of the pre-
defined messages. (If you are not sure, you
can say “help”). Uconnect will then read
the pre-defined messages allowed.
3. As soon as you hear the message you
would like to send, you can interrupt the
list of prompts by pushing the Uconnect
phone button and saying the phrase.
Uconnect will confirm the message by
reading it back to you.
Radio Operation
1 — Radio Station Preset
2 — All Presets
3 — Seek Next
4 — Audio Settings
5 — Station Information
6 — Direct Tune
7 — Radio Band
8 — Seek Previous
MULTIMEDIA
276
4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.”
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start without
me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be
<5, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>*
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you
there yet?
I’ll call
you later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<5, 10, 15,
20, 25, 30,
45, 60>*
minutes.
I’m on
my way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
*Use only the numbering listed or the system
may not transcribe the message properly.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses natural language to
understand what you mean and responds
back to confirm your requests. The system is
designed to keep your eyes on the road and
your hands on the wheel by letting Siri help
you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release
the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button
on the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages and
many other useful requests.
UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH
DISPLAY
Uconnect 4 At A Glance
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touch-
screen, doing so can result in damage to
the screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display
Radio Screen
277
Setting The Time
• For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and then
press the time display at the top of the
screen. Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press
the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-
screen, then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out
of the Clock Setting screen.
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, Speed
Adjusted Volume, Surround Sound, Loud-
ness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and
Radio Off With Door.
• You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between
the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-
screen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of
the bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad-
justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the
volume level indicator. This alters the auto-
matic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
Loudness — If Equipped
• Press the “On” button on the touchscreen
to activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deac-
tivate this feature. When Loudness is On,
the sound quality at lower volumes
improves.
AUX Volume Offset
• Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on
the touchscreen to activate the AUX Vol-
ume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset
is adjusted by pressing of the “+” and “–”
buttons. This alters the AUX input audio
volume. The level value, which spans be-
tween plus or minus three, is displayed
above the adjustment bar.
MULTIMEDIA
278
Auto Play — If Equipped
• Press the “Auto Play” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Auto Play screen. The
Auto Play feature has two settings “On” and
“Off.” With Auto Play on, music begins
playing from a connected device, immedi-
ately after it is connected to the radio.
Auto On Radio — If Equipped
• The Radio automatically turns on when
vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was
on or off at last ignition off.
Radio Off With Door — If Equipped
• Press the “Radio Off With Door” button on
the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off
With Door screen. The Radio Off With Door
feature, when activated, keeps the radio on
until the driver or passenger door is opened,
or when the Radio Off Delay selected time
has expired.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the
main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the
App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected
App to replace an existing shortcut in the
main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar, will now
be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is
in PARK.
Uconnect 4 Main Menu
279
Radio
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — Main Category Bar
5 — Audio Settings
6 — Seek Up
7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
8 — Seek Down
9 — Browse And Manage Presets
10 — Radio Bands
MULTIMEDIA
280
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra-
dio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or
SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing
the “Tune” button on the screen, and en-
tering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To
see the 12 preset stations per band, press the
arrow button on the touchscreen at the top
right of the screen to toggle between the two
sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-
ton on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some
Android Auto features may or may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone
and a number of its apps onto the touch-
screen radio display. Android Auto automati-
cally brings you useful information, and orga-
nizes it into simple cards that appear just
when they are needed. Android Auto can be
used with Google's best-in-class speech tech-
nology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the
radio display’s touchscreen to control many
of your apps.
281
To use Android Auto follow the following steps:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Android-
powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android powered smart-
phone to one of the media USB ports in
your vehicle. If you have not downloaded
the Android Auto app to your smartphone
before plugging in the device for the first
time, the app begins to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
Your phone may ask you to approve the
use of the Android Auto app before use.
3. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, Android Auto should automatically
launch, but you can also launch it by
touching the Android Auto icon on the
touchscreen, located under Apps.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can be
utilized using your smartphone’s data plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,
etc. for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu-
nication
•
Hundred of compatible apps, and many more!
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto
may use cellular data and your cellular cov-
erage is shown in the upper right corner of the
radio screen. Once Android Auto has made a
connection through USB, Android Auto will
also connect via Bluetooth.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and down-
load app on Google Play. Android, Android
Auto and Google Play are trademarks of
Google Inc.
Android Auto
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
MULTIMEDIA
282
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car-
Play, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using
iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set-
tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the
very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-
ning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected and recog-
nized, CarPlay should automatically
launch, but you can also launch it by
touching the CarPlay icon on the touch-
screen, located under Apps.
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov-
erage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
CarPlay
CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
283
UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV
WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
WARNING!
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
CAUTION!
Do NOT attach any object to the touch-
screen, doing so can result in damage to
the screen.
NOTE:
Uconnect screen images are for illustration
purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-
ware for your vehicle.
Setting The Time
• Model 4C NAV synchronizes time automati-
cally via GPS, so it should not require any
time adjustment. If you do need to set the
time manually, follow the instructions be-
low for Model 4C NAV.
• For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and then
press the time display at the top of the
screen. Press “Yes.”
• If the time is not displayed at the top of the
screen, press the “Settings” button on the
touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press
the “Clock” button on the touchscreen,
then check or uncheck this option.
• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and
Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.
• If these features are not available, uncheck
the Sync Time box.
• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out
of the Clock Setting screen.
Background Themes
• Screen background themes are selectable
from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d
like to set a theme, follow the instructions
below.
• Press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen and select the display menu.
• Then press “Set Theme” button on the
touchscreen and select a theme.
Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio
MULTIMEDIA
284
Audio Settings
• Press the “Audio” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Audio settings screen
to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and
Speed Adjusted Volume.
• You can return to the Radio screen by
pressing the “X” located at the top right.
Balance/Fade
• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the
touchscreen to Balance audio between the
front speakers or fade the audio between
the rear and front speakers.
• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or
“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or
press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust
the Balance/Fade.
Equalizer
• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-
screen to activate the Equalizer screen.
• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-
screen, or press and drag over the level bar
for each of the equalizer bands. The level
value, which spans between plus or minus
nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of
the Bands.
Speed Adjusted Volume
• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button
on the touchscreen to activate the Speed
Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad-
justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the
volume level indicator. This alters the auto-
matic adjustment of the audio volume with
variation to vehicle speed.
Drag & Drop Menu Bar
The Uconnect features and services in the
main menu bar are easily changed for your
convenience. Simply follow these steps:
1. Press the “Apps
” button to open the
App screen.
2. Press and hold, then drag the selected
App to replace an existing shortcut in the
main menu bar.
The new app shortcut, that was dragged
down onto the main menu bar, will now
be an active App/shortcut.
NOTE:
This feature is only available if the vehicle is
in PARK.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch
Display Main Menu
285
Radio
Uconnect 4C NAV Radio
1 — Radio Station Presets
2 — Toggle Between Presets
3 — Status Bar
4 — View Small Navigation Map
5 — HD Radio
6 — Main Category Bar
7 — Audio Settings
8 — Seek Up
9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station
10 — Seek Down
11 — Browse And Manage Presets
12 — Radio Bands
MULTIMEDIA
286
WARNING!
ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on
the wheel. You have full responsibility and
assume all risks related to the use of the
Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian
services, and applications in this vehicle.
Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM
Guardian services when it is safe to do so.
Failure to do so may result in an accident
involving serious injury or death.
• To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra-
dio” button on the touchscreen.
Selecting Radio Stations
• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or
SXM) button on the touchscreen.
Seek Up/Seek Down
• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on
the touchscreen for less than two seconds
to seek through radio stations.
• Press and hold either arrow button on the
touchscreen for more than two seconds to
bypass stations without stopping. The radio
will stop at the next listenable station once
the arrow button on the touchscreen is
released.
Direct Tune
• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing
the “Tune” button on the screen, and en-
tering the desired station number.
Store Radio Presets Manually
Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,
12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They
are shown at the top of your radio screen. To
see the 12 preset stations per band, press the
arrow button on the touchscreen at the top
right of the screen to toggle between the two
sets of six presets.
To store a radio preset manually, follow the
steps below:
1. Tune to the desired station.
2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-
ton on the touchscreen for more than two
seconds or until you hear a confirmation
beep.
HD Radio — If Equipped
• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C
NAV) operates similar to conventional radio
except it allows broadcasters to transmit a
high-quality digital signal.
• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is
provided with a clear sound that enhances
the listening experience. HD radio can also
transmit data such as song title or artist.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some
Android Auto features may or may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect
system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or
higher, powered smartphone with a data plan,
that allows you to project your smartphone
and a number of its apps onto the touch-
screen radio display. Android Auto automati-
cally brings you useful information, and orga-
nizes it into simple cards that appear just
when they are needed. Android Auto can be
used with Google's best-in-class speech tech-
287
nology, the steering wheel controls, the knobs
and buttons on your radio faceplate, and the
radio display’s touchscreen to control many
of your apps. To use Android Auto follow
these steps:
1. Download the Android Auto app from the
Google Play store on your Android-
powered smartphone.
2. Connect your Android powered smart-
phone to one of the media USB ports in
your vehicle. If you have not downloaded
the Android Auto app to your smartphone
before plugging in the device for the first
time, the app begins to download.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided USB
cable that came with your phone, as after-
market cables may not work.
Your phone may ask you to approve the
use of the Android Auto app before use.
3. Once Android Auto has made a connec-
tion through USB, Android Auto will also
connect via Bluetooth. The system dis-
plays the Android Auto home screen.
Android Auto automatically launches, but
if it does not, refer to the Uconnect Own-
er’s Manual Supplement for the proce-
dure to enable the feature “AutoShow.”
You can also launch it by pressing Android
Auto located in the “Apps” menu. If you
use Android Auto frequently you can move
the app to the menu bar at the bottom of
the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button
and locate the Android Auto app; then
drag the selected App to replace an exist-
ing shortcut in the main menu bar.
Once Android Auto is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your smartphone’s data
plan:
• Google Maps for navigation
• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,
etc. for music
• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu-
nication
• Hundred of compatible apps, and many
more!
NOTE:
To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an
area with cellular coverage. Android Auto
may use cellular data and your cellular cov-
erage is shown in the upper right corner of the
radio screen.
Android Auto
MULTIMEDIA
288
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and down-
load app on Google Play. Android, Android
Auto and Google Play are trademarks of
Google Inc.
Maps
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask
Google to take you to a desired destination by
voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon
in Android Auto to access Google Maps.
NOTE:
If the VR button is not held, and is only
pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts
you and any spoken navigation command
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
While using Android Auto, Google Maps pro-
vides voice-guided:
• Navigation
• Live traffic information
• Lane guidance
NOTE:
If you are using the built-in Uconnect naviga-
tion system, and you try and start a new route
using Android Auto, via voice or any other
method, a pop-up appears asking if you
would like to switch from Uconnect naviga-
tion to smartphone navigation. A pop-up also
appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if
Android Auto is currently in use and you
attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect route.
Selecting “Yes” switches the navigation type
to the newly used method of navigation and a
route is planned for the new destination. If
“No” is selected the navigation type remains
unchanged.
For further information, refer to
www.android.com/auto/ (U.S. Residents) or
https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/
(Canadian Residents).
For further information on the navigation
function, please refer to
https://support.google.com/android or
https://support.google.com/androidauto/.
Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage
Google Maps
289
Music
Android Auto allows you to access and stream
your favorite music with apps like Google Play
Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your
smartphone’s data plan, you can stream end-
less music on the road.
NOTE:
For music apps, playlists, and stations to
work with Android Auto, they must be set up
on your smartphone before using Android
Auto.
NOTE:
To see the metadata for the music playing
through Android Auto, select the Uconnect
System’s media screen.
For further information refer to
https://support.google.com/androidauto.
Communication
With Android Auto connected, press and hold
the VR button on the steering wheel to acti-
vate voice recognition specific to the Android
Auto. This will allow you to send and reply to
text messages, have incoming text messages
read out loud, and place and receive hands-
free calls.
Apps
The Android Auto App will display all the
compatible apps that are available to use
with Android Auto, every time it is launched.
You must have the compatible app down-
loaded, and you must be signed in to the app
for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to
g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of avail-
able apps for Android Auto.
Android Auto Music
Android Auto Contact
Android Auto Phone
MULTIMEDIA
290
Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car-
Play, the smarter, more secure way to use
your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on
the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen
display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and
your voice with Siri to get access to Apple
Music, Maps, Messages, and more.
To use CarPlay, make sure you are using
iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set-
tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the
very first connection only, and then use the
following procedure:
1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media
USB ports in your vehicle.
NOTE:
Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-
ning cable that came with your phone, as
aftermarket cables may not work.
2. Once the device is connected, the system
displays the CarPlay home screen. Apple
CarPlay automatically launches, but if
not, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for the procedure to enable
the feature “AutoShow.” You can also
launch it by pressing the CarPlay icon
located in the “Apps” menu. If you use
Apple CarPlay frequently you can move
the app to the menu bar at the bottom of
the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button
and locate the CarPlay app; then drag and
drop the selected App to replace an exist-
ing shortcut in the main menu bar.
Once CarPlay is up and running on your
Uconnect system, the following features can
be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
NOTE:
To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is
turned on, and that you are in an area with
cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov-
erage is shown on the left side of the radio
screen.
CarPlay
CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage
291
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
Phone
With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice
recognition session. You can also press and
hold the Home button within CarPlay to start
talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls
or listen to voice mail as you normally would
using Siri on your iPhone.
NOTE:
Only temporarily pushing the VR button on
the steering wheel launches a built-in VR
session, not a Siri session, and it will not
function with CarPlay.
Music
CarPlay allows you to access all your artists,
playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your
iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select
third party audio apps including music,
news, sports, podcasts and more.
Messages
Just like your iPhone, CarPlay allows you to
use Siri to send or reply to text messages.
Since everything is done by voice, Siri can
also read incoming text messages so you
don’t have to.
Maps
To use your Apple Maps for navigation on your
Uconnect system, launch CarPlay, and push
and hold the VR button on the steering wheel
to use Siri to set your desired destination.
Alternatively, choose a Nearby destination by
pressing Destinations and selecting a cat-
egory, by launching Siri from the destinations
page, or even by typing in a destination.
NOTE:
• If the VR button is not held, and is only
pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts
you and any navigation command said
launches the built-in Uconnect navigation
system.
Apple Music
Maps
MULTIMEDIA
292
• If you are using the built-in Uconnect navi-
gation system, and you try and start a new
route using CarPlay, via voice or any other
method, a pop-up appears asking if you
would like to switch from Uconnect naviga-
tion to iPhone navigation. A pop-up also
appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if
CarPlay navigation is currently in use and
you attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect
route. Selecting “Yes” switches the naviga-
tion type to the newly used method of
navigation and a route will be planned for
the new destination. If “No” is selected the
navigation type remains unchanged.
Apps
To use an app that is compatible with Car-
Play, you must have the compatible app al-
ready downloaded to your iPhone and you
must also be signed in. Refer to http://
www.apple.com/ios/carplay/ (U.S. Residents)
or https://www.apple.com/ca/ios/carplay/ (Ca-
nadian Residents) to see the latest list of
available apps for CarPlay.
UCONNECT SETTINGS
The Uconnect system allows you to access
Customer Programmable feature settings
such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driv-
ing Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks,
Auto-On Comfort & Remote Start, Engine Off
Options, Compass Settings, Audio, Phone/
Bluetooth, Suspension, SiriusXM Setup, Re-
store Settings, Clear Personal Data, and Sys-
tem Information through buttons on the
touchscreen.
Push the SETTINGS button (Uconnect 3), or
press the “Apps” button (Uconnect 4 or
4C/4C NAV) located near the bottom of the
touchscreen, then press the “Settings” but-
ton on the touchscreen to access the Settings
screen. When making a selection, scroll up or
down until the preferred setting is high-
lighted, then press the preferred setting until
a check-mark appears next to the setting,
showing that setting has been selected. The
following feature settings are available:
• Language • Engine Off Options
• Display • Compass —
If Equipped
• Units • Audio
• Voice • Phone/Bluetooth
• Clock • Suspension —
If Equipped
• Camera —
If Equipped
• AUX Switches
• Safety & Driving
Assistance
• Restore Settings
• Brakes • Clear Personal Data
• Mirrors & Wipers —
If Equipped
• System Information
• Lights
• Doors & Locks
• Auto-On Comfort
• SiriusXM Setup
Navigation Pop-Up
293
NOTE:
Depending on the vehicles options, feature
settings may vary.
Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-
dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor-
mation.
AUX/USB/MP3 CONTROL —
IF EQUIPPED
The Media Hub is located on the Instrument
Panel, below the Climate Controls. Behind
the Media Hub access door contains one AUX
port, a Type C USB Port and one standard
USB Port. Both USB Ports allow you to play
music from iPod/MP3 players or USB devices
through your vehicle’s sound system.
The Smart Charging USB ports provide power
to your device up to an hour after the vehicle
is turned off.
NOTE:
• The Type C USB port is the primary media
port for the radio. Two devices can be
plugged in at the same time and both ports
provide charging capabilities, but only one
port can transfer data to the head unit at a
time.
• Both ports share a single data connection.
However, the user cannot switch between
Type A or Type C.
For example, if a device is plugged into the
Type A USB port and another device is
plugged into the Type C port, connection to
the Type A port will be lost. Alternatively, if a
device is plugged into the Type C port and
another device is plugged into the Type A
port, the Type C device maintains primary
connection.
USB Connection
1 — Type A Plugged In
2 — Type C Plugged In
3 — Type A And Type C Plugged In
MULTIMEDIA
294
Located inside the center console, a second
USB Port allows you to play music from
iPod/MP3 players or USB devices through
your vehicle’s sound system.
A third and fourth USB Ports are located
behind the center console, above the Power
Inverter. One is a charge only port, and can
only charge USB devices. The other USB Port
allows you to play music from iPod/MP3 play-
ers or USB devices through your vehicle’s
sound system.
Media Hub
1 — AUX Port
2 — Type C USB Port
3 — Type A USB Port
Center Console USB USB On The Back Of The Center Console
1 — Type C And Standard USB Ports
2 — Type C And Standard Charge Only
USB Ports
Device Plugged In Message Screen
295
NOTE:
Plugging in a phone or another USB device
may cause the connection to a previous de-
vice to be lost.
Refer to your Owner's Manual for further
information.
NOTE:
The USB port supports various Android and
Apple devices. The USB port also supports
playing music from compatible external USB
Mass Storage Class memory devices. Refer to
UconnectPhone.com for a list of tested de-
vices. Some software versions may not fully
support the USB port features. Please visit
the device website for software updates.
WARNING!
Do not plug in or remove the iPod or
external device while driving. Failure to
follow this warning could result in a colli-
sion.
NAVIGATION —
IF EQUIPPED
• The information in the section below is only
applicable if you have the Uconnect 4C
NAV With 8.4–inch Display system.
Press the “Nav” button on the touchscreen in
the menu bar to access the Navigation sys-
tem.
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt
Volume
Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt Volume
1. Press the “Settings” button on the touch-
screen in the lower right area of the
screen.
2. In the Settings menu, press the “Guid-
ance” button on the touchscreen.
3. In the Guidance menu, adjust the Nav
Volume by pressing the “+” or “–” buttons
on the touchscreen.
Phone Plugged In Message Screen
Phone or USB Plugged In
Message Screen
MULTIMEDIA
296
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Navigation
1 — Search For A Destination In All Categories
2 — Find A Destination
3 — View Map
4 — Navigate To Saved Home Destination
5 — Navigate To Saved Work Destination
6 — Navigation Settings
7 — Emergency
8 — Information
297
Finding Points Of Interest
• From the main Navigation menu, press the
“Where To?” button on the touchscreen,
then press the “Points of Interest” button
on the touchscreen.
• Select a category and then a subcategory, if
necessary.
• Select your destination and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Finding A Place By Spelling The Name
• From the Main Navigation Menu press the
“Where to?” button on the touchscreen,
press the “Points of Interest” button on the
touchscreen, then press the “Spell Name”
or “Search All” button on the touchscreen.
• Enter the name of your destination.
• Press the “List” or “OK” button on the
touchscreen.
• Select your destination and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
One-Step Voice Destination Entr y
• Enter a navigation destination without tak-
ing your hands off the wheel.
• Just push the Uconnect Voice Command
button on the steering wheel, wait for
the beep and say something like, "Find
Address 800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills
MI."
NOTE:
Using your touchscreens keyboard is not
available while your vehicle is in motion.
However, you can also use Voice Commands
to enter an address while moving. Refer to
“Uconnect Voice Recognition Quick Tips” in
this section for further information.
Setting Your Home Location
• To add a Home location, press the “Nav”
button on the touchscreen in the menu bar
to access the Navigation system and the
Main Navigation menu.
• Press the “Home” button on the touch-
screen. You can add a Home location by
either selecting “Spell City,” “Spell
Street,” or “Select Country.” Select County
is automatically filled out based on your
state.
• Once you have entered your Home location,
select the “Save Home” button located on
the lower left-hand side of your touch-
screen.
• To delete a saved Home location (or other
saved locations), so you can save a new
Home location, press the “Nav” button on
the touchscreen, and in the “Where To”
screen, press “Edit Where To” and then
press the “Home” button on the touch-
screen. Under the Manage screen press the
“Reset Location” button. A confirmation
screen will appear asking if you “Are you
sure you want to reset this location?” Press
“Reset” to confirm the deletion. Set a new
Home location by following the previous
instructions.
MULTIMEDIA
298
Home
•
A Home location must be saved in the system.
From the Main Navigation menu, press the
“Home” button on the touchscreen.
Uconnect 4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Map
1 — Distance To Next Turn
2 — Next Turn Street
3 — Estimated Time Of Arrival
4 — Zoom In And Out
5 — Your Location On The Map
6 — Navigation Main Menu
7 — Current Street Location
8 — Navigation Routing Options
299
Your route is marked with a blue line on the
map. If you depart from the original route,
your route is recalculated. A speed limit icon
could appear as you travel on major road-
ways.
Adding A Stop
• To add a stop you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “Menu” button on the touch-
screen to return to the Main Navigation
menu.
• Press the “Where To?” button on the touch-
screen, then search for the extra stop.
When another location has been selected,
you can choose to cancel your previous
route, add as the first destination or add as
the last destination.
• Press the desired selection and press the
“GO!” button on the touchscreen.
Taking A Detour
• To take a detour you must be navigating a
route.
• Press the “Detour” button on the
touchscreen.
NOTE:
If the route you are currently taking is the
only reasonable option, the device may not
calculate a detour. For more information, see
your Uconnect Owner's Manual Supplement.
SiriusXM Traffic Plus
(4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display)
Don't Drive Through Traffic. Drive Around It.
Avoid congestion before you reach it. By
enhancing your vehicle's navigation system
with the ability to see detailed traffic infor-
mation, you can pinpoint traffic incidents,
determine average traffic speed and estimate
travel time along your route. Since the service
is integrated with a vehicle's navigation sys-
tem, SiriusXM Traffic Plus can help drivers
pick the fastest route based on traffic condi-
tions.
• Detailed information on traffic speed, acci-
dents, construction, and road closings.
• Traffic information from multiple sources,
including police and emergency services,
cameras and road sensors.
• Coast-to-coast delivery of traffic informa-
tion.
• View conditions for points along your route
and beyond. Available in over 130 markets.
SiriusXM Travel Link
(4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display)
In addition to delivering over 130 channels of
the best sports, entertainment, talk, and
commercial-free music, SiriusXM offers pre-
mium data services that work in conjunction
with compatible navigation systems.
SiriusXM Travel Link brings a wealth of useful
information into your vehicle and right to your
fingertips.
• Fuel Prices — Check local gas and diesel
prices in your area and route to the station
of your choice.
MULTIMEDIA
300
• Movie Listings — Check local movie the-
atres and listings in your area and route to
the theater of your choice.
• Sports Scores — In-game and final scores
as well as weekly schedules.
• Weather — Check variety of local and na-
tional weather information from radar maps
to current and 5-day forecast.
SiriusXM Travel Link feature is completely
integrated into your vehicle. A few minutes
after you start your vehicle, Travel Link infor-
mation arrives and updates in the back-
ground. You can access the information
whenever you like, with no waiting.
To access SiriusXM Travel Link, press “Apps”
button on the touchscreen, then press the
“SiriusXM Travel Link” button on the touch-
screen.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Travel Link requires a subscription,
sold separately after the trial subscription
included with your vehicle purchase.
301
UCONNECT PHONE
Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free Calling)
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1 — Call/Redial/Hold
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Uconnect Phone Settings Menu
8 — Text Messaging
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Recent Call Log
11 — Browse Phone Book
12 — End Call
MULTIMEDIA
302
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1 — Favorite Contacts
2 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
3 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
4 — Siri
5 — Mute Microphone
6 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
7 — Conference Call*
8 — Phone Settings
9 — Text Messaging**
10 — Direct Dial Pad
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Browse Phone Book Entries
13 — End Call
14 — Call/Redial/Hold
15 — Do Not Disturb
16 — Reply with Text Message
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile
devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones
(requires Bluetooth MAP profile)
303
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Radio Phone Menu
1 — Currently Paired Mobile Phone
2 — Mobile Phone Signal Strength
3 — Do Not Disturb
4 — Reply with Text Message**
5 — Current Phone Contact’s Name
6 — Conference Call*
7 — Phone Pairing
8 — Text Messaging Menu**
9 — Direct Dial Pad
10 — Contact Menu
11 — Recent Call Log
12 — Favorite Contacts
13 — Mute Microphone
14 — Decline Incoming Call
15 — Answer/Redial/Hold
16 — Mobile Phone Battery Life
17 — Transfer To/From Uconnect System
* — Conference call feature only available on GSM mobile
devices
** — Text messaging feature not available on all mobile phones
(requires Bluetooth MAP profile)
MULTIMEDIA
304
The Uconnect Phone feature enables you to
place and receive hands-free mobile phone
calls. Drivers can also place mobile phone
calls using their voice or by using the buttons
on the touchscreen (see Voice Command sec-
tion).
The hands-free calling feature is made pos-
sible through Bluetooth technology — the
global standard that enables different elec-
tronic devices to connect to each other wire-
lessly.
If the Uconnect Phone Button
exists on
your steering wheel, you then have the
Uconnect Phone features.
NOTE:
• The Uconnect Phone requires a mobile
phone equipped with the Bluetooth Hands-
Free Profile, Version 1.0 or higher.
• Most mobile phones/devices are compat-
ible with the Uconnect system, however
some mobile phones/devices may not be
equipped with all of the required features to
utilize all of the Uconnect system features.
• For Uconnect Customer Care:
• U.S. residents visit UconnectPhone.com
or call 1-877-855-8400.
Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your
Mobile Phone To The Uconnect System
Mobile phone pairing is the process of estab-
lishing a wireless connection between a cel-
lular phone and the Uconnect system.
NOTE:
• To use the Uconnect Phone feature, you
first must determine if your mobile phone
and software are compatible with the
Uconnect system. Please visit
UconnectPhone.com for complete mobile
phone compatibility information.
• Mobile phone pairing is not available while
the vehicle is in motion.
• A maximum of ten mobile phones can be
paired to the Uconnect system.
Start Pairing Procedure On The Radio
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display:
1.
Place the ignition in the ACC or ON position.
2. Press the “Phone” button.
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Paired Phones.”
5. Select “Add device.”
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting.
Uconnect 3
305
Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen. A message will dis-
play asking “No phone connected. Do you
want to pair a phone?” Select Yes.
3. After selecting “Yes,” go through the
steps to pair your phone using your
Bluetooth connectivity.
4. Once pairing is successful, a message will
display asking, “Make this your Favorite?”
Then select Yes or No.
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display:
1. Place the ignition in the ACC or ON
position.
2. Press the “Phone” button in the Menu Bar
on the touchscreen.
• A message will display asking, “No
Phone Connected. Would you like to
pair a phone?” Select Yes. After press-
ing Yes, the radio prompts will take you
through the steps to connect your
phone via Bluetooth.
• Uconnect Phone will display an “In
progress” screen while the system is
connecting. Once the pairing has been
successful, a message will display
“Bluetooth pairing successful: The de-
vice supports Phone and Audio.” Click
“OK.”
3. Select “Settings.”
4. Select “Phone/Bluetooth,” and then se-
lect “Paired Phones and Audio Devices.”
Uconnect 4
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV
MULTIMEDIA
306
5. The “Add Device” option will be listed
under the “Paired Phones” section.
Pair Your iPhone:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled iPhone:
1. Press the Settings button.
2. Select Bluetooth.
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile phone
will begin to search for Bluetooth
connections.
3. When your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
Complete The iPhone Pairing Procedure:
1. When prompted on the mobile phone,
accept the connection request from
Uconnect Phone.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones will require you to
enter the PIN number.
Select The iPhone's Priority Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mo-
bile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automati-
cally when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Bluetooth On/Uconnect Device
Pairing Request
307
Pair Your Android Device:
To search for available devices on your
Bluetooth enabled Android Device:
1. Push the Menu button.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn Bluetooth setting to “On.”
• Ensure the Bluetooth feature is en-
abled. Once enabled, the mobile
phone will begin to search for
Bluetooth connections.
5. Once your mobile phone finds the
Uconnect system, select “Uconnect”.
• You may be prompted by your mobile
phone to download the phonebook,
check “Do Not Ask Again” to automati-
cally download the phonebook. This is
so you can make calls by saying the
name of your contact.
Complete The Android Pairing Procedure:
1. Confirm the passkey shown on the mobile
phone matches the passkey shown on the
Uconnect system then accept the
Bluetooth pairing request.
NOTE:
Some mobile phones require the PIN to
be entered manually, enter the PIN num-
ber shown on the Uconnect screen.
Select The Android Mobile Phone's Priority
Level
When the pairing process has successfully
completed, the system will prompt you to
choose whether or not this is your favorite
mobile phone. Selecting “Yes” will make this
mobile phone the highest priority. This mo-
bile phone will take precedence over other
paired mobile phones within range and will
connect to the Uconnect system automati-
cally when entering the vehicle. Only one
mobile phone and/or one Bluetooth audio
device can be connected to the Uconnect
system at a time. If “No” is selected, simply
select “Uconnect” from the mobile phone/
audio device Bluetooth screen, and the
Uconnect system will reconnect to the
Bluetooth device.
Uconnect Device
Pairing Request
MULTIMEDIA
308
NOTE:
Keep in mind that software updates – either
on your phone or Uconnect system – may
interfere with the Bluetooth connection. If
this happens, simply repeat the pairing pro-
cess. However, first, make sure to delete the
device from the list of phones on your
Uconnect system. Next, be sure to remove
Uconnect from the list of devices in your
phone’s Bluetooth settings.
You are now ready to make hands-free calls.
Press the Uconnect “Phone” button
on
your steering wheel to begin.
NOTE:
Refer to UconnectPhone.com or
www.DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or
www.DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Resi-
dents) or an authorized dealer for additional
information on mobile phone pairing and for
a list of compatible phones.
Common Phone Commands (Examples)
• “Call John Smith”
• “Call John Smith mobile”
• “Dial 1 248 555 1212”
• “Redial”
Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During
Call
• During a call, press the “Mute” button on
the Phone main screen, that appears only
when a call is in progress, to mute and
unmute the call.
Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset
And Vehicle
• During an on-going call, press the “Trans-
fer” button on the Phone main screen to
transfer an on-going call between handset
and vehicle.
Phonebook
The Uconnect system will automatically sync
your phonebook from your paired phone, if
this feature is supported by your phone.
Phonebook contacts are updated each time
that the phone is connected. Phonebook en-
tries are displayed in the Contacts menu. If
your phone book entries do not appear, check
the settings on your phone. Some phones
require you to enable this feature manually.
• Your phonebook can be browsed on the
Uconnect system touchscreen, but editing
can only be done on your phone. To browse,
press the “Phone” button on the touch-
screen, then the “Phonebook” button on
the touchscreen.
Favorite phonebook entries can be saved as
Favorites for quicker access. Favorites are
shown in the Favorites menu.
Voice Command Tips
• Speaking complete names (i.e; Call John
Doe vs. Call John) will result in greater
system accuracy.
• You can “link” commands together for
faster results. Say “Call John Doe, mobile,”
for example.
• If you are listening to available voice com-
mand options, you do not have to listen to
the entire list. When you hear the command
that you need, push the
button on the
steering wheel, wait for the beep and say
your command.
309
Changing The Volume
• Start a dialogue by pushing the VR button
, then say a command. For example,
"Help".
• Use the radio VOLUME/MUTE rotary knob
to adjust the volume to a comfortable level
while the Uconnect system is speaking.
NOTE:
The volume setting for Uconnect is different
than the audio system.
NOTE:
To access help, push the VR button
on the
steering wheel and say "help." Push the VR
button
and say "cancel" to cancel the
help session.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi-
cations from incoming calls and texts, allow-
ing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of
your missed calls and text messages while
you were using Do Not Disturb.
To activate Do Not Disturb, select “Pairing”
on the phone menu bar, and select “Do Not
Disturb” from the Settings menu. You can
also activate it using the “Do Not Disturb”
button at the top of every Phone screen.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only avail-
able on phones that supporting Bluetooth
MAP.
Incoming Text Messages
After pairing your Uconnect system with a
Bluetooth enabled mobile device with the
Message Access Profile (MAP), the Uconnect
system can announce a new incoming text
message and read it to you over the vehicle’s
audio system.
To listen to incoming text messages, or any
messages currently on the mobile phone,
select the “Messages” menu and press the
“Listen” button next to the message you want
to listen to.
NOTE:
Only incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle can be viewed/read.
To Enable Incoming Text Messaging:
iPhone
1. Press the settings button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Bluetooth.
MULTIMEDIA
310
• Ensure Bluetooth is enabled, and the
mobile phone is paired to the Uconnect
system.
3. Select
located under DEVICES next to
Uconnect.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
Android Devices
1. Push the Menu button on the mobile
phone.
2. Select Settings.
3. Select Connections.
4. Turn “Show Notifications” to on.
• A pop up will appear asking you to
accept a request for permission to con-
nect to your messages. Select “Don’t
ask again” and press OK.
NOTE:
All incoming text messages received during
the current ignition cycle will be deleted from
the Uconnect system when the ignition is
turned to the OFF position.
Helpful Tips And Common Questions
To Improve Bluetooth Performance
With Your Uconnect System
Mobile Phone won’t reconnect to system
after pairing:
• Set mobile phone to auto-connect or
trusted device in mobile phone Bluetooth
settings (Blackberry devices).
• Many mobile phones do not automatically
reconnect after being restarted (hard re-
boot). Your mobile phone can still be con-
nected manually. Close all applications that
may be operating (refer to mobile phone
manufacturer’s instructions), and follow
“Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mo-
bile Phone To The Uconnect System”.
Enable iPhone Incoming Text Messages
Enable Android Device
Incoming Text Messages
311
• Perform a factory reset on your mobile
phone. Refer to your mobile phone manu-
facturer or cellular provider for instruc-
tions. This should only be done as a last
resort.
Mobile Phone won’t pair to system:
• Delete pairing history in mobile phone and
Uconnect system; usually found in phone’s
Bluetooth connection settings.
• Verify you are selecting “Uconnect” in the
discovered Bluetooth devices on your mo-
bile phone.
• If your vehicle system generates a pin code
the default is 0000.
• Perform a hard reset in the mobile phone by
removing the battery (if removable — see
your mobile phone’s owner manual). This
should only be done as a last resort.
Mobile Phonebook didn’t download:
• Check “Do not ask again,” then accept the
“phonebook download” request on your
mobile phone.
• Up to 5,000 contact names with four num-
bers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV system phonebook.
• Up to 2,000 contact names with six num-
bers per contact will transfer to the
Uconnect 4 system phonebook.
Can’t make a conference call:
• CDMA (Code-Division Multiple Access) car-
riers do not support conference calling.
Refer to your mobile phone user’s manual
for further information.
Making calls while connected to AUX:
• Plugging in your mobile phone to AUX while
connected to Bluetooth will disable Hands-
Free Calling. Do not make calls while your
mobile phone is plugged into the AUX jack.
UCONNECT VOICE
RECOGNITION QUICK TIPS
Introducing Uconnect
Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with
these helpful quick tips. It provides the key
Voice Commands and tips you need to know
to control your Uconnect 3, Uconnect 4, or
Uconnect 4/4C NAV system.
Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display
Radio Visual Cues
Uconnect 4
MULTIMEDIA
312
If you see the NAV icon on the bottom bar or
in the Apps menus of your 8.4-inch touch-
screen, you have the Uconnect 4C NAV sys-
tem. If not, you have a Uconnect 4C with
8.4-inch display system.
Get Started
All you need to control your Uconnect system
with your voice are the buttons on your steer-
ing wheel.
1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mo-
bile device and feature compatibility and
to find phone pairing instructions.
2. Reduce background noise. Wind and pas-
senger conversations are examples of
noise that may impact recognition.
3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and vol-
ume while facing straight ahead. The mi-
crophone is positioned on the rearview
mirror and aimed at the driver.
4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you
must first push either the Voice Recogni-
tion (VR) or Phone button, wait until after
the beep, then say your Voice Command.
5. You can interrupt the help message or
system prompts by pushing the VR or
Phone button and saying a Voice Com-
mand from current category.
Uconnect 4C NAV
Uconnect Voice Command Buttons —
If Equipped
1 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer
A Phone Call, Send Or Receive
A Text
2 — For All Radios: Push To Begin
Radio Or Media Functions.
For 8.4-inch Displays Only: Push
To Begin Navigation, Apps And
Climate Functions.
3 — Push To End Call
313
Basic Voice Commands
The basic Voice Commands below can be
given at any point while using your Uconnect
system.
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
•“Cancel” to stop a current voice session
•“Help” to hear a list of suggested Voice
Commands
•“Repeat” to listen to the system prompts
again
Notice the visual cues that inform you of your
voice recognition system’s status. Cues ap-
pear on the touchscreen.
Radio
Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or
SiriusXM Satellite Radio stations you would
like to hear. (Subscription or included
SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say:
•“Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM”
•“Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1”
TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to
say or want to learn a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and say “Help.” The
system provides you with a list of commands.
Media
Uconnect offers connections via USB,
Bluetooth and auxiliary ports (If Equipped).
Voice operation is only available for con-
nected USB and AUX devices. (Remote CD
player optional and not available on all ve-
hicles.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands and follow
the prompts to switch your media source or
choose an artist.
•“Change source to Bluetooth”
•“Change source to AUX”
Uconnect 3 Radio
Uconnect 4 Radio
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Radio
MULTIMEDIA
314
•“Change source to USB”
•“Play artist Beethoven”; “Play album Great-
est Hits”; “Play song Moonlight Sonata”;
“Play genre Classical”
TIP: Press the Browse button on the touch-
screen to see all of the music on your USB
device. Your Voice Command must match
exactly how the artist, album, song and genre
information is displayed.
Phone
Making and answering hands-free phone
calls is easy with Uconnect. When the Phone-
book button is illuminated on your touch-
screen, your system is ready. Check
UconnectPhone.com for mobile phone com-
patibility and pairing instructions.
Push the VR button
and the Phone
button. After the beep, say one of the follow-
ing commands:
•“Call John Smith”
•“Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system
prompts”
•“Redial (call previous outgoing phone num-
ber)”
•“Call back (call previous incoming phone
number)”
Uconnect 3 Media
Uconnect 4 Media
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Media
315
TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push
the VR button
and the Phone button and
say “Call,” then pronounce the name exactly
as it appears in your phone book. When a
contact has multiple phone numbers, you
can say “Call John Smith work.”
Voice Text Reply
Uconnect announces incoming text mes-
sages. Push the Phone button
and say
“Listen.” (Must have compatible mobile
phone paired to Uconnect system.)
1. Once an incoming text message is read to
you, push the Phone button
. After
the beep, say: “Reply.”
2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the
beep, repeat one of the pre-defined mes-
sages and follow the system prompts.
PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES
Yes.
Stuck in
traffic.
See you later.
No.
Start
without me.
I’ll be late.
Okay.
Where are
you?
I will be
<number>
minutes late.
Call me.
Are you
there yet?
I’ll call
you later.
I need
directions.
See you in
<number>
of minutes.
I’m on
my way.
Can’t talk
right now.
I’m lost. Thanks.
TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full
implementation of the Message Access Pro-
file (MAP) to take advantage of this feature.
For details about MAP, visit
UconnectPhone.com.
Uconnect 3 Phone
Uconnect 4 Phone
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV Phone
MULTIMEDIA
316
Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading
incoming text messages only. To enable this
feature on your Apple iPhone, follow these
four simple steps:
TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with
iPhone, but if your vehicle is equipped with
Siri Eyes Free, you can use your voice to send
a text message.
Climate
Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle tempera-
tures hands-free and keep everyone comfort-
able while you keep moving ahead. (If vehicle
is equipped with climate control.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Set driver temperature to 70 degrees”
•“Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees”
TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be
used to adjust the interior temperature of
your vehicle. Voice Command will not work to
adjust the heated seats or steering wheel if
equipped.
Navigation (4C NAV)
The Uconnect navigation feature helps you
save time and become more productive when
you know exactly how to get to where you
want to go.
1. To enter a destination, push the VR button
. After the beep, say: “Find address
800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills,
Michigan.”
2. Then follow the system prompts.
iPhone Notification Settings
1 — Select “Settings”
2 — Select “Bluetooth”
3 — Select The (i) For The Paired Ve-
hicle
4 — Turn On “Show Notifications”
Uconnect 4 With 7-inch Display Climate
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4-Inch
Display Climate
317
TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR
button
. After the beep, say: “Find nearest
coffee shop.”
SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)—
If Equipped
CAUTION!
Some SiriusXM Guardian services, includ-
ing SOS Call and Roadside Assistance Call
will NOT work without an operable LTE
(voice/data) or 3G or 4G (data) network
connection compatible with your device.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may be transmitting data as
authorized by the subscriber.
An included trial and/or subscription is re-
quired to take advantage of the SiriusXM
Guardian services in the next section of this
guide. To register with SiriusXM Guardian,
press the Apps button on the Uconnect
4C/4C NAV touchscreen to get started.
NOTE:
SiriusXM Guardian is available only on
equipped vehicles purchased within the con-
tinental United States, Alaska, Hawaii and
Canada. Services can only be used where
coverage is available; see coverage map for
details.
SOS Call
Theft Alarm Notification
Remote Door Lock/Unlock
Send & Go
Vehicle Finder
Stolen Vehicle Assistance
Remote Vehicle Start**
Remote Horn & Lights
Roadside Assistance Call
Vehicle Health Reports**
Vehicle Health Alert**
Performance Pages Plus**
**If vehicle is equipped.
Register (4C/4C NAV)
To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM
Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate
your SiriusXM Guardian services.
1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your
in-vehicle touchscreen.
2. Select the Activate Services icon from
your list of apps.
3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a
SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent
who will activate services in your vehicle,
or select “Enter Email” to activate on the
web.
• U.S. residents visit:
www.siriusxm.com/guardian.
• Canadian residents visit:
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian.
Uconnect 4C NAV Navigation
MULTIMEDIA
318
Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C NAV)
Your vehicle will send you a monthly email
report, which summarizes the performance of
your vehicle’s key systems so you can stay on
top of your vehicle’s maintenance needs if
you are registered for SiriusXM Guardian.
Your vehicle will also send you Vehicle Health
Alerts when it detects issues with its key
systems that need your attention. For further
information, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s
Manual Supplement.
Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)
You’re only a few steps away from using
remote commands and sending a destination
from your phone to your vehicle.
To use the Uconnect Mobile App:
• Once you have registered your SiriusXM
Guardian services, download the Uconnect
App to your mobile device. Use your Owner
Account login and password to open the
app.
• Once on the “Remote” screen, you can
begin using Remote Door Lock/Unlock, Re-
mote Vehicle Start, and activate your horn
and lights remotely, if equipped.
• Press the “Location” button on the bottom
menu bar of the app to bring up a map to
locate your vehicle or send a location to
your Uconnect Navigation using Vehicle
Finder and Send & Go , if equipped.
• Press the “Settings” side menu in the up-
per left corner of the app to bring up app
settings.
NOTE:
For further information please visit
DriveUconnect.com (U.S. Residents) or
DriveUconnect.ca (Canadian Residents).
SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV)
Need to find a gas station, view local movie
listings, check a sports score or the5-day
weather forecast? SiriusXM Travel Link is a
suite of services that brings a wealth of infor-
mation right to your Uconnect 4C NAV sys-
tem. (Not available for Uconnect 4 system.)
Push the VR button
. After the beep, say
one of the following commands:
•“Show fuel prices”
•“Show 5 - day weather forecast”
•“Show extended weather”
Mobile App
319
TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with
Voice Command.
Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped
Siri lets you use your voice to send text
messages, select media, place phone calls
and much more. Siri uses your natural lan-
guage to understand what you mean and
responds back to confirm your requests. The
system is designed to keep your eyes on the
road and your hands on the wheel by letting
Siri help you perform useful tasks.
To enable Siri, push and hold, then release
the Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button
on the steering wheel. After you hear a double
beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and
music, get directions, read text messages
and many other useful requests.
Using Do Not Disturb
With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifi-
cations from incoming calls and texts, allow-
ing you to keep your eyes on the road and
hands on the wheel. For your convenience,
there is a counter display to keep track of
your missed calls and text messages while
you were using Do Not Disturb.
Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a
text message, a call or both, when declining
an incoming call and send it to voicemail.
Automatic reply messages can be:
• “I am driving right now, I will get back to
you shortly.”
• Create a custom auto reply message up to
160 characters.
While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can
be selected so you can still place a second
call without being interrupted by incoming
calls.
NOTE:
• Only the beginning of your custom message
will be seen on the touchscreen.
SiriusXM Travel Link
Uconnect 4 Siri Eyes Free Available
Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Siri
Eyes Free Available
MULTIMEDIA
320
• Reply with text message is not compatible
with iPhones.
• Auto reply with text message is only avail-
able on phones that supporting Bluetooth
MAP.
Android Auto — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some
Android Auto features may or may not be
available in every region and/or language.
Android Auto allows you to use your voice to
interact with Android’s best-in-class speech
technology through your vehicle’s voice rec-
ognition system, and use your smartphone’s
data plan to project your Android powered
smartphone and a number of its apps onto
your Uconnect touchscreen. Connect your
Android 5.0 (Lollipop), or higher, to one of
the media USB ports, using the factory-
provided USB cable, and press the new
Android Auto icon that replaces your “Phone”
icon on the main menu bar to begin Android
Auto.
Push and hold the VR button on the steering
wheel, or press and hold the “Microphone”
icon within Android Auto, to activate
Android’s VR, which recognizes natural voice
commands, to use a list of your smartphone’s
features:
• Maps
• Music
• Phone
• Text Messages
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible smartphone running
Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and down-
load app on Google Play. Android, Android
Auto, and Google Play are trademarks of
Google Inc.
Apple CarPlay — If Equipped
NOTE:
Feature availability depends on your carrier
and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple
CarPlay features may or may not be available
in every region and/or language.
Android Auto On 7-inch Display
Android Auto On 8.4-inch Display
321
Apple CarPlay allows you to use your voice to
interact with Siri through your vehicle’s voice
recognition system, and use your smart-
phone’s data plan to project your iPhone and
a number of its apps onto your Uconnect
touchscreen. Connect your iPhone 5, or
higher, to one of the media USB ports, using
the factory-provided Lightning cable, and
press the new CarPlay icon that replaces your
“Phone” icon on the main menu bar to begin
Apple CarPlay. Press and hold the VR button
on the steering wheel, or press and hold the
“Home” button within Apple CarPlay, to ac-
tivate Siri, which recognizes natural voice
commands to use a list of your iPhone’s
features:
• Phone
• Music
• Messages
• Maps
• Additional Apps
Refer to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual
Supplement for further information.
NOTE:
Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for
phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.
Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple
®
.
Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.
iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-
tered in the US and other countries. Apple
terms of use and privacy statements apply.
General Information
The following regulatory statement applies to
all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in
this vehicle:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Industry Canada license-
exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-
ject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful inter-
ference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Apple CarPlay On 7-inch Display
Apple CarPlay On 8.4-inch Display
MULTIMEDIA
322
NOTE:
Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compli-
ance could void the user’s authority to oper-
ate the equipment.
Additional Information
© 2018 FCA US LLC. All rights reserved.
Mopar and Uconnect are registered trade-
marks and Mopar Owner Connect is a trade-
mark of FCA US LLC. Android is a trademark
of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks
and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio
Inc.
Uconnect System Support:
• U.S. residents visit DriveUconnect.com or
call: 1-877-855-8400 (24 hours a day
7 days a week)
• Canadian residents visit DriveUconnect.ca
or call: 1-800-465-2001 (English) or
1-800-387-9983 (French)
SiriusXM Guardian services support:
• U.S. residents visit
www.siriusxm.com/guardian
or call: 1-844-796-4827
• Canadian residents visit
www.siriusxm.ca/guardian
or call: 1-877-324-9091
323
324
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . .326
FCA US LLC Customer Center ......326
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . .326
In Mexico Contact ..............326
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . .326
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)........327
Service Contract ...............327
WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . .328
MOPARPARTS .............328
REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS .................328
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C. ..............328
In Canada...................328
PUBLICATION
ORDER FORMS .............329
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
325
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealer
are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We
want you to be happy with our products and
services.
Warranty service must be done by an autho-
rized dealer. We strongly recommend that you
take the vehicle to an authorized dealer. They
know your vehicle the best, and are most
concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer's autho-
rized dealer have the facilities, factory-
trained technicians, special tools, and the
latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
This is why you should always talk to an
authorized dealer service manager first. Most
matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied,
talk to the general manager or owner of the
authorized dealer. They want to know if you
need assistance.
• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve
the concern, you may contact the manufac-
turer's customer center.
Any communication to the manufacturer's
customer center should include the following
information:
• Owner's name and address
• Owner's telephone number
(home and office)
• Authorized dealer name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
FCA US LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (877) 426-5337
FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465-2001 English /
(800) 387-9983 French
In Mexico Contact
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 800-505-1300
Outside Mexico City: +(52)55 50817568
Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands
FCA Caribbean LLC
P.O. Box 191857
San Juan 00919-1857
Phone: (877) 426-5337
Fax: (787) 782-3345
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
326
Customer Assistance For The Hearing
Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing diffi-
culties, the manufacturer has installed spe-
cial TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the
Deaf) equipment at its customer center. Any
hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional tele-
typewriter (TTY) in the United States, can
communicate with the manufacturer by dial-
ing 1-800-380-CHRY.
Canadian residents with hearing difficulties
that require assistance can use the special
needs relay service offered by Bell Canada.
For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for
Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to con-
nect with a Bell Relay Service operator.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract
for a vehicle to help protect you from the high
cost of unexpected repairs after the manufac-
turer's New Vehicle Limited Warranty expires.
The manufacturer stands behind only the
manufacturer's service contracts. If you pur-
chased a manufacturer's service contract,
you will receive Plan Provisions and an Owner
Identification Card in the mail within three
weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you have
any questions about the service contract, call
the manufacturer's Service Contract National
Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Ca-
nadian residents, call (800) 465-2001 Eng-
lish / (800) 387-9983 French).
The manufacturer will not stand behind any
service contract that is not the manufactur-
er's service contract. It is not responsible for
any service contract other than the manufac-
turer's service contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer's
service contract, and you require service after
the manufacturer's New Vehicle Limited War-
ranty expires, please refer to the contract
documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major
investment when you purchased the vehicle.
An authorized dealer has also made a major
investment in facilities, tools, and training to
assure that you are absolutely delighted with
the ownership experience. You will be
pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve
any warranty issues or related concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust (internal combustion en-
gines only), some of its constituents, and
certain vehicle components contain, or
emit, chemicals known to the State of
California to cause cancer and birth de-
fects, or other reproductive harm. In addi-
tion, certain fluids contained in vehicles
and certain products of component wear
contain, or emit, chemicals known to the
State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
327
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the
terms and provisions of FCA US LLC warran-
ties applicable to this vehicle and market.
MOPAR PARTS
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories
are available from an authorized dealer. They
are recommended for your vehicle in order to
help keep the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING
SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And
Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a
defect that could cause a crash or
cause injury or death, you should im-
mediately inform the National High-
way Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying FCA
US LLC.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints,
it may open an investigation, and if it
finds that a safety defect exists in a
group of vehicles, it may order a recall
and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in in-
dividual problems between you, an au-
thorized dealer or FCA US LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at
1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); or go to
http://www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New
Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,
Washington, D.C. 20590. You can
also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a
safety defect, you should contact the
Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish
to report a safety defect to the Cana-
dian government should contact
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle De-
fect Investigations and Recalls at
1-800-333-0510 or go to
http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/.
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
328
PUBLICATION ORDER
FORMS
• You can purchase a copy of the Owner's
Manual, Navigation/Uconnect Manuals or
Warranty Booklet. United States customers
may visit the Jeep Contact Us page at
www.jeep.com scroll to the bottom of the
page and select the “Contact Us” link, then
select the “Owner’s Manual and Glove
Compartment Material” from the left menu.
You can also purchase a copy by calling
1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada).
• Replacement User Guide kits or, if you
prefer, additional printed copies of the
Owner's Manual, Warranty Booklet or Radio
Manuals may be purchased by visiting
www.techauthority.com or by calling
1-877-890-4038 (U.S.) or
1-800-387-1143 (Canada). Visa, Master
Card, American Express and Discover or-
ders are accepted.
NOTE:
• The Owner's Manual and User Guide elec-
tronic files are also available on the
Chrysler, Jeep, Ram Truck, Dodge and SRT
websites.
• Click on the “For Owners” tab, select
“Owner/Service Manuals”. Then select your
desired model year and vehicle from the
drop down lists.
329
330
Accessories..................260
Mopar ...................260
Adding Fuel .................178
Additives, Fuel................256
Air Bag
Air Bag Operation ............116
Air Bag Warning Light ......113, 116
Enhanced Accident Response .126, 214
Event Data Recorder (EDR) ......214
Front Air Bag ...........114, 116
If Deployment Occurs .........125
Knee Impact Bolsters .........123
Maintaining Your Air Bag System . .127
Maintenance ...............127
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light . .113
Transporting Pets ............144
Air Bag Light...........73, 113, 145
Air Conditioner Maintenance .......223
Air Conditioner Refrigerant ........223
Air Conditioner System...........223
Air Conditioning Filter.........48, 224
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips ......47
Air Conditioning System ...........46
Air Pressure
Tires ....................239
Alarm
Arm The System .............19
Disarm The System ............19
Security Alarm ............19, 76
Android Auto ..........281, 287, 321
Apps ....................290
Communication .............290
Maps ...................289
Music ...................290
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) ........256
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .......86
Anti-Lock Warning Light ...........76
Apple CarPlay .........283, 291, 321
Apps ....................293
Maps ...................292
Messages .................292
Music ...................292
Phone ...................292
Assist,
Hill Start................88
Audio Systems (Radio) ...........276
Auto Down Power Windows .........49
Automatic Headlights ............38
Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . .46
Automatic Transmission ..........157
Fluid Level Check ............229
Fluid Type ................259
Auxiliary Electrical Outlet
(Power Outlet) ...............64
Auxiliary Power Outlet ............64
Auxiliary Switches ..............67
Axle Fluid...................259
Axle Lock ...................164
Battery ..................74, 222
Charging System Light ..........74
Belts, Seat ..................145
Blind Spot Monitoring ............95
B-Pillar Location ..............235
Brake Assist System .............87
Brake Control System ............87
Brake Fluid ..............228, 259
Brake System ................228
Fluid Check ...............228
Master Cylinder .............228
Warning Light ...............73
Brake/Transmission Interlock .......157
Bulb Replacement ..........191, 193
Bulbs, Light ..............146, 191
Camera, Rear ................176
INDEX
331
Capacities, Fluid ..............256
Caps, Filler
Fuel ....................178
Oil (Engine) ...............220
Carbon Monoxide Warning .........144
Car Washes ..................249
Center High Mounted Stop Light .....195
Chains, Tire..................246
Changing A Flat Tire ............229
Chart, Tire Sizing ..............231
Check Engine Light (Malfunction
Indicator Light) ..............83
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . .144
Checks, Safety ................144
Child Restraint................128
Child Restraints
Booster Seats ..............130
Child Seat Installation .........141
How To Stow An unused
ALR Seat Belt ..............138
Infant And Child Restraints ......129
LATCH Positions ............133
Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . .135
Lower Anchors And Tethers For
Children ..................132
Older Children And Child
Restraints ................130
Seating Positions ............131
Cleaning
Wheels ..................244
Climate Control
Automatic .................40
Clock Settings ................275
Compact Spare Tire .............243
Connector
UCI ....................294
Universal Consumer Interface
(UCI) ...................294
Contract, Service ..............327
Cooling System ...............227
Coolant Capacity ............256
Inspection ................228
Selection Of Coolant
(Antifreeze) ............256, 258
Cruise Light .............80, 81, 82
Customer
Assistance ............326
Cybersecurity.................265
Daytime Running Lights ...........37
Dealer Service ................223
Defroster, Windshield............145
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers .........39
Diagnostic System, Onboard ........82
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .........37
Dipsticks
Oil (Engine) ...............222
Disabled Vehicle Towing ..........212
Disturb .................310, 320
Door Ajar .................74, 75
Door Ajar Light ..............74, 75
Doors ......................20
Removal ................23, 26
Removal, Front ..............23
Removal, Rear ...............26
Drag And Drop Menu ........279, 285
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt ............27
Dual Top ....................56
Electrical Outlet, Auxiliary
(Power Outlet) ...............64
Electrical Power Outlets ...........64
Electric Brake Control System .......87
Anti-Lock Brake System .........86
Electronic Roll Mitigation .....89, 92
Electronic Speed Control
(Cruise Control)..............172
Electronic Stability Control (ESC) .....89
Electronic Throttle Control
Warning Light ...............74
Emergency, In Case Of
Jacking ...............203, 229
INDEX
332
Jump Starting ..............207
Tow Hooks ................214
Emission Control System
Maintenance ................83
Engine.....................220
Break-In Recommendations ......152
Compartment ...........220, 221
Compartment Identification . .220, 221
Coolant (Antifreeze) ...........258
Cooling ..................227
Exhaust Gas Caution ..........144
Fuel Requirements ........255, 256
Jump Starting ..............207
Oil..................256, 258
Oil Filler Cap ...............220
Oil Reset ..................71
Oil Selection ...............256
Overheating ...............209
Starting ..................149
Enhanced Accident Response
Feature ...............126, 214
Exhaust Gas Caution ............144
Exhaust System ...............144
Exterior Lights .............37, 146
Fabric Care ..................249
Fabric Top ..................249
Filters
Air Conditioning ..........48, 224
Engine Oil ................258
Flashers
Hazard Warning .............186
Turn Signal .........146, 193, 194
Turn Signals ................80
Flash-To-Pass .................38
Fluid, Brake .................259
Fluid Capacities ...............256
Fluid Leaks ..................146
Fluid Level Checks
Brake ...................228
Engine Oil ................222
Manual
Transmission ..........229
Fluids And Lubricants ...........258
Fog Lights ..................194
Fog Light Service ..............194
Fold And Tumble Rear Seat .........30
Fold-Flat Seats ................27
Folding Rear Seats ..............29
Four-Way Hazard Flasher..........186
Four Wheel Drive ..............159
Operation .................159
Shifting ..................159
Systems ..................159
Four Wheel Drive Operation . . . .159, 161
Freedom Panels ................54
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle ..........211
Fuel ......................255
Adding ..................178
Additives .................256
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) ..........178
Gasoline .................255
Materials Added .............256
Octane Rating ...........255, 258
Requirements ..............256
Specifications ..............258
Tank Capacity ..............256
Fueling ....................178
Fuses .....................196
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ......60
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) ......178, 179
Gasoline (Fuel)................255
Gear Ranges .................153
Glass Cleaning ................252
Hard Top ....................54
Hazard Warning Flasher ..........186
Headlights
Automatic .................38
Bulb Replacement ...........193
Cleaning .................248
333
High Beam/Low Beam
Select Switch ...............37
Passing ...................38
Replacing .................193
Head Restraints ................32
Heated Mirrors.................36
High Beam/Low Beam Select
(Dimmer) Switch..............37
Hill Descent Control .............93
Hill Descent Control Indicator .......93
Hill Start Assist ................88
HomeLink (Garage Door Opener)......60
Hood Prop ...................59
Hood Release .................59
Ignition .....................16
Switch ...................16
Inside Rearview Mirror ...........186
Installation ...................54
Installing ....................56
Instrument Cluster
Descriptions ................80
Display ...................70
Engine Oil Reset .............71
Menu Items ................72
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning .....252
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . .196
Interior Appearance Care .........251
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) ....39
Introduction ...................1
In Vehicle Help
Vehicle User Guide ............13
Inverter, Power ................66
Jacking Instructions ............204
Jack Location ................203
Jack Operation .........204, 205, 229
Jump Starting ................207
Key Fob
Arm The System .............19
Disarm The System ............19
Keyless Enter-N-Go ..............20
Passive Entry ...............20
Keys .......................14
Replacement ...............15
Lane Change Assist..............38
Lap/Shoulder Belts .............106
Latches ....................146
Hood ....................59
Leaks, Fluid .................146
Life
Of Tires .................241
Light Bulbs ..............146, 191
Lights .....................146
AirBag ............73, 113, 145
Automatic Headlights ..........38
Back-Up .................194
Brake Assist Warning ...........91
Brake Warning ...............73
Bulb Replacement ........191, 193
Center Mounted Stop ..........195
Cruise ...............80, 81, 82
Daytime Running .............37
Dimmer Switch, Headlight .......37
Engine Temperature Warning ......74
Exterior ..................146
Fog.....................194
Hazard Warning Flasher ........186
Headlights ................193
High Beam .................37
High Beam/Low Beam Select ......37
Hill Descent Control Indicator .....93
Malfunction Indicator
(Check Engine) ..............77
Park .....................80
Passing ...................38
Rear Servicing ..............194
Rear Tail Lamps .............194
Seat Belt Reminder ...........75
Security Alarm ..............76
INDEX
334
Service ...............191, 193
Side Marker ...............194
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) ....98
Traction Control ..............91
Turn Signal .........146, 193, 194
Turn Signals ................80
Warning Instrument Cluster
Descriptions .............74, 80
Loading Vehicle
Tires ....................235
Locking Axle .................164
Lowering ....................50
Lowering The Top ...............50
Low Tire Pressure System ..........98
Lug Nuts ...................254
Maintenance ..................57
Maintenance Free Battery .........222
Maintenance Schedule ...........216
Malfunction Indicator Light
(Check Engine) ............77, 83
Manual Park Release ............210
Manual, Service ...............329
Manual Transmission ........152, 229
Fluid Level Check ............229
Lubricant Selection ...........259
Shift Speeds ...............153
Memory Feature (Memory Seats) ......27
Memory Seat..................27
Memory Seats And Radio ..........27
Mirrors .....................36
Heated ...................36
Rearview .................186
Monitor, Tire Pressure System .......98
Mopar Accessories .............260
Mopar Parts .................328
Navigation ..................296
New Vehicle Break-In Period .......152
Occupant Restraints ............104
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . .255, 258
Oil, Engine ..................258
Capacity .................256
Dipstick ..................222
Filter ....................258
Pressure
Warning Light .........75
Recommendation ............256
Viscosity .................256
Oil Pressure Light ...............75
Oil Reset ....................71
Onboard Diagnostic System .........82
Operating Precautions ............82
Overheating, Engine ............209
Owner's Manual (Operator Manual) . . .329
Paddle Shifters ...............158
ParkSense System, Rear ..........174
Passive Entry..................20
Personalized Main Menu ......279, 285
Pets ......................144
Phonebook ..................309
Phone (Uconnect) ..............302
Pairing ..................305
Placard, Tire And Loading
Information ................235
Power
Inverter ...................66
Windows ..................48
Power Sliding Top ...............57
Operation ..................57
Pinch Protect ...............57
Power Steering Fluid ............259
Pregnant Women And Seat Belts .....110
Preparation For Jacking ..........204
Pretensioners
Seat Belts ................110
Radial Ply Tires ...............240
Radio
Presets ...........276, 280, 286
335
Radio Frequency
General Information .........16, 19
Radio Operation ........274, 277, 284
Radio Screens ............277, 284
Raising .....................50
Raising The Soft Top .............50
Rear Camera .................176
Rear Cross Path ................97
Rear ParkSense System ..........174
Rear Swing Gate ...............59
Rear Wiper/Washer ..............40
Recreational Towing ............181
Shifting Into Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ................182
Shifting Out Of Transfer Case
Neutral (N) ................183
Release, Hood .................59
Reminder, Seat Belt ............105
Remote Control
Starting System ..............17
Remote Keyless Entry
Arm The Alarm ..............19
Disarm The Alarm ............19
Remote Sound System (Radio)
Controls ..................266
Remote Starting System ...........17
Removable Doors ............23, 26
Front ....................23
Rear .....................26
Removable Top ......49, 50, 54, 56, 57
Dual Top Operation ............49
Removal ....................54
Removing....................56
Replacement Bulbs .............191
Replacement Keys ..............15
Replacement Tires .............241
Reporting Safety Defects .........328
Restraints, Child ..............128
Restraints, Head ...............32
Roll Over Warning ...............2
Rotation, Tires ................246
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle .......145
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle ......146
Safety Defects, Reporting .........328
Safety, Exhaust Gas
.............144
Safety
Information, Tire ..........229
Safety Tips ..................144
Schedule, Maintenance ..........216
Seat Belt
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) .111
Seat Belt Maintenance ...........251
Seat Belt Reminder..............75
Seat Belts ...............105, 145
Adjustable Shoulder Belt .......109
Adjustable Upper Shoulder
Anchorage ................109
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt
Anchorage ................109
Child Restraints .............128
Energy Management Feature .....111
Extender .................110
Front Seat .........105, 106, 107
Inspection ................145
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation .....107
Lap/Shoulder Belts ...........106
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting .....109
Operating Instructions .........107
Pregnant Women ............110
Pretensioners ..............110
Rear Seat .................106
Reminder .................105
Seat Belt Extender ...........110
Seat Belt Pretensioner .........110
Untwisting Procedure .........109
Seats ......................27
Adjustment ................27
Fold And Tumble Rear ..........30
Rear Folding ................27
Tilting ....................27
Security Alarm ..............19, 76
INDEX
336
Arm The System .............19
Disarm The System ............19
Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze).....258
Sentry Key Replacement...........15
Service Assistance .............326
Service Contract ...............327
Service Manuals ...............329
Shifting ....................156
Automatic Transmission .....156, 157
Manual Transmission ..........152
Transfer Case, Shifting Into
Transfer Case Neutral (N) .......182
Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of
Transfer Case Neutral (N) .......183
Shoulder Belts ................106
Signals, Turn .......80, 146, 193, 194
Siri .......................320
Sirius Satellite Radio
Traffic & Weather ............300
Sirius Travel Link ..............300
SiriusXM Guardian .............266
Account ..................266
App ....................268
In Vehicle Features ...........269
Maintaining Your Account .......269
Registration ...............267
Remote Features ............272
Renewing Subscriptions ........268
Send&Go ................273
Vehicle Finder ..............273
Vehicle Health Alert ..........319
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) .........246
Snow Tires ..................243
Soft Top ..................50, 56
Spare Tire...................203
Spare Tires...............243, 244
Spark Plugs..................258
Specifications
Fuel (Gasoline) .............258
O
il .....................258
Speed Control
Accel/Decel ................174
Cancel ...................174
Resume ..................174
Speed Control (Cruise Control) ......172
Starting ....................149
Button ...................16
Remote ...................17
Starting And Operating ...........149
Starting Procedures .............149
Steering.....................35
Tilt Column .................35
Wheel, Heated ...............35
Wheel, Tilt .................35
Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......266
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls .............266
Stop/Start System ..........166, 169
Storage, Vehicle ............47, 248
Storing Your Vehicle ............248
Stuck, Freeing ................211
Sun Roof ....................57
Sway Bar Disconnect, Electronic .....165
Sway Control, Trailer .............93
Swing Gate, Rear ...............59
System, Remote Starting ..........17
Telescoping Steering Column ........35
Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . .46
Text Messages.............276, 310
Tilt Steering Column .............35
Tire And Loading Information Placard . .235
Tire Markings.................230
Tires............146, 238, 243, 247
Aging (Life Of Tires) ..........241
Air Pressure ...............238
Chains ...................246
Changing ..............203, 229
Compact Spare .............243
General Information .......238, 243
High Speed ................239
337
Inflation Pressure ............239
Jacking ...............205, 229
Life Of Tires ...............241
Load Capacity ..............235
Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) .78
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . .98
Quality Grading .............247
Radial ...................240
Replacement ...............241
Rotation ..................246
Safety ...............229, 238
Sizes ...................231
Snow Tires ................243
Spare Tire .................203
Spare Tires ............243, 244
Spinning .................240
Tread Wear Indicators .........241
Wheel Nut Torque ............254
Tire Safety Information ...........229
To Open Hood .................59
Top
Dual ..................49, 56
Freedom ..................54
Hard .....................54
Power Sliding ...............57
Removable ......49, 50, 54, 56, 57
Soft ..................50, 56
Tow Hooks, Emergency...........214
Towing .................180, 212
Disabled Vehicle ............212
Recreational ...............181
Weight ...................180
Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . .181
Trac-Lok Rear Axle .............164
Traction Control ................89
Trailer Sway Control (TSC)..........93
Trailer Towing ................180
Trailer And Tongue Weight .......180
Trailer Towing Guide ............180
Trailer Weight ................180
T
ransfer Case
Fluid ....................259
Four-Wheel-Drive Operation . .159, 161
Transmission .................157
Automatic .............157, 229
Fluid ....................259
Maintenance ...............229
Manual ..................152
Shifting ..................156
Transporting Pets ..............144
Tread Wear Indicators ...........241
Turn Signals ...........80, 193, 194
UCI Connector ................294
Uconnect
Uconnect Settings ...........293
Uconnect 3 With 5-Inch Display .....274
Uconnect 4C/4C Nav With
8.4-Inch Display .............284
Uconnect 4 With 7-Inch Display .....277
Uconnect Phone...............302
Making A Call ..............309
Pairing ..................305
Uconnect Settings
Customer Programmable
Features ...............20, 293
Passive Entry Programming .......20
Uniform Tire Quality Grades........247
Universal Consumer Interface
(UCI) Connector .............294
Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt .....109
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). . .254
Vehicle Loading ...............235
Vehicle Storage .............47, 248
Vehicle User Guide
In Vehicle Help ..............13
Voice Command ...........309, 312
Voice Recognition System (VR) . .309, 312
INDEX
338
Warning Lights (Instrument Cluster
Descriptions) ................77
Warnings, Roll Over ..............2
Warranty Information ............328
Washers, Windshield ............222
Washing Vehicle ...............249
Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ........244
Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ........244
Wind Buffeting ................49
Window Fogging ................47
Windows ....................48
Power ....................48
Windshield Defroster ............145
Windshield Washers ..........39, 222
Fluid ....................222
Windshield Wiper Blades .........225
Windshield Wipers ..............39
Wiper, Rear...................40
Wipers Blade Replacement ........225
339
340
Important
Get warranty and other information online – you can
review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,
Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties
provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting
www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).
Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of
the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada)
homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable
year, make and model of your vehicle.
If you are the first registered retail owner of your vehicle, you
may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty
Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143
(Canada) or by contacting your dealer.
The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the
vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,
resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly
recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any
device or feature that may take their attention o the road.
Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,
computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,
by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could
lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous
and should never be done while the vehicle is moving.
If you find yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle
operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your
vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular
telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s
responsibility to comply with all local laws.
Driving and Alcohol
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with
blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and
your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.
Never drink and then drive.
This guide has been prepared to help you get
quickly acquainted with your new Jeep
brand
vehicle and to provide a convenient reference
source for common questions. However, it is not
a substitute for your Owner’s Manual.
For complete operational instructions, maintenance
procedures and important safety messages, please
consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect
manuals found on the website on the back cover
and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.
Not all features shown in this guide may apply
to your vehicle. For additional information on
accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit
www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)
or your local Jeep
brand dealer.
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-road
highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,
do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area
and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more
information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
3712766_18c_Jeep_Wrangler_JL_UG_Rev1_091118.indd 2 9/11/18 9:43 AM
©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved.
Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.
Whether it’s providing information about specific product features, taking a tour through your
vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next
appointment, we know you’ll find the app an important extension of your Jeep
brand vehicle.
Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.
To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP”
(U.S. residents only).
www.jeep.com⁄en ⁄owners (U.S.) provides special oers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,
personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.
Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s
Manual, Navigation ⁄ Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle
by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the
“Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow
the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.
DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,
media and warranty booklet by visiting:
www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);
www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).
Jeep.com (U.S.)
Jeep.ca (Canada)
18JL-926-AA
WRANGLER
Third Edition Rev 1
User Guide
2018 JEEP
WRANGLER USER GUIDE
ALL NEW
3712766_18c_Jeep_Wrangler_JL_UG_Rev1_091118.indd 1 9/11/18 9:43 AM
